How To Feed A Loon

menu icon
subscribe
search icon

Classic Argentine Beef Empanadas

by Leave a Comment

These Classic Argentine Beef Empanadas are the ultimate savory treat, featuring a juicy, spiced beef filling tucked inside a tender, flaky homemade lard crust. Traditionally known as Mendocinas, every bite is packed with rich flavor from slow-cooked onions, briny olives, and the perfect blend of warm spices. Master the signature braid and bring a true taste of Argentina right to your kitchen!

An Argentine Beef Empanada that has been cut in half revealing it beef, green olive, and hard boiled egg filling resting on another whole empanada.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🫒 The Ingredients

This recipe pairs savory staples with traditional fats and warm spices to create a rich, flavorful filling encased in a perfectly tender, golden-brown crust. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Argentine Beef Empanada on a grey wooden background including ground beef, onion, flour, pork lard, hard boiled eggs, olives, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Pork Lard: This is the traditional secret to a tender, “short” crust and a rich filling. If you can’t find high-quality lard, you can substitute it with an equal amount of softened unsalted butter or vegetable shortening.
  • Ground Beef: We recommend using 80/20 lean beef to ensure the filling is juicy and flavorful. For a more rustic, traditional texture, you can also use very finely hand-chopped sirloin.
  • Spanish Smoked Paprika (Pimentón): This is essential for the signature reddish color and deep, smoky undertone of the meat. If you only have regular paprika, add a tiny pinch of extra red pepper flakes to compensate for the depth.
  • Scallions & Red Pepper Flakes: The scallions (green onions) should be stirred in at the very end to provide a burst of freshness, while the red pepper flakes add a subtle, warm heat that cuts through the richness of the beef.
  • Hard-Boiled Eggs & Green Olives: These are the hallmarks of the Mendocina style. They provide a wonderful contrast in texture and a briny pop of flavor that makes these empanadas truly world-class.
  • Egg Yolk: Adding a single yolk to the dough acts as an emulsifier, making the dough richer, more golden, and much easier to roll out without shrinking back.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Empanada

  • Don’t Drain the Fat: It might be tempting to drain the grease after browning the beef, but resist the urge! That rendered fat, combined with the onions and spices, creates the signature “jugo” (juice) that makes a classic empanada moist and flavorful.
  • The “Big Chill” is Key: Always refrigerate your filling until it is completely cold (ideally overnight) before assembling. This solidifies the juices, making it easy to scoop and ensuring the fat doesn’t leak out and ruin your dough seal while you’re braiding.
  • Master the “Repulgue” (Braid): If you’re new to the traditional braid, don’t stress! The secret is to keep your edges clean and dry. If the dough feels too warm or stretchy, pop it back in the fridge for 10 minutes to firm up the lard; cold dough is much easier to fold.
  • Avoid the “Blowout”: Before you finish the final tuck of your braid, gently press down on the filling to push out any trapped air. This prevents the empanadas from puffing up like balloons and bursting open in the hot oven.
  • The Double Egg Wash: For that deep-golden glow, brush the empanadas with egg wash, let them sit for two minutes, and then hit them with a second coat right before they go into the oven.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make the Beef Empanada Filling

A person using a wooden spatula to stir a large amount of chopped onions that are being sautéed in a large skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Sauté the onion in pork lard (or butter) for 8 to 10 minutes.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir ground beef and chopped onions that are being cooked in a large skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add the ground beef and cook until no longer pink. Don’t drain the rendered grease.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir cooked ground beef, sautéed onions, with smoked paprika, ground cumin, and salt in a large skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the smoked paprika, cumin, and salt.
A person transferring a beef empanada filling from a large skillet onto a baking pan.
  1. Step 4: Transfer to a baking pan and chill for 1 to 2 hours.

Expert Tip: The Secret to a Juicy Empanada

Whatever you do, do not drain the rendered fat from your beef! In Argentina, this is the “secret sauce” that creates the signature juice (or jugo) inside the pastry. By chilling the filling completely, the fat solidifies, allowing you to scoop and seal the empanadas with ease without any messy leaks; then, once they hit the hot oven, that fat melts back down to create a rich, flavorful broth that makes every bite legendary.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Empanada Dough

A person using his two hands to work softened pork lard into flour in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: Mix the flour with the salt, and then work the softened lard into the mixture with your hands. It should resemble wet sand.
A person pouring an egg and water mixture into a bowl that is filled with a flour and pork lard mixture that has a well formed in the middle of the bowl.
  1. Step 2: Make a well in the center of the flour/lard mixture and pour in the egg yolk that has been combined with the warm water.
A person using two hands to form an empanada dough into a bowl on a black marble surface.
  1. Step 3: Massage the mixture, and then turn it out onto your surface and knead for 2 minutes.
A person holding a ball of empanada dough that is wrapped in plastic wrap that he is about to place in a refrigerator.
  1. Step 4: Wrap in plastic wrap and refrigerate for 1 hour.

Expert Tip: No Lard? No Problem!

If you can’t find high-quality pork lard, the best substitute is an equal amount of softened unsalted butter. While lard provides that traditional, tender “short” crumble, butter will yield a slightly flakier, rich crust that is absolutely “Loon-approved.” Just make sure the butter is at room temperature so you can easily rub it into the flour to achieve that perfect “wet sand” texture before adding your liquids.

🧑🏾‍🍳 How to Make Argentine Empanadas

A person holding a glass top of a pan over a stretched out circular piece of empanada dough that he has used to cut a circular piece of dough.
  1. Step 1: Cut the dough in half, roll it out to ⅛”, and then use a lid (or whatever you have on hand) to cut a 6″ circle. Repeat with the remaining dough.
A person using his fingers to place chopped hard boiled eggs over a pile of beef filling that is the center of an empanada circular piece of dough.
  1. Step 2: Place 3 tablespoon of the chilled meat mixture in the center of the cut dough. Top with chopped olives and hard-boiled eggs.
A person using his fingers to press the edges of a folded over uncooked Argentine Beef Empanada on a black marble counter.
  1. Step 3: Brush the edge of the dough with water, bring the sides over, and press them with your fingers to seal.
A person using two hands to crimp the edges of an uncooked Argentine Beef Empanada.
  1. Step 4: Use your fingers to twist and turn the edges, or use a fork to crimp. (See video for visual guidance.)
A person using a pastry brush to apply an egg wash over the tops of uncooked beef empanadas on a baking pan lined with a silicone mat.
  1. Step 5: Brush the tops of the empanadas with an egg wash.
A person with oven mitts holding a baking pan that is filled with freshly baked Argentine Beef Empanadas.
  1. Step 6: Bake until golden, about 12 to 15 minutes.

Expert Tip: Master the Repulgue (Braid)

To achieve that iconic rope-like braid, firmly press the edges of your half-moon to create a flat rim, ensuring the dough is clean and free of any filling. Starting at one corner, pinch a small piece of the dough and fold it over toward the center, repeating this “pinch-and-fold” rhythm all the way around the curve. This signature seal doesn’t just look professional—it creates a sturdy, leak-proof barrier that locks in all those delicious juices while the empanadas bake!

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Let Them Rest: Allow the empanadas to rest for at least 5 to 10 minutes after taking them out of the oven. This allows the internal juices to settle so they don’t spray out on the first bite, and it gives the crust time to firm up.
  • The Ultimate Pairing: Serve these with a side of Authentic Chimichurri Sauce. The bright acidity and fresh herbs of the sauce perfectly cut through the richness of the beef and lard crust.
  • Add a Bright Side: Complement the savory flavors with a simple, crisp salad. A mix of arugula with a light lemon vinaigrette or a traditional Argentine tomato and onion salad (ensalada de tomate y cebolla) works beautifully.
  • The Wine Choice: For a truly traditional experience, serve these with a glass of Argentine Malbec. The dark fruit notes and smooth tannins of the wine are the classic match for beef empanadas.
  • Platter Style: Arrange the empanadas on a large wooden board or a rustic ceramic platter for a “family-style” presentation. They are the perfect finger food for parties, but three of these 6-inch beauties make for a very satisfying main course!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make these Argentine Beef Empanadas ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the filling and dough up to two days in advance and keep them chilled in the refrigerator. Once assembled, they can also be frozen raw on a baking sheet and then transferred to a bag to be baked straight from the freezer whenever you’re ready!

What is the best way to store and reheat leftover Argentine Beef Empanadas?

Keep any extras in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days. To regain that signature crispy texture, reheat them in a 350°F oven or an air fryer for a few minutes rather than using the microwave.

Can I use store-bought dough for Argentine Beef Empanadas?

You can certainly use pre-made “tapas” found in the freezer section of Latin markets if you are in a hurry. However, the homemade lard-based crust provides a superior flavor and a much more authentic texture that is well worth the extra effort.

A straight-on view of two rows of Argentine Beef Empanadas on a sheet of crinkled brown paper.

😋 More Savory Pastries

Ready to make the best empanada this side of Buenos Aires? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of two rows of Argentine Beef Empanadas on a sheet of crinkled brown paper.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Classic Argentine Beef Empanadas

Experience the ultimate South American comfort food with these Classic Argentine Beef Empanadas. Featuring a tender, golden-brown lard crust and a savory filling of spiced beef, slow-cooked onions, and briny olives, these hearty hand pies are as authentic as they are delicious.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Chill time2 hours
Total Time3 hours 15 minutes
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Argentina
Servings: 8
Calories: 385kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

For the Beef Filling

  • 2 tablespoon pork lard
  • 2 large onions chopped, about 3 cups
  • 1 lb ground beef 80% lean
  • 2 tablespoon smoked paprika
  • 1 tablespoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup scallions thinly sliced

For the Crust

  • 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¾ cup pork lard 6 oz, or softened butter
  • 1 egg yolk
  • ¾ cup warm water

For the Empanadas

  • 2 hard-boiled eggs chopped
  • ½ cup green olives chopped
  • 1 egg + 1 tablespoon water
  • chimichurri sauce for serving

Instructions

Prepare the Meat Mixture

  • Heat the lard in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onions and cook until very soft, about 8 – 10 minutes.
    2 tablespoon pork lard, 2 large onions
  • Add the ground beef and cook, stirring often, until no longer pink. Don't drain the rendered grease.
    1 lb ground beef
  • Stir in the paprika, cumin, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper. Turn off the heat, stir in the scallions, and then transfer the mixture to a baking pan and refrigerate for 1 to 2 hours (this is critical).
    2 tablespoon smoked paprika, 1 tablespoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper

Prepare the Dough

  • In a large bowl, whisk the flour and salt together. Add the pork lard and use your hands to work it into the flour until it resembles wet sand.
    3 cups all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ¾ cup pork lard
  • In a small bowl, whisk the egg yolk with the warm water.
    1 egg yolk, ¾ cup warm water
  • Form a well in the center of the flour/salt in the bowl. Pour about ¾ of the egg/water into the well. Use your hands, or a wooden spoon, to mix until a shaggy dough forms. Transfer the dough to a clean surface and knead for only two minutes. Wrap in plastic wrap and chill for at least 1 hour.

Make the Empanadas

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F.
  • Cut the dough in half. Place one half back into the refrigerator, covered in plastic. Roll the other half out to a 14-inch circle, about ⅛" thick.
  • Use a 6 or 7-inch lid to cut a circle in the dough. Repeat 1 or 2 more times. Roll the extra dough and cut another circle, and repeat again. You should get 4 to 5 circles with each half of the dough. Separate them with parchment (or wax) paper and chill while you are forming the empanadas.
  • Place 3 tablespoons of the chilled meat filling in the middle of the circle of dough. Top with a small mound of chopped eggs and olives. Brush water around the edges of the dough.
    2 hard-boiled eggs, ½ cup green olives
  • Fold the dough over to create a half-moon. Press the edges firmly to seal. Use your thumb to "fold and tuck" the edge into a decorative braid, or crimp tightly with a fork. See video for visual references.
  • Place the empanadas on a baking sheet lined with a silicone mat or parchment paper. Brush the tops of the empanadas with the egg wash. Bake until golden, about 25 to 30 minutes. Let rest for 5 minutes before serving.
    1 egg

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Lard Secret: For the most authentic flavor and a perfectly tender, “short” crust, high-quality pork lard is essential. If you cannot find lard, you can substitute an equal amount of softened unsalted butter; this will result in a flakier, buttery crust that is still absolutely delicious.
  • Plan Ahead: The beef filling (the recado) is actually better when made a day in advance! This gives the spices time to meld and ensures the mixture is completely chilled, which is the key to a mess-free assembly.
  • Dough Handling: When kneading the dough, stop as soon as it becomes smooth (about 2–3 minutes). You want to avoid overworking the gluten, which can make the crust tough rather than tender and pastry-like.
  • The “Clean Edge” Rule: When filling your empanadas, be careful not to let any of the meat or juices touch the outer edge of the dough disc. Any grease on the edge will act as a lubricant and prevent your repulgue braid from sealing properly.
  • Freezing for Later: These empanadas freeze beautifully! Simply assemble them (don’t egg wash yet), place them on a baking sheet in the freezer until solid, and then transfer to a freezer bag. Bake them straight from the freezer at 400°F, adding an extra 5–8 minutes to the baking time.

Nutrition

Calories: 385kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 132mg | Sodium: 782mg | Potassium: 345mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1070IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 55mg | Iron: 5mg

Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls

by Leave a Comment

These Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls are the ultimate comfort food, featuring a pillowy-soft dough and smoky provolone that truly lives up to the name. They are a nostalgic nod to the legendary pizza joint favorites and are absolutely irresistible when served with a side of creamy Ranch or zesty marinara sauce for dipping.

A person using his two hands to pull apart a melt-in-your-mouth pepperoni roll over a trey filled with more pepperoni rolls.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍕 The Ingredients

This recipe transforms simple pantry staples into a gourmet snack by wrapping a soft, sweetened dough around a smoky, savory center and finishing it all with a fragrant, herb-infused butter topping. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls on a grey wooden background including flour, water, sugar, salt, oil, yeast, pepperoni slices, and sliced smoked Provolone.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • The Yeast: We recommend Active Dry Yeast for that classic rise, but if you are in a hurry, you can use Instant Yeast; just skip the 10-minute “blooming” step and mix it straight into the dry ingredients.
  • All-Purpose Flour: This is the key to the “melt-in-your-mouth” texture; while bread flour works, it will produce a chewier, more “pizza-crust” style roll rather than the soft, pillowy finish we’re after.
  • Smoked Provolone: This is the “secret ingredient” that provides that signature depth of flavor, but if you can’t find it, regular provolone or a high-quality whole-milk mozzarella are excellent, gooey substitutes.
  • Vegetable Oil: A neutral oil, like canola or grapeseed, works perfectly here to keep the dough tender; avoid extra virgin olive oil if you want to maintain that specific “DoubleDave’s” sweetness.
  • Pepperoni: Thinly sliced pepperoni is much easier to roll into the “cigar” shape than thick-cut or stick pepperoni, and it ensures you get a bit of salty goodness in every single bite.
  • Dried Oregano: We love the earthy punch of oregano in the garlic butter, but feel free to swap it for dried parsley or even an Italian seasoning blend for a different herbaceous kick.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Pepperoni Rolls

  • Watch the Water Temperature: To keep the yeast happy, ensure your water is between 105°F and 110°F. If it’s too hot, it will kill the yeast; if it’s too cold, the dough won’t rise properly.
  • Don’t Over-Flour: When kneading, add flour only until the dough just clears the sides of the bowl. A slightly tacky dough leads to a much softer, more pillowy roll than a dry, stiff dough.
  • The “Kissing” Technique: For those ultra-soft, steamy sides, place the rolls about an inch apart on the baking sheet. As they rise and bake, they will expand and touch (or “kiss”), which prevents the sides from forming a crust.
  • The Second Rise is Mandatory: Don’t rush the process! That 20–30 minute rest after shaping is what allows the air bubbles to form, ensuring they truly “melt in your mouth” rather than being dense.
  • Pull Them Early: These rolls are best when they are just barely golden. If you wait until they are dark brown, the crust will be too crunchy. Remember, they will continue to firm up slightly as they cool!
  • Butter Immediately: Have your garlic butter ready to go the moment the tray leaves the oven. Brushing them while they are screaming hot allows the butter to soak into the surface rather than just sitting on top.
  • Reheating Magic: If you have leftovers, the best way to revive that “just-baked” texture is 3–5 minutes in a 350°F air fryer or oven. Avoid the microwave if possible, as it can make the dough a bit chewy.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Pepperoni Rolls Dough

Active yeast that is foaming in warm water with sugar in the bowl of a stand-mixer.
  1. Step 1: Whisk the warm water, sugar, and yeast in the bowl of your stand mixer. Let it “bloom” for 5 to 7 minutes.
A person adding all-purpose flour into a stand-mixer that is beating dough for pepperoni rolls.
  1. Step 2: Gradually beat in the flour. Mix on medium-low speed (Speed 2) for 7 minutes until the dough is smooth and elastic.
A person holding a smooth ball of pepperoni roll dough over a plastic proofing container.
  1. Step 3: Form the dough into a smooth ball. Spray a bowl (or proofing container) with cooking spray, cover.
A person using his hand to remove the lid from a plastic proofing container that is filled with dough that has been proofed and doubled in size.
  1. Step 4: Proof in a warm area until doubled in size, about 60 to 90 minutes.

Expert Tip: The Secret is in the “Tackiness“

For the ultimate pillowy texture, resist the urge to keep adding flour until the dough is completely dry; you want it to be slightly tacky to the touch. A dough that is just barely manageable—meaning it clears the sides of the mixer but still feels a bit “grippy”—is exactly what creates those light, airy layers that seem to disappear the moment you take a bite.

👨‍🍳 How to Prepare Melt-In-Your-Mouthe Pepperoni Rolls

Pepperoni roll dough that has been rolled out into a 14-inch circle on a lightly flour black marble surface.
  1. Step 1: Cut the dough in half and roll it to about a 14-inch diameter and about ⅛-inch thickness on a lightly floured surface.
A person placing thinly sliced pepperoni over a strip of Provolone cheese along the out edges pepperoni roll dough that has been rolled into a 14-inch circle.
  1. Step 2: Place 6 to 8 half-circles of the cheese about ½-inch from the edge of the dough. Layer 6 to 8 pieces of pepperoni over the cheese. Space them apart by about 1 inch.
A person using both hands to roll a triangular piece of dough that is filled with Provolone cheese and thinly sliced pepperoni into a pepperoni roll.
  1. Step 3: Cut the dough into how many slices you are rolling (6 or 8). Tuck the top ends of the slice in and then roll tightly, stretching the dough as you go. Repeat with the remaining dough, cheese, and pepperoni.
A person placing plastic wrap over a large baking pan that is filled with unbaked Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls.
  1. Step 4: Place on a large baking pan. Bend the rolls slightly to form a slight crescent shape. Cover with plastic wrap. Proof for another 20 to 30 minutes.
A person holding a large baking pan that is filled with 12 freshly baked Melt-in-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls.
  1. Step 5: Remove plastic, and bake at 375°F until just starting to brown, about
A person using a pastry brush to add seasoned melted butter over the toops of freshly baked Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls.
  1. Step 6: While the rolls are baking, melt the butter with the garlic powder and oregano. As soon as the rolls come out of the oven, brush them with the garlic butter. Serve warm!

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Serve Them Warm: These rolls are at their absolute peak when served fresh and warm from the oven. That’s when the dough is at its softest, and the smoked provolone is perfectly gooey and melted.
  • The Great Dip Debate: For the authentic experience, serve these with a side of creamy Buttermilk Ranch—the cool tang of the ranch perfectly complements the salty pepperoni. If you’re a traditionalist, a bowl of warm, zesty marinara is equally delicious for dipping.
  • Game Day Ready: These are the ultimate “crowd-pleaser” appetizers. Pile them high on a large wooden board or platter for tailgates, movie nights, or any gathering where you need a hand-held snack that will vanish in seconds.
  • Garnish for the Perfect Look: Before serving, give them one final light sprinkle of freshly chopped parsley or a dusting of grated Parmesan cheese. It adds a pop of color and an extra layer of savory flavor that makes them look as good as they taste.
  • Make it a Meal: While they are perfect as a snack, you can easily turn these into a full dinner by serving them alongside a crisp, cold Caesar salad or a big bowl of Italian wedding soup to balance out the rich, buttery flavors.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make these Pepperoni Rolls ahead of time?

Yes! You can prepare the dough and shape the rolls a day in advance, then store them in the refrigerator overnight. Just let them come to room temperature and finish their second rise before popping them into the oven.

What is the best way to store leftover Pepperoni Rolls?

Keep any extras in an airtight container at room temperature for up to two days, or in the fridge for up to a week. For longer storage, they freeze beautifully for up to three months when wrapped tightly.

Why did my Pepperoni Rolls turn out tough instead of soft?

This usually happens if too much flour was added during the kneading process or if they were baked for too long. To ensure a pillowy texture, keep the dough slightly tacky and remove the rolls from the heat as soon as they turn a pale golden hue.

Can I use different fillings inside these Pepperoni Rolls?

Absolutely! Feel free to experiment with cooked Italian sausage, ham, or even sautéed jalapeños for an extra kick. Just ensure any meat used is fully cooked and drained of excess moisture before rolling it into the wedges.

An overhead view of homemade Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls resting in metal trey lined with a red checkered piece of wax paper and a bowl of Ranch dressing up in the corner.

😋 More Classic Pizza Joint Recipes

Ready to make the best pizza rolls in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a melt-in-your-mouth pepperoni roll that has been split in half revealing the layers of pepperoni, melted cheese, and flakey dough, resting on top of a row of more pepperoni rolls.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Melt-In-Your-Mouth Pepperoni Rolls

This recipe recreates the iconic, pillowy-soft texture of the famous DoubleDave's "Peproni Rolls." By combining a slightly sweet enriched dough with the deep flavor of smoked provolone and a glistening garlic butter glaze, these rolls truly live up to their name and melt in your mouth. Whether you're dipping them in creamy ranch or zesty marinara, they are the ultimate crowd-pleasing appetizer that is guaranteed to disappear in a flash!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Resting time (Proofing)2 hours
Total Time2 hours 30 minutes
Course: Appetizer or Entree
Cuisine: American / Italian
Servings: 8
Calories: 356kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Stand mixer
  • 1 large baking pan lined with silicone mat or parchment paper

Ingredients

For the Dough

  • 1 cup warm water 105°F – 110°F
  • ¼ cup granulated sugar
  • 2¼ teaspoon active dry yeast 1 packet, see NOTES
  • ¼ cup vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 3 cups all-purpose flour plus a little more if needed, and for dusting your surface (counter)

For the Pepperoni Rolls

  • 8 slices smoked Provolone cheese cut into half-circles
  • 6 oz pepperoni thinly sliced
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter melted
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
  • Ranch dressing for serving
  • Marinara sauce for serving

Instructions

  • In the bowl of your stand mixer, add the warm water and whisk in the sugar, then add the yeast. Let it sit for 5 to 10 minutes until it becomes foamy. See NOTES.
    1 cup warm water, ¼ cup granulated sugar, 2¼ teaspoon active dry yeast
  • Attach the dough hook and add the oil, salt, and 2 cups of the flour. Mix on low (#2) until combined. Add the remaining 2 cups of flour and mix for 5 to 7 minutes until the dough is smooth, elastic, and slightly tacky to the touch. The dough should not stick to the side of the bowl. If it's sticking after 5 minutes, add about 1 tablespoon more of flour.
    ¼ cup vegetable oil, 1 teaspoon salt, 3 cups all-purpose flour
  • Remove the dough and form it into a smooth ball. Spray a large bowl or proofing container with cooking spray and turn the dough over in the oil until coated. Cover with plastic wrap (or the container lid), and place in a warm, non-drafty area until doubled in size, about 60 to 90 minutes.
  • Remove the plastic (or the lid) and gently punch the dough down with your fist. Lightly flour your work surface and transfer the dough onto it. Use a bench scraper or a large knife and cut the dough in half. Cover one of the halves with a kitchen towel.
  • Use your fingers to stretch the dough into a circle. Use a rolling pin to roll the dough into a 14-inch circle, about ⅛" thick.
  • Place 6 or 8 half-circle slices of the cheese along the edges of the dough, with about an inch between each slice. Top each slice with 6 to 8 slices of pepperoni. Use a pizza slicer to cut the dough into 6 to 8 slices (6 slices will give you large rolls).
    8 slices smoked Provolone cheese, 6 oz pepperoni
  • To create the rolls, use your fingers to wrap the upper corner of one slice, then roll tightly towards the point, stretching the dough slightly as you roll. Once completely rolled, press and seal the point into the dough. Place on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper or a silicone mat. Cover with a kitchen towel. Repeat this process with the remaining slices. And then repeat the entire process with the other half of the dough.
  • Cover the rolls with plastic wrap and allow the rest (proof) in a warm, non-drafty area for 20 to 30 minutes.
  • Preheat your oven to 375°F.
  • Remove the plastic wrap and bake the rolls for 12 to 15 minutes, until just lightly browned. Don't let them get too brown (the dough will become tough).
  • While the rolls are baking, melt the butter with the garlic powder and oregano in the microwave.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, ¼ teaspoon dried oregano
  • Remove the pepperoni rolls and immediately brush the garlic butter over the tops of them. Serve warm, with Ranch dressing or marinara sauce.
    Ranch dressing, Marinara sauce

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Check Your Yeast: Always check the expiration date on your yeast packet before starting. When blooming the yeast, if the mixture doesn’t become foamy and bubbly after 10 minutes, the yeast is dead and should be discarded. Starting over with fresh yeast is the only way to ensure your dough rises properly and achieves that signature fluffiness.
  • Don’t Over-Flour: The secret to the “melt-in-your-mouth” texture is a slightly tacky dough. Avoid the temptation to add too much flour during the kneading process; the dough should just clear the sides of the bowl but still feel a bit “grippy” to the touch.
  • Watch the Bake Time: These rolls are meant to be soft and pillowy, not crunchy. Pull them out of the oven when they are a very pale golden brown. If they get too dark, the crust will lose its tender, bread-like quality.
  • The Hot Butter Finish: For the best flavor, have your garlic butter ready to go the second the tray leaves the oven. Brushing the rolls while they are screaming hot allows the butter to soak into the dough rather than just sitting on the surface.
  • Cheese Prep: If you can’t find pre-sliced smoked provolone, ask your deli counter to slice a block for you at a “medium” thickness. This ensures you get a perfect cheese-to-dough ratio in every bite.

Nutrition

Calories: 356kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 629mg | Potassium: 121mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 2mg

Authentic Greek Baklava

by Leave a Comment

This authentic Baklava is a masterclass in balance, featuring an aromatic Greek honey glaze and a perfectly spiced nut filling that makes it the ultimate dessert showstopper. It’s a classic that proves a world-class pastry is well within your reach at home.

Close-up of authentic Greek baklava in a pan, showing the crispy, flaky phyllo layers and honey-soaked walnut and pistachio filling.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍯 The Ingredients

This recipe brings together premium Mediterranean staples, warm aromatic spices, and a citrus-infused syrup to transform crisp, buttery layers of pastry into a rich, nutty masterpiece. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Authentic Greek Baklava on a grey wooden background including phyllo dough, pistachios, walnuts, butter, honey, lemon juice, lemon peel strips, and spices.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Phyllo Dough: For the most delicate, crispy layers, look for “#4” or “Thin” phyllo dough; just be sure to thaw it slowly in the refrigerator overnight to prevent the sheets from sticking or cracking.
  • Greek Honey: While we swear by the floral depth of authentic Greek wildflower or Thyme honey, you can substitute a high-quality local honey—just avoid the standard “clover” honey if you want that signature Mediterranean complexity.
  • The Nut Blend: We find the combination of earthy walnuts and vibrant pistachios to be the perfect balance, but you can easily use 100% walnuts or even incorporate almonds for a different texture.
  • Butter: For the absolute best results, use clarified butter (ghee); by removing the milk solids, you ensure the pastry gets incredibly crisp without any burnt spots or a “heavy” greasy feel.
  • Citrus & Spices: The lemon juice and peel provide a necessary acidity to cut the sweetness, but you can swap them for orange peel and juice for a warmer, more citrus-forward flavor profile.
  • Salt: Don’t skip the pinch of salt in the nut mixture—it is essential for balancing the sugar and making the flavors of the toasted nuts truly pop.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Baklava

  • The “Hot/Cold” Rule is Non-Negotiable: To achieve that legendary “hiss” and ensure the pastry stays crisp, you must pour completely cooled syrup over the piping hot baklava the second it comes out of the oven.
  • Master the Phyllo “Damp Towel” Trick: Phyllo dough is notoriously finicky and dries out in seconds. Keep your stack of dough covered with a slightly damp (not soaking wet!) kitchen towel at all times while you work to keep the sheets pliable and easy to handle.
  • Clarify Your Butter for a Professional Finish: Taking five minutes to skim the white milk solids off your melted butter makes a world of difference.
  • Cut All the Way to the Bottom: Use your sharpest chef’s knife to cut your diamond or square patterns before the pan goes into the oven. You must cut all the way through to the bottom of the pan to ensure the syrup can reach every single layer later on.
  • Don’t Over-Process the Nuts: Aim for a “fine crumble” rather than a powder. Having a bit of texture in the nut mixture provides a much better mouthfeel and prevents the filling from becoming a dense paste.
  • The Waiting Game: We know it’s hard, but let the baklava sit uncovered at room temperature for at least 8 hours (ideally overnight). This allows the syrup to fully saturate the nuts and the pastry to “set,” making it much easier to serve and much better to eat!

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Prep for Homemade Baklava

A person using a wire whisk to stir simmering sugar water with honey, a cinnamon stick, lemon peel, and whole cloves.
  1. Step 1: Place the sugar, water, honey, lemon juice, lemon peel, cinnamon stick, and cloves in a saucepan over high heat. Bring to a boil, lower the heat, and let simmer for 10 minutes. Remove from heat to completely cool.
A person holding pulverized walnuts in his hand over a food processor filled with the nuts.
  1. Step 2: Pulverize the walnuts in a food processor. You don’t want them chopped, but not a powder (you want some texture). Place in a bowl and repeat this with the pistachios.
A person transferring ground cinnamon, ground cloves, and salt from a small white bowl into a large glass bowl filled with pulverized walnuts and pistachios.
  1. Step 3: Toss the walnuts and pistachios with the cinnamon, cloves (ground), and salt.
A person using a pastry brush to brush melted butter over the bottom and sides of a 9x13" baking dish.
  1. Step 4: Liberally brush the bottom and insides of a 9×13″ baking dish.

Expert Tip: How to Make Clarified Butter

To make clarified butter, melt your unsalted butter in a saucepan over low heat. Once melted, you’ll see a layer of white foam on top; skim this off with a spoon and discard it. Carefully pour the clear, golden liquid into a separate bowl, being careful to stop before you reach the watery, milky solids at the very bottom of the pan. It has a higher smoke point and lacks the moisture of whole butter, which is the secret to getting those phyllo layers incredibly crisp without any burnt “milk solid” spots or a soggy finish.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Classic Greek Baklava

A person using a pizza cutter to trim down layers of phyllo dough on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Add 10 sheets of phyllo to the buttered dish, brushing each sheet with more butter as you go. Top with ¾ cup of the nut mixture.
A person sprinkling a mixture of spiced pieces of walnuts and pistachios over stacks of buttered sheets of phyllo dough in a 9x13" baking dish.
  1. Step 2: Add 10 sheets of phyllo to the buttered dish, brushing each sheet with more butter as you go. Top with ¾ cup of the nut mixture.
A person sprinkling a mixture of spiced pieces of walnuts and pistachios over stacks of buttered sheets of phyllo dough in a 9x13" baking dish.
  1. Step 3: Add five more sheets of phyllo, buttering each one as you go. Top with another ¾ cup of the nuts. Repeat this process until you run out of nuts.
A person using a pastry brush to brush melted butter over the top of the top layer of baking dish filled with uncooked baklava.
  1. Step 4: Liberally brush the top layer of phyllo with melted butter.
A person using a large chef's knife to slice unbaked baklava into diamond shapes in a 9x13" baking dish.
  1. Step 5: Use a large, sharp knife to cut the baklava into squares or diamonds. See Expert Tip.
A person pouring a honey sugar glaze from a saucepan over the top of a freshly baked dish of Authentic Greek Baklava.
  1. Step 6: Bake for 55 minutes at 325°F. Remove from the oven and immediately pour the cooled honey glaze all over the top of the baklava. Let completely cool before serving (6 hours, or overnight).

Expert Tip: How to Cut Perfect Diamonds

To achieve those iconic, bakery-style diamonds, start by using a very sharp chef’s knife to cut the baklava into four or five long, parallel strips lengthwise. Next, instead of cutting straight across, cut diagonal lines from one side of the pan to the other at a 45-degree angle, spaced about 1.5 inches apart.

Pro Tip: For the cleanest edges, use a gentle “sawing” motion rather than pressing straight down, and ensure you cut all the way through to the bottom of the pan—this ensures every single piece is perfectly separated and ready to soak up that glorious honey syrup!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How should I store my Authentic Greek Baklava to keep it crispy?

Keep it at room temperature in a cool, dry place, loosely covered with a clean kitchen towel or parchment paper. Avoid airtight containers or refrigeration, as trapped moisture will cause the delicate pastry layers to lose their signature crunch.

Why did my Authentic Greek Baklava turn out soggy?

This usually happens if the temperature of the syrup and the pastry is too similar when combined. For the best results, always pour room-temperature syrup over the dessert while it is still bubbling hot from the oven to ensure proper absorption without softening the dough.

Can I make Authentic Greek Baklava ahead of time for a party?

Yes, this is actually recommended! The flavors deepen, and the texture improves significantly after sitting for at least 8 to 12 hours, and it will remain delicious for up to two weeks when kept on the counter.

Is it possible to freeze Authentic Greek Baklava for later?

Absolutely. Once it has completely cooled and set, wrap individual pieces or the entire pan tightly in plastic wrap and foil; simply thaw it at room temperature for a few hours before serving to restore its flaky consistency.

A straight-on view of a diamond-shaped piece of Authentic Greek Baklava on a white dessert plate with a gold fork nearby.

🇬🇷 More Classic Greek Recipes

Ready to make the best dessert this side of the Parthenon? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A straight-on view of a diamond-shaped piece of Authentic Greek Baklava on a white dessert plate with a gold fork nearby.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Authentic Greek Baklava

Experience forty layers of shatteringly crisp phyllo and a spiced nut filling drenched in citrus-infused honey syrup. Made with clarified butter for the ultimate crunch, this authentic dessert is a showstopper and off-the-charts delicious!
Prep Time30 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 15 minutes
Resting time6 hours
Total Time7 hours 45 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Greek / Middle East
Servings: 12
Calories: 707kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Food processor or sharp knife
  • 9"x13" baking dish
  • large, sharp knife

Ingredients

For the Honey Syrup

  • 1½ cups granulated sugar
  • 1 cup water
  • ½ cup honey see NOTES
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 2 strips lemon peel
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • 2 whole cloves

For the Baklava

  • 3 cups walnuts
  • 1 cup pistachios raw
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1½ cups unsalted butter 3 sticks, see NOTES
  • 1 lb phyllo dough thawed and then brought to room temperature, see NOTES

Instructions

Make the Honey Syrup

  • In a medium saucepan, combine the sugar, water, honey, lemon juice, lemon peel, cinnamon stick, and whole cloves. Bring to a boil, then reduce the heat and simmer for 10 minutes until slightly thickened. Remove from the heat and let it cool completely, usually about 2 hours, which is usually enough time to prepare the baklava and then bake it.
    1½ cups granulated sugar, 1 cup water, ½ cup honey, 1 tablespoon lemon juice, 2 strips lemon peel, 1 cinnamon stick, 2 whole cloves

Make the Baklava

  • Preheat oven to 325°F.
  • Pulse the walnuts in a food processor until finely chopped, but not a powder (you still want texture). Transfer the walnuts to a medium bowl and repeat the process with the pistachios. Add the pistachios to the walnuts and stir in the cinnamon, ground cloves, and salt. Stir to combine. Set aside.
    3 cups walnuts, 1 cup pistachios, 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon, ¼ teaspoon ground cloves, ¼ teaspoon salt
  • Melt the butter over low heat. Use a spoon to remove any white solids that are floating on the surface. Turn off the heat and slowly transfer the butter to a heatproof bowl. Pour most of the butter into the bowl, leaving the milky white solids on the bottom of the pan.
    1½ cups unsalted butter
  • Unroll the room-temperature phyllo. Trim the sheets to about 8½-12½" rectangles. Cover with a damp (not soaked) kitchen towel.
  • Brush the bottom and sides of the dish with the melted butter. Place one sheet of the phyllo into the dish and brush with butter. Repeat until you have 10 sheets.
    1 lb phyllo dough
  • Sprinkle about ¾ cup of the nut mixture evenly over the top.
  • Add five more sheets of phyllo, buttering between each layer.
  • Sprinkle with another ¾ cup of the nut mixture.
  • Repeat this (5 buttered sheets / nuts) until you run out of nuts. Liberally brush the top layer of phyllo with melted butter.
  • Using a large, sharp knife, cut the baklava into diamonds or squares all the way down the pan.
  • Bake for 55 to 60 minutes, until golden and crispy. Remove from the oven, and immediately pour the honey syrup all over the top of the baklava, allowing it to flow into the slices. You should hear a slight sizzle as the syrup hits the hot dough. Add a small sprinkle of chopped pistachios in the center of each piece of baklava.
  • Allow the baklava to completely cool to room temperature before serving. At least 6 hours, or even better, overnight. No need to cover and do NOT refrigerate. If desired, you can loosely place a large piece of foil over the dish (not tightly).

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Thawing the Phyllo: For the best results, thaw your frozen phyllo dough in its package in the refrigerator for 12 to 24 hours, then let it sit at room temperature for 1 to 3 hours before starting. This two-step process prevents the delicate sheets from sticking together or becoming brittle.
  • The Power of Clarified Butter: Using clarified butter (ghee) is the secret to a professional finish. By removing the milk solids, you ensure the pastry becomes incredibly crisp and golden without any burnt specks or a greasy mouthfeel.
  • Choosing Your Honey: While any honey will work, using an authentic Greek wildflower or Thyme honey adds a sophisticated, floral depth that balances the sweetness. It’s the key ingredient that elevates this to a world-class treat.
  • The Temperature Rule: To ensure a perfect crunch, always pour room-temperature syrup over the baklava the moment it comes out of the oven. That signature “sizzle” means the syrup is being absorbed correctly without making the pastry soggy.
  • Patience is Key: Allow the baklava to cool completely and rest at room temperature for at least 8 hours (ideally overnight) before serving. This allows the syrup to fully saturate the layers and set properly for clean slicing.
  • Storage: Store baklava at room temperature, loosely covered with foil, a clean kitchen towel, or parchment paper, for up to 2 weeks. Never refrigerate or use an airtight lid, as the trapped moisture will cause the phyllo to lose its crispness.

Nutrition

Calories: 707kcal | Carbohydrates: 64g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 11g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 237mg | Potassium: 282mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 38g | Vitamin A: 759IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 3mg

Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken

by Leave a Comment

This Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken is the ultimate weeknight dinner, featuring a perfectly sticky, caramelized glaze made entirely from scratch. Whether you use juicy thighs or lean breasts, this easy 30-minute meal delivers a savory-sweet punch that is guaranteed to be a family favorite!

A person using a spoon to drizzle sauce over the top of a baked brown sugar garlic chicken thigh that is resting on a bed of mashed potatoes.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧄 The Ingredients

This recipe uses a handful of common pantry staples to create a deeply flavorful, scratch-made glaze that perfectly balances sweet, savory, and tangy notes for a truly gourmet weeknight meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for baked brown sugar garlic chicken on a grey wooden cutting board including raw chicken thighs, vinegar, brown sugar, soy sauce, Dijon mustard, oil, garlic, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chicken: We love bone-in, skin-on thighs for the juiciest results and best presentation, but boneless thighs or chicken breasts work beautifully—just be sure to reduce the baking time slightly to prevent the leaner meat from drying out.
  • Dark Brown Sugar: This provides a rich, molasses-like depth that creates a darker glaze, though light brown sugar or even honey can be used if you prefer a milder sweetness.
  • Soy Sauce: We recommend using low-sodium soy sauce so you can control the saltiness; for a gluten-free version, Tamari or coconut aminos are excellent 1:1 swaps.
  • Apple Cider Vinegar: This is the “secret” ingredient that cuts through the sugar; if you’re out, white wine vinegar or rice wine vinegar will provide that same necessary tang.
  • Smoked Paprika: This adds a subtle, woodsy undertone that complements the garlic, but regular sweet paprika works perfectly if you want a more straightforward flavor.
  • Dijon Mustard: Beyond adding a tiny bit of “zing,” the mustard helps emulsify the sauce so it clings to the chicken; yellow mustard or stone-ground mustard can be used in a pinch.
  • Red Pepper Flakes: These provide a very mild background heat that balances the sugar; feel free to omit them entirely for a kid-friendly version or double them if you like a spicy kick.
  • Olive Oil: Any neutral oil with a high smoke point, like avocado, canola, or vegetable oil, will work perfectly for getting that initial golden sear on the chicken.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken

  • Pat the Chicken Bone-Dry: For the crispiest skin, use paper towels to remove as much moisture as possible from the chicken before adding the rub. Moisture is the enemy of a good sear!
  • Use a Cast-Iron Skillet: We highly recommend using a cast-iron skillet because it retains heat beautifully and transitions perfectly from the stovetop to the oven. Plus, it makes for a gorgeous “rustic” presentation!
  • Don’t Crowd the Pan: If the chicken thighs are squeezed too tightly together, they will steam rather than sear. Use a large enough skillet or sear them in batches to ensure a golden-brown crust.
  • The Broiler Trick: For that signature sticky, bubbly glaze, turn the broiler on for the final 2 minutes of baking. Stay close and watch it carefully—the sugar can go from perfectly caramelized to burnt very quickly!
  • Thicken the Sauce: If you want a truly decadent “syrup” to pour over the top, remove the chicken from the pan once it’s done and simmer the remaining juices on the stovetop for a few minutes until it reduces and thickens.
  • Use a Meat Thermometer: This is the only way to ensure juicy chicken every time. Pull chicken breasts at 165°F (74°C), but we actually recommend letting bone-in thighs reach 175°F (79°C) for the most tender, fall-off-the-bone texture.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken

A person using his fingers to sprinkle smoked paprika over the top of raw chicken thighs that have been seasoned with salt and pepper.
  1. Step 1: Brush the chicken all over with olive oil, and then season with the paprika, onion powder, salt, and pepper.
A person using a pair of metal tongs to turn skin-on chicken thighs the are being seared in oil in a large cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 2: Heat 2 tablespoon of olive oil in a large cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Sear the chicken, skin-side-down, until golden and crispy, about 8 minutes. Flip them over and cook for another couple of minutes.
A person using a small whisk to combine brown sugar, soy sauce, vinegar, mustard, and red pepper flakes in a small glass bowl.
  1. Step 3: In a small bowl, whisk the brown sugar, soy sauce, apple cider vinegar, mustard, and red pepper flakes until smooth, and the sugar has dissolved.
A person pouring a brown sugar garlic sauce around chicken thighs that have been seared in a cast-iron skillet and are still in the skillet.
  1. Step 4: Pour the sauce around the chicken in the skillet. Bake in a 400°F oven for 15 minutes. The broil on HIGH for 1 to 2 minutes. Remove the chicken from the skillet.
A person using a wooden spoon to stir a simmering brown sugar garlic glaze in a cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 5: Return the skillet to the stove and simmer the sauce until thick and syrupy.
A person using a serving spoon to pour a brown sugar garlic glaze over the top of a cooked skin-on chicken thigh on a platter next to more cooked chicken thighs.
  1. Step 6: Drizzle the sauce over the chicken and serve at once, garnished with chopped parsley, if desired.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Over a Bed of Steamed Rice: Serve the chicken and a generous spoonful of extra glaze over perfect steamed rice to soak up every drop of that sweet and savory sauce.
  • Classic Comfort Style: Pair the chicken with a big helping of creamy mashed potatoes for a hearty, soul-satisfying meal that the whole family will love.
  • With a Southern Side: Balance the sweetness of the glaze by serving it alongside Southern-style green beans for a savory, smoky contrast.
  • Fresh Garnish: Don’t forget to sprinkle a little freshly chopped parsley or sliced scallions over the top right before serving to add a pop of color and a hit of freshness!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use chicken breasts instead of thighs for this Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken?

Absolutely! Just keep in mind that leaner cuts cook much faster, so you should start checking the internal temperature around the 12-minute mark to ensure the meat stays tender and juicy.

How should I store leftovers of my Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken?

Place any remaining portions in an airtight container and keep them in the refrigerator for up to three to four days. When reheating, a splash of water or chicken broth in the pan will help loosen the glaze and keep everything moist.

Can I prep Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken in advance?

You can certainly whisk the glaze together and season the meat a few hours ahead of time. However, for the best texture, we recommend searing and finishing the dish in the oven just before serving so the skin stays crisp and the sauce remains syrupy.

How do I prevent the sauce from burning while making Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken?

If you notice the sugars in the pan darkening too quickly before the meat is fully cooked, simply tent the skillet loosely with aluminum foil. This protects the glaze from the direct heat of the oven while allowing the center to finish reaching a safe temperature.

An oval platter filled with six pieces of Baked Brown Sugar Chicken Thighs with a gold serving fork nearby.

😋 More Amazing Chicken Dinner Recipes

Ready to make the best chicken dinner in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowtoFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a spoon to drizzle sauce over the top of a baked brown sugar garlic chicken thigh that is resting on a bed of mashed potatoes.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken

This Baked Brown Sugar Garlic Chicken is the ultimate blend of sweet, savory, and sticky perfection. Made entirely from scratch with simple pantry staples, this easy 30-minute meal features a deeply caramelized glaze that coats every juicy bite. It’s an amazing dinner that’s simple enough for a busy weeknight but flavorful enough for company!
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time25 minutes
Total Time35 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 586kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 6 chicken thighs skin-on, bone-in
  • 3 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup brown sugar dark
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Brush about 1 tablespoon of the olive oil all over the chicken. Season the chicken all over with the paprika, onion powder, salt, and pepper.
    6 chicken thighs, 3 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Heat 2 tablespoon of the olive oil in a large oven-safe skillet over medium heat. Place the chicken thighs in the skillet, skin-side down. Use tongs to gently move them, keeping them from sticking to the skillet. Sear the chicken for about 8 minutes, until the skin is golden brown and crispy. Flip them over and cook for another couple of minutes.
  • Meanwhile, in a small bowl, whisk the brown sugar, soy sauce, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, and red pepper flakes together until combined.
    ½ cup brown sugar, ¼ cup soy sauce, 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • Pour the sauce around the chicken in the skillet.
  • Place the skillet in the oven on the middle grate and bake for 15 minutes, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F.
  • Turn the broiler on HIGH and cook for 1 to 2 minutes, until the skin is just barely charred. Keep an eye on the chicken, don't let it burn!
  • Remove the skillet from the oven and place the chicken on a platter. Place the skillet on the stove over medium heat. Simmer in the pan, stirring often, until the sauce reduces slightly into a syrupy glaze. Drizzle the glaze over the chicken and serve at once, garnish with chopped parsley, if desired.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Internal Temperature: For peak juiciness, use an instant-read meat thermometer. While the safe temperature for poultry is 165°F (74°C), we find that bone-in thighs are most tender and “fall-off-the-bone” when they reach 175°F (79°C).
  • Watch the Broiler: When broiling at the end to get that signature sticky finish, do not walk away! The high sugar content in the glaze can go from perfectly caramelized to burnt in a matter of seconds.
  • Thickening the Glaze: If your pan juices are a bit thin after baking, simply remove the chicken to a plate and simmer the sauce on the stovetop over medium-high heat for 3–5 minutes. It will reduce into a thick, pourable syrup.
  • Gluten-Free Option: This recipe is easily made gluten-free by substituting the soy sauce with Tamari or coconut aminos.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. To reheat, place the chicken in a skillet over medium-low heat with a splash of water or broth to help the glaze loosen up without drying out the meat.
  • Skinless Option: If using skinless chicken, you can skip the initial sear if you’re in a rush, but searing still adds a great layer of “fond” (flavor) to the final sauce!

Nutrition

Calories: 586kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 166mg | Sodium: 956mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 2mg

Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs with Jalapeño and Cheddar

by 2 Comments

Get ready for the ultimate BBQ appetizer: juicy, cheese-stuffed meatballs wrapped in bacon and coated in our signature homemade BBQ rub for a deep, smoky flavor. After a slow smoke, these bites are finished in a cast-iron skillet with a generous drizzle of our homemade BBQ sauce, resulting in a perfectly crispy and glazed finish that will have everyone reaching for seconds.

A cast-iron skillet filled with smoked bacon-wrapped meatballs with cheddar and jalapeño, topped with chopped scallions.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe brings together a savory blend of lean meat, melty cheese, and a slightly spicy kick to create a flavor-packed center that perfectly complements the smoky bacon exterior. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs on a grey wooden background including ground beef, breadcrumbs, cheese, eggs, garlic, jalapeños, bacon, BBQ sauce, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Ground Beef: We recommend using 85% lean ground beef to ensure the meatballs stay juicy without becoming overly greasy. If you prefer, you can use a 50/50 blend of ground beef and ground pork for added richness, or even ground turkey for a lighter version.
  • Cheddar Cheese: Sharp cheddar provides the best flavor punch, but you can swap it for Pepper Jack if you want extra heat or Smoked Gouda for a deeper, wood-fired taste.
  • Pickled Jalapeños: These add a tangy, vinegary heat that cuts through the richness of the bacon; however, if you prefer less spice, you can substitute them with mild diced green chiles or finely chopped bell peppers.
  • Breadcrumbs: These act as a binder to keep the meatballs tender. For a gluten-free option, use gluten-free breadcrumbs or crushed pork rinds, which also add a nice savory depth.
  • Bacon: Use standard thin-cut bacon for this recipe. Thick-cut bacon takes much longer to render and may not get fully crispy during the short baking and broiling phase.
  • Homemade Rub & Sauce: Our homemade BBQ rub and BBQ sauce are designed to balance sweetness and spice, but feel free to use your favorite store-bought brands if you’re in a pinch—just look for a “sweet and smoky” profile to complement the Smokin’ Tex flavor.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Smoked Meatballs

  • Uniform Sizing: Use a cookie scoop or a measuring spoon to ensure all meatballs are the same size. This guarantees they all cook evenly and finish at the exact same time.
  • Don’t Overlap the Bacon: When wrapping, try to use just enough bacon to cover the circumference of the meatball. Too much overlapping bacon can result in a chewy texture rather than a crispy one.
  • Soak Your Toothpicks: To prevent the toothpicks from charring or catching fire under the broiler, soak them in water for about 20 minutes before pinning the bacon to the meatballs.
  • No Smoker? No Problem!: If you don’t have a smoker, you can mimic the process in your oven. Bake the meatballs on a wire rack over a baking sheet at 250°F for about 45–50 minutes to develop flavor (add a half-teaspoon of liquid smoke to the meat mixture for that “off the grill” taste) before proceeding to the skillet and broiler steps.
  • The Internal Temp Rule: For the perfect balance of safety and juiciness, use an instant-read thermometer to ensure the meatballs reach an internal temperature of 160°F before serving.
  • Avoid Overmixing: When combining your beef, cheese, and spices, mix until just combined. Overworking the meat can lead to a dense, tough meatball rather than a tender, melt-in-your-mouth bite.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs

A glass bowl filled with ground beef, two eggs, shredded cheddar cheese, chopped pickled jalapeños, and seasonings.
  1. Step 1: Mix the meatball ingredients in a large bowl until just combined.
A person rolling an uncooked meatball in a BBQ rub that is in a shallow bowl.
  1. Step 2: Form meat into golf-ball-sized balls and roll them in the BBQ rub to cover.
A person placing a toothpick through an uncooked BBQ seasoned meatball that is wrapped with a thin strip of bacon.
  1. Step 3: Wrap each ball with half of a bacon strip. Secure with a toothpick through the center of the meatball.
A person placing a perforated grill rack filled with uncooked bacon-wrapped meatballs in an electric smoker.
  1. Step 4: Place them on a grill pan and smoke at 225°F for 35 minutes.
A person drizzling BBQ sauce over the top of smoked bacon-wrapped meatballs that are partially cooked and resting in a large cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 5: Remove the meatballs from the smoker and place them in a large cast-iron skillet. Drizzle BBQ sauce over the tops of the meatballs. Bake at 425°F for 10 minutes. Turn the broiler on HIGH for the last couple of minutes (Keep an eye on them!).
A person sprinkling chopped scallions over the tops of smoked bacon-wrapped meatballs topped with BBQ sauce.
  1. Step 6: Serve at once, garnished with chopped scallions, if desired. Have extra BBQ sauce for dipping.

Expert Tip: Choosing the Best Smoker

For consistent, mouthwatering results every time, we highly recommend using an electric smoker. They are incredibly user-friendly and take the guesswork out of smoking everything from meats to veggies.

Our personal favorite is the Smokin’ Tex; it’s our go-to for all our backyard BBQ recipes. If you’re looking to upgrade your setup, use code LOON10 at checkout for 10% off your entire order!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I prep Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs in advance?

Absolutely! You can roll, wrap, and season them up to 24 hours early. Just keep them covered in the refrigerator until you are ready to fire up the smoker.

How should I reheat leftover Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs?

To keep the outside from getting soggy, avoid the microwave. Instead, pop them back into a 350°F oven or an air fryer for a few minutes until they are warmed through and the edges are sizzling again.

What wood is best for Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs?

Hickory and mesquite are excellent choices for a bold, traditional BBQ taste. If you prefer something a bit more subtle, apple or cherry wood adds a lovely sweetness that complements the glaze.

How do I know when the Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs are finished cooking?

The most reliable method is using a digital meat thermometer. Once the center reaches an internal temperature of 160°F, they are safe to eat and perfectly juicy.

Can I freeze Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs?

Yes, these can be frozen either before or after cooking. If freezing them raw, place them on a baking sheet until firm before transferring them to a freezer-safe bag to prevent them from sticking together.

A close-up view of a smoked bacon-wrapped meatball with cheddar and jalapeño in a cast-iron skillet with chopped scallions sprinkled on top.

💨 For Amazing Smoker Recipes

Ready to make the best meatballs this side of Texas? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A cast-iron skillet filled with smoked bacon-wrapped meatballs with cheddar and jalapeño, topped with chopped scallions.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Smoked Bacon-Wrapped Meatballs with Cheddar and Jalapeño

Experience the perfect bite with these Smoked Bacon Wrapped Meatballs, featuring a juicy jalapeño-cheddar center and a crispy, BBQ-glazed exterior. Smoked to perfection in the Smokin' Tex and finished in a cast-iron skillet, these appetizers offer a mouthwatering blend of smoky, spicy, and savory flavors that are sure to be the star of your next gathering.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time45 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American / BBQ
Servings: 8
Calories: 428kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Smoker see NOTES
  • 1 large oven-safe skillet or pan cast-iron is perfect
  • Toothpicks

Ingredients

  • ½ cup BBQ rub see NOTES
  • 1 cup BBQ sauce
  • 1 lb ground beef 85% lean
  • ½ cup breadcrumbs plain
  • 2 large eggs lightly beaten
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese shredded
  • ½ cup nacho jalapeños (pickled), chopped
  • 1 teaspoon salt see NOTES
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 8 oz bacon cut in half (not thick cut)
  • 2 tablespoon scallions chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Make the BBQ rub and the BBQ Sauce.
    ½ cup BBQ rub, 1 cup BBQ sauce

Make the Smoked Meatballs

  • In a large bowl, combine the beef, breadcrumbs, eggs, garlic, cheese, jalapeño, salt, and pepper.
    1 lb ground beef, ½ cup breadcrumbs, 2 large eggs, 2 cloves garlic, 1 cup cheddar cheese, ½ cup nacho jalapeños, 1 teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Roll the meat into golf ball-sized balls.
  • Place the beef rub in a shallow bowl or platter. Roll the meatballs in the rub to fully cover them.
  • Wrap each ball with a bacon half strip and secure with a toothpick.
    8 oz bacon
  • Heat your smoker to 225°F with mesquite or hickory chips. Smoke the meatballs for 35 minutes. See NOTES.
  • Meanwhile, preheat your oven to 425°F.
  • Place the smoked meatballs in an oven-proof skillet or pan. Drizzle BBQ sauce over the tops of each meatball.
  • Bake in the oven for 10 minutes on the middle grate.
  • Turn the broiler on HIGH and cook for another 1 to 3 minutes, until the bacon is crispy and slightly charred. Keep an eye on them, don't let them burn.
  • Serve at once, garnished with chopped scallions, if desired. Serve additional BBQ sauce on the side.
    2 tablespoon scallions

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Adjusting for Salt: Our homemade BBQ rub is salt-free, which allows us to control the seasoning in the meat. If you are using a store-bought rub, check the ingredients for sodium. If your rub contains salt, reduce the salt in the meatball mixture to ½ teaspoon to prevent them from becoming overly salty.
  • Use a Perforated Grill Pan: For the best smoking results, we recommend placing the meatballs on a perforated grill pan. This allows the smoke to circulate freely around the bacon for even flavoring and prevents the meatballs from accidentally slipping through the smoker grates.
  • No Smoker? No Problem: If you don’t have a smoker, you can still make these in the oven! Bake the meatballs at 250°F on a wire rack set over a baking sheet for 45–50 minutes. To mimic that signature smoky flavor, add ½ teaspoon of liquid smoke to the ground beef mixture before rolling the balls. Finish in the cast-iron skillet and under the broiler as directed in the recipe.
  • Toothpick Safety: To ensure the toothpicks don’t burn during the high-heat broiling stage, soak them in water for at least 20 minutes before using them to secure the bacon.

Nutrition

Calories: 428kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 120mg | Sodium: 1045mg | Potassium: 344mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 316IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 146mg | Iron: 2mg

Creamy Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta

by 2 Comments

Transform the world’s most addictive appetizer into a restaurant-quality dinner with this Creamy Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta. Featuring a velvety, zesty cheese sauce and a 3-minute golden Panko crust, it’s the ultimate comfort food mashup that’s ready to serve in under 30 minutes.

An overhead view of a large cast-iron skillet filled with freshly prepared Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta topped with a toasty Panko breadcrumb mixture.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧄 The Ingredients

This recipe elevates simple pantry staples and fresh produce with a sophisticated blend of rich cheeses, bright aromatics, and warm spices to perfectly capture that iconic, indulgent dip flavor in every bite. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta on a grey wooden background including pasta shells, fresh spinach, artichokes, Mozzarella cheese, Parmesan cheese, lemon zest, heavy cream, cream cheese, shallot, garlic, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Medium Shells: These are the perfect vessel for “scooping” up the creamy sauce and artichoke bits, but any short, ridged pasta like penne, fusilli, or orecchiette will work beautifully.
  • Marinated Artichoke Hearts: Using the marinated variety (usually found in jars) adds an extra layer of tangy flavor from the oil and herbs; if you use canned artichokes, be sure to drain them thoroughly and pat them dry.
  • Fresh Spinach: Fresh is best for a vibrant green color and tender texture, but you can substitute frozen spinach in a pinch—just ensure it is completely thawed and squeezed dry of all excess moisture to avoid a watery sauce.
  • Heavy Cream & Cream Cheese: This duo creates the signature “dip” consistency. For a slightly lighter version, you can swap the heavy cream for half-and-half, though the sauce will be a bit less indulgent.
  • Italian Panko: These breadcrumbs come pre-seasoned for extra flavor. If you only have plain Panko on hand, simply mix in a half-teaspoon of dried Italian seasoning or oregano.
  • Shallots: Shallots offer a delicate, sweet flavor that melts into the sauce, but you can easily substitute them with a finely diced small yellow onion or the white parts of a few green onions.
  • Nutmeg: Don’t skip this! Even a tiny pinch enhances the dairy and makes the spinach flavor pop without making the dish taste “spiced.”

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Pasta

  • Don’t forget the “Liquid Gold”: Always reserve at least a cup of pasta water before draining your shells. The starchy water is the secret to emulsifying the fats from the cheese and cream, turning a “thick” sauce into a silky, velvety coating that clings to every noodle.
  • Under-cook the Shells: Boil your pasta for 1–2 minutes less than the package directions. Since the shells will continue to soften while being tossed in the hot cream sauce and sitting under the broiler, starting with a firm al dente texture prevents them from becoming mushy.
  • Soften the Cream Cheese: For a perfectly smooth sauce without any white lumps, let your cream cheese come to room temperature before adding it to the pan. If you’re in a rush, you can microwave the cubes for 15 seconds to soften them up.
  • Chop the Artichokes Small: To truly mimic the texture of the classic dip, chop your artichoke hearts into bite-sized pieces. This ensures you get a bit of tangy artichoke in every single forkful of pasta.
  • Watch the Broiler Like a Hawk: The transition from perfectly golden-brown Panko to burnt crumbs happens in seconds. Stay by the oven and keep the light on; it usually only takes 2–3 minutes to achieve that iconic bubbly “dip” crust.
  • Zest Before You Juice: It is much easier to zest a firm, whole lemon than a squeezed one! Always grate the zest into your bowl first, then cut the lemon in half to add the juice at the very end to keep the flavors bright and fresh.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Creamy Spinach Artichoke Pasta

A person using a fork to combine a Panko breadcrumb, herbs, and butter mixture in a small glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: In a small bowl, mix the Panko topping ingredients. Use a fork (or your fingers) to help the breadcrumbs absorb the melted butter. Cook the pasta in salted boiling water. Save about 1 cup of the pasta water.
A person transferring minced garlic from a small glass bowl into a cast-iron skillet that is filled with sautéed shallots and red pepper flakes.
  1. Step 2: Heat the oil over medium heat. Sauté the shallot for a few minutes, then stir in the red pepper flakes and garlic. Sauté for another 30 seconds.
A person transferring cubed cream cheese from a small glass bowl into a cast-iron skillet filled with simmering cream with sautéed shallots and garlic.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the heavy cream, cream cheese, and nutmeg. Stir until the cream cheese has melted and the sauce is smooth.
A person transferring chopped fresh spinach leaves into a cast-iron skillet filled with a thick, simmering cream sauce and artichoke hearts.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the artichoke hearts (drained) and chopped spinach. Cook (stirring often) until the spinach has wilted.
A person transferring shredded Mozzarella cheese from a glass bowl into a cast-iron skillet that is filled with a simmering Spinach and Artichoke Dip sauce.
  1. Step 5: Add the Parmesan and Mozzarella cheese and stir until melted.
A person pouring a small amount of pasta water from a metal measuring cup into a cast-iron skillet filled with simmering Spinach and Artichoke Dip Pasta sauce.
  1. Step 6: Stir in enough of the reserved pasta water to reach the desired consistency (it should be creamy, but not too thick or too thin).
A person transferring lemon zest from a small bowl in one hand and lemon juice in a small bowl in the other hand into a skillet filled with simmering Spinach and Artichoke Dip Pasta.
  1. Step 7: Stir in the lemon zest and lemon juice. Season with salt and pepper.
A person sprinkling a Panko breadcrumb and butter mixture over the top of a cast-iron skillet that is filled with Spinach and Artichoke Dip Pasta.
  1. Step 8: Top with the breadcrumb topping and broil (6 inches under the broiler) until lightly browned, usually 2 to 3 minutes.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta ahead of time?

Yes! You can prepare the sauce and noodles earlier in the day, then simply top with the breadcrumbs and place the dish under the broiler right before you are ready to serve dinner.

How should I store leftovers of my Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta?

Place any remaining portions in an airtight container and keep them in the refrigerator for up to three days.

What is the best way to reheat Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta?

To maintain the creamy texture, add a splash of milk or a little bit of water before warming it up on the stovetop or in the microwave to loosen the sauce.

Can I add chicken or shrimp to this Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta?

Absolutely. Sliced grilled poultry or sautéed seafood makes a fantastic addition to the meal and pairs perfectly with the rich, cheesy flavors of the dish.

Can I use frozen spinach for this Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta recipe?

You certainly can, just make sure to thaw it completely and squeeze out as much liquid as possible so the sauce doesn’t become watery or thin.

A white pasta bowl filled with a serving of Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta with two slices of toasted Italian bread resting next to the pasta.

🍝 More Amazing Pasta Dishes

Ready to make the best pasta dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large cast-iron skillet filled with freshly prepared Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta topped with a toasty Panko breadcrumb mixture.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Creamy Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta

Turn your favorite appetizer into a 30-minute meal with this Creamy Spinach Artichoke Dip Pasta. It features a velvety, zesty cheese sauce and a golden, broiled Panko crust for the ultimate comfort food dinner.
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time20 minutes
Total Time30 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 1956kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • skillet (12")
  • pot for cooking pasta

Ingredients

For the Breadcrumb Topping

  • ½ cup Panko breadcrumbs Italian
  • ¼ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

For the Pasta

  • 12 oz pasta ie, medium shells, penne, rigatoni
  • Kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 shallot finely chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 4 oz cream cheese cubed and room temperature
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg ground
  • 1 cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 cup mozzarella cheese shredded
  • 1 cup pasta water you may not use all of it
  • 14 oz jar artichoke hearts marinated, drained
  • 8 oz spinach fresh, stems removed, see NOTES
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the breadcrumbs with the melted butter and salt. Set aside.
    ½ cup Panko breadcrumbs, ¼ cup Parmesan cheese, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Heat a pot of salted water to a boil and cook the pasta until al dente. Save 1 cup of the pasta water. Drain and set aside.
    12 oz pasta, Kosher salt
  • Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the chopped shallots and sauté for about 3 to 4 minutes. Stir in the garlic and red pepper flakes. Sauté for another 30 seconds.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 shallot, 4 cloves garlic, ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • Stir in the heavy cream and cream cheese. Stir until the cream cheese has melted and the sauce is smooth. Stir in the ground nutmeg.
    1 cup heavy cream, 4 oz cream cheese, ½ teaspoon nutmeg
  • Stir in the Parmesan and Mozzarella cheese. Stir until melted. Pour in about half of the pasta water.
    1 cup Parmesan cheese, 1 cup mozzarella cheese, 1 cup pasta water
  • Add the artichoke hearts (drained and chopped) and spinach. Stir until the spinach has completely wilted.
    14 oz jar artichoke hearts, 8 oz spinach
  • Stir in the lemon zest, lemon juice, ¾ teaspoon salt, and ½ teaspoon black pepper.
    1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon lemon zest, 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • Stir in the cooked pasta. If the sauce is too thick, stir in the rest of the pasta water.
  • Sprinkle the breadcrumb topping over the top of the pasta. Place the skillet under the broiler (6 inches from the heating element) and cook until the topping is lightly browned and crispy, usually a few minutes. Keep an eye on it, don't let it burn!

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Spinach Selection: We recommend using fresh, mature spinach for the best flavor and texture; just be sure to wash it thoroughly, remove the thick stems, and give it a rough chop before adding it to the sauce. Baby spinach is a great “no-prep” alternative, and frozen spinach can be used in a pinch—but make sure it is completely thawed and squeezed bone-dry to prevent the sauce from becoming watery.
  • Oven Safety: Ensure your pot or skillet is oven-safe (like a Dutch oven or cast iron) before placing it under the broiler. If your cookware has plastic handles, simply transfer the pasta to a greased baking dish before adding the Panko topping.
  • Pasta Water Tip: Don’t skip reserving the starchy pasta water! It is the “secret ingredient” that emulsifies the cheese and cream, ensuring the sauce is silky and clings perfectly to the shells.
  • Storage & Reheating: This dish is best served fresh, but leftovers will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days. When reheating, add a splash of milk or water to the pasta to help loosen the sauce and restore its creamy consistency.

Nutrition

Calories: 1956kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 139mg | Sodium: 879mg | Potassium: 712mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 8076IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 700mg | Iron: 4mg

The Ultimate BBQ Bacon Burger with Onion Rings

by 2 Comments

Elevate your next cookout with the ultimate BBQ bacon burger, featuring a custom-ground blend of sirloin, brisket, and short rib for unmatched flavor and juiciness. This towering masterpiece is layered with BBQ-glazed bacon, melted Colby Jack, and crispy homemade steakhouse onion rings, all nestled on a toasted brioche bun. It’s a bold, smoky, and incredibly satisfying burger that redefines what a backyard classic can be. Our homemade BBQ Rub and Easy BBQ Sauce put it over the top!

A straight-on view of a BBQ Bacon Burger that is topped with crispy bacon, onion rings and drizzled with BBQ Sauce with more onion rings around the base of the burger.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe relies on a premium selection of hand-blended proteins and artisanal, scratch-made components to deliver a sophisticated balance of smoky, savory, and crunchy textures in every bite. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for BBQ Bacon Burger on a grey wooden background including burger patties, BBQ sauce, bacon, cheese slices, buns, lettuce, tomaotes, and seasonings.

🧅 What You Need to Make Onion Rings

These steakhouse-style rings feature thick-cut yellow onions soaked in tangy buttermilk and dredged in a savory, spiced flour blend for a perfectly golden and crispy finish.

An arrangement of ingredients for steakhouse onion rings on a grey wooden background including sliced onions, buttermilk, flour, oil, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • The Beef Blend: This recipe utilizes a custom blend of ground sirloin, brisket, and short rib for the ultimate flavor and fat ratio. However, you can substitute it with high-quality 80/20 ground chuck if you aren’t grinding your own meat.
  • Thick-Cut Smoked Bacon: Using thick-cut bacon ensures it stands up to the BBQ glaze without becoming too flimsy; if you prefer a leaner option, turkey bacon can be used, though it won’t have the same smoky depth.
  • Colby Jack Cheese: This cheese is chosen for its excellent melting point and mild flavor, but sharp cheddar or Pepper Jack (for a spicy kick) are fantastic alternatives.
  • Brioche Buns: These buttery, slightly sweet buns are sturdy enough to hold the heavy toppings; potato buns are a great secondary choice if brioche isn’t available.
  • Yellow Onions: These provide the classic “steakhouse” flavor for the rings, but Vidalia or other sweet onions can be used if you prefer a milder, sweeter bite.
  • Buttermilk: This is the secret to a tender onion ring and a batter that sticks; if you don’t have any on hand, you can make a quick substitute by adding one tablespoon of lemon juice or white vinegar to a cup of whole milk and letting it sit for five minutes.
  • Spices & Heat: The cayenne in the onion ring batter adds a very subtle warmth; feel free to omit it for a milder ring or double it if you prefer a noticeable spicy punch.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for the Perfect BBQ Burger

  • Don’t Overwork the Meat: When forming your patties, handle the meat as little as possible. Overworking the beef can lead to a dense, tough burger rather than a tender, juicy one.
  • Temperature is Key: Use an instant-read thermometer to pull the burgers off the grill at exactly 135°F for a perfect medium. Remember, the temperature will rise slightly as the meat rests.
  • Prevent Soggy Buns: Generously toast your brioche buns. The toasted surface acts as a barrier, preventing the BBQ sauce and burger juices from soaking into the bread and making it soggy.
  • Glaze the Bacon at the End: Wait until the bacon is perfectly crisp before brushing on the BBQ sauce. This allows the sauce to tack up beautifully without making the bacon lose its crunch.
  • Keep Onion Rings Warm: If you’re making a large batch of onion rings, keep the finished ones on a wire rack in a 200°F oven. This keeps them crispy while you finish grilling the burgers.
  • Season the Tomato: Never skip seasoning your tomato slice with a pinch of salt and pepper. It draws out the flavor of the tomato and makes a massive difference in the overall taste of the burger.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make BBQ Bacon Burgers

An overhead view of steakhouse onion rings being fried in hot oil in a large cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 1: Dredge the buttermilk-soaked onions in the seasoned (repeat) and fry until golden. Keep warm in a low-temp oven while you make the burgers.
A person using a brush to apply homemade BBQ sauce to partially cooked thick strips of bacon on a foil-lined baking pan.
  1. Step 2: Sprinkle the BBQ rub over the bacon and then bake on a foil-lined baking sheet in a 375°F oven. Flip after about 8 minutes. Once they are almost crisp, brush on the BBQ sauce.
A person sprinkling BBQ rub over the tops of two raw sirloin burger patties that are resting on brown paper on a small wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 3: Form the patties (⅓ lb each) and liberally sprinkle salt and beef rub all over them (see NOTES).
A person using a brush to apply BBQ sauce onto two burgers that are being cooked in a grill pan on a gas grill.
  1. Step 4: Grill the burgers to desired doneness (135 – 140°F for medium). In the last couple minutes of grill, liberally brush BBQ sauce over both sides of the burger.
A person placing slices of Colby Jack cheese over two burger patties that have been cooked on a grill pan on a gas grill.
  1. Step 5: Top with cheese slices and cook until just melted, just about 1 minute.
A person pressing down on the top of Brioche bun that is resting on the top of BBQ Bacon Burger with cheese and onion rings.
  1. Step 6: Toast the buttered buns. Build the burgers starting with a layer of BBQ sauce, then lettuce, tomato, salt, pepper, cheeseburger, bacon, onion rings, and more BBQ sauce. Top with the bun.

Expert Tip

If you’re using a custom blend of freshly ground beef, the patties will have a much looser, more delicate texture than store-bought meat. To prevent the beef from breaking apart or falling through the grates, we recommend using a cast-iron grill pan or a fine-mesh grill topper; this provides the necessary support for the tender meat while still allowing that signature smoky flavor to infuse the burger.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Why should I use a custom meat blend for this BBQ Bacon Burger?

Combining sirloin, brisket, and short rib creates a superior fat-to-lean ratio, resulting in a much deeper flavor and juicier texture than standard ground beef.

What is the best internal temperature for a BBQ Bacon Burger?

We recommend pulling the patties off the heat at 135°F for a perfect medium, allowing for a slight rise in temperature during the resting period.

How do I keep the onion rings crispy when building my BBQ Bacon Burger?

The key is to serve them immediately after frying or keep them on a wire rack in a low-heat oven so they don’t steam and lose their crunch before assembly.

Can I prepare the components of this BBQ Bacon Burger ahead of time?

You can certainly mix the beef rub and make the BBQ sauce in advance, but for the best results, the patties should be grilled and the rings fried just before you plan to eat.

An overhead view of a BBQ Bacon Burger that is topped with steakhouse onion rings and crispy bacon all drizzled with homemade BBQ sauce.

🍔 More Amazing Burger Recipes

Ready to make the best burger on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a BBQ Bacon Burger that is topped with crispy bacon, onion rings and drizzled with BBQ Sauce with more onion rings around the base of the burger.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

The Ultimate BBQ Bacon Burger with Onion Rings

This gourmet BBQ masterpiece features a succulent triple-beef blend of sirloin, brisket, and short rib, topped with BBQ-glazed thick-cut bacon and melted Colby Jack cheese. Crowned with crispy homemade steakhouse onion rings and served on a toasted brioche bun, it’s a smoky, savory, and crunchy experience that takes backyard grilling to a whole new level.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Total Time45 minutes
Course: Lunch / Dinner / Cookout
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 1012kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas, charcoal, or electric grill
  • Grill pan optional, but helpful. See NOTES

Ingredients

  • 12 onion rings
  • 8 slices bacon thick cut
  • 4 tablespoon BBQ rub divided, see NOTES
  • 1 cup BBQ sauce divided, plus extra for serving
  • 1½ lbs ground beef see NOTES
  • salt and pepper
  • 4 slices Colby Jack or cheddar, pepper Jack, Gouda
  • green leaf lettuce cut into bun-sized pieces, optional
  • 4 slices tomato optional
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter room temperature
  • 4 Brioche buns

Instructions

  • Prepare the onion rings. Keep them warm in a low-temp oven (225°F).
    12 onion rings
  • Preheat your oven to 375°F.
  • Place the bacon strips on a baking pan lined with aluminum foil. Sprinkle the BBQ rub on both sides of the bacon strips. Bake until just starting to get crisp. Remove from the oven and use tongs to flip the bacon strips over. Bake until crispy, but not burnt or extra-crispy. Brush BBQ sauce over both sides of the bacon and bake for a few more minutes. Drain on paper towels. Set aside.
    8 slices bacon, 4 tablespoon BBQ rub, 1 cup BBQ sauce
  • Divide the beef into four ⅓-lb portions. Gently shape them into patties about 1 inch thick. Season the patties on both sides with salt. Coat both sides of the patties with the BBQ rub. Press the rub into the meat so it adheres.
    1½ lbs ground beef, salt and pepper
  • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat.
  • Place patties on a grill pan (if using) or directly on the grates over direct heat. Sear for about 5 to 6 minutes per side for medium doneness (135 to 140°F). Liberally brush the top of the patties with BBQ Sauce. Place the cheese slices on each burger, close the lid for about 1 minute, until the cheese just starts to melt.
    4 slices Colby Jack
  • Spread the softened butter on the cut sides of the Brioche buns. Place them on the grill (or a hot pan) for 30 to 60 seconds until golden brown and toasted.
  • Assemble the burgers in this order: Smear a drizzle of the BBQ sauce on the bottom buns. Add lettuce and then a slice of tomato. Season the tomato with salt and pepper. Place the cheeseburger on the tomato. Cross two slices of the glazed bacon over the cheese. Stack 2 or 3 of the onion rings on top of the bacon. Drizzle a generous amount of BBQ sauce over the onion rings. Crown the burgers with the top buns and serve them all at once with extra BBQ sauce on the side.
    green leaf lettuce, 4 slices tomato, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter, 4 Brioche buns

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Beef Blend: For the ultimate flavor and juiciness, we used a custom blend of ground sirloin, brisket, and beef short ribs. If you aren’t grinding your own meat, a high-quality 80/20 ground beef (ground chuck) is an excellent substitute. If you do use freshly ground meat, the texture can be quite loose; we recommend using a grill pan with holes to keep the patties from falling through the grates while they cook.
  • A Note on Salt: Our homemade beef rub does not include salt, allowing us to season the patties and tomatoes separately. If you are using a store-bought BBQ rub, check the label carefully, as many commercial brands contain a high amount of salt. You may need to reduce or omit the additional salt in the recipe to avoid over-seasoning.
  • Crispy BBQ Bacon: Ensure the bacon is fully crisp before brushing on the BBQ sauce. This allows the sauce to tack up into a beautiful glaze without making the bacon lose its signature crunch.
  • Toasting the Buns: Don’t skip toasting the brioche buns! A firm toast creates a structural barrier that prevents the BBQ sauce and burger juices from making the bread soggy.

Nutrition

Calories: 1012kcal | Carbohydrates: 70g | Protein: 52g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 335mg | Sodium: 970mg | Potassium: 813mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 1574IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 301mg | Iron: 5mg

Classic Broccoli Salad with Bacon and Cheddar

by 4 Comments

This vibrant Broccoli Salad is a masterclass in texture and flavor, featuring smoky bacon, sharp cheddar, and crunchy sunflower seeds tossed in a creamy, tangy dressing. It’s the ultimate versatile side dish that pairs perfectly with juicy steak kabobs, smoky grilled chicken, or zesty BBQ shrimp.

A close-up view of a white serving bowl filled with broccoli salad with bacon and topped with dried cranberries, cubed cheddar cheese, and sunflower seeds.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥦 The Ingredients

This recipe brings together a harmonious blend of crisp textures, savory notes, and a touch of sweetness, all tied together by a perfectly balanced, creamy dressing. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for broccoli salad with bacon on a grey wooden background including two broccoli crowns, bacon, cheddar cheese, red onion, cranberries, sunflower seeds, bacon, mayonnaise, vinegar, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Broccoli: Use fresh broccoli florets for the best crunch; frozen broccoli is too soft for this recipe and is not recommended.
  • Bacon: Freshly cooked and crumbled bacon provides the best smoky flavor, but you can use high-quality store-bought real bacon bits to save time.
  • Cheddar Cheese: Sharp or extra-sharp cheddar stands up best against the dressing, though Colby Jack or a dairy-free cheddar alternative also works well.
  • Red Onion: If you find raw red onions are too pungent, you can substitute them with sliced green onions or soak the diced red onions in cold water for 10 minutes before adding them to the salad.
  • Dried Cranberries: These add a necessary sweetness, but you can easily swap them for raisins or dried cherries.
  • Sunflower Seeds: Roasted and salted sunflower seeds add a great nutty finish; if you have an allergy, roasted pepitas (pumpkin seeds) or sliced almonds make excellent substitutes.
  • The Dressing: For a lighter version, you can replace half of the mayonnaise with plain Greek yogurt. If you prefer to avoid refined sugar, honey or maple syrup can be used as a natural sweetener.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Broccoli Salad

  • Chop into Small Florets: Cut the broccoli into small, bite-sized pieces. This ensures every floret gets thoroughly coated in the dressing and makes the salad much easier to eat.
  • Let it Marinate: For the best flavor, refrigerate the salad for at least 30 to 60 minutes before serving. This gives the dressing time to soften the broccoli slightly and allows the flavors to meld together.
  • Keep the Crunch: If you are making this salad a day in advance, wait to stir in the crispy bacon and roasted sunflower seeds until just before serving so they don’t lose their crunch.
  • Whisk the Dressing Separately: Always mix your dressing in a small bowl before pouring it over the salad. This ensures the sugar, salt, and garlic powder are fully dissolved and evenly distributed.
  • Adjust the Tang: If you prefer a more “zingy” salad, feel free to add an extra teaspoon of apple cider vinegar, or add a little more sugar if you like a sweeter, classic deli-style flavor.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Broccoli Salad with Bacon

A person holding small florets of broccoli that we just cut from a broccoli crown on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Cut the broccoli into small, bite-sized florets.
A person using a small whisk to combine a mayonnaise and vinegar dressing in glass bowl resting on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: Place the marinade ingredients in a small bowl and whisk to combine. Set aside.
A person using a large chef's knife to transfer cooked crumbled bacon from a cutting board into a large glass bowl filled with broccoli florets, cubed cheddr cheese, and diced red onion.
  1. Step 3: Place the broccoli, red onion, cubed cheddar cheese, and crumbled cooked bacon in a large bowl.
A person pouring a sunflower seeds from a small glass bowl into a large bowl filled with dry components for broccoli salad with bacon.
  1. Step 4: Add the dried cranberries and sunflower seeds.
A person pouring a creamy dressing over the top of the components of broccoli salad with bacon in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 5: Mix the ingredients, and then pour the dressing over them. Gently stir to completely coat the entire salad.
A person plastic plastic wrap over the top of a large glass bowl filled with a freshly prepared broccoli salad with bacon.
  1. Step 6: Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 1 hour before serving.

🍽️ How To Serve

  • Serve Chilled: This salad is best enjoyed cold. Keep it in the refrigerator until you are ready to eat to ensure the broccoli stays crisp and the dressing remains thick and creamy.
  • The Ultimate BBQ Side: This is the perfect companion for summer grilling! It pairs beautifully with the smoky flavors of best-ever cheeseburgers, beer can chicken, or juicy salmon burgers.
  • Potluck & Picnic Ready: Because this salad doesn’t wilt as quickly as leafy greens, it is an ideal choice for outdoor gatherings, family reunions, or holiday potlucks.
  • Make it a Main: Turn this side dish into a light lunch by adding a protein like sliced grilled chicken breast or chickpeas directly into the bowl.
  • Garnish for Presentation: For a “picture-perfect” look, reserve a small handful of the bacon bits, cheddar cheese, and sunflower seeds to sprinkle over the top just before serving.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this Broccoli Salad with Bacon ahead of time?

Yes, it actually tastes better after sitting for an hour or two in the fridge, though you should wait to add the seeds and meat until right before serving to maintain their texture.

How long will leftover Broccoli Salad with Bacon stay fresh in the fridge?

When stored in an airtight container, it will remain delicious for up to three to four days, making it a great option for meal prep.

Can I use frozen florets for this Broccoli Salad with Bacon recipe?

It is best to use fresh produce, as the frozen variety becomes too soft and watery once thawed, losing that signature crunch.

How can I make a healthier version of this Broccoli Salad with Bacon?

You can swap the mayonnaise for Greek yogurt and use a natural sweetener like honey to reduce the calories while still keeping it creamy and flavorful.

🥗 More Amazing Side Salads

Ready to make the best side dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a white serving bowl filled with broccoli salad with bacon and topped with dried cranberries, cubed cheddar cheese, and sunflower seeds.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Broccoli Salad with Bacon and Cheddar

This classic Broccoli Salad is the ultimate crowd-pleaser, featuring a perfect balance of smoky, sweet, and savory flavors. Fresh broccoli florets are tossed with crispy bacon, sharp cheddar, and crunchy sunflower seeds in a creamy, tangy dressing for a side dish that’s as easy to make as it is delicious. It’s the perfect no-cook addition to any BBQ, picnic, or weeknight dinner!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cooking Bacon and Chill Time1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time1 hour 30 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 435kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • 8 slices bacon thick cup
  • 2 crowns broccoli about 6 to 8 cups after being cut into florets
  • 1 cup cheddar cheese cut into small cubes, or shredded
  • ½ cup red onion chopped
  • ½ cup dried cranberries
  • ½ cup sunflower seeds toasted

For the Dressing

  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar
  • 3 tablespoon sugar see NOTES
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder

Instructions

Do Ahead

  • Preheat oven to 375°F. Line a baking pan with foil. Place the strips of bacon on the foil. Bake for 5 to 7 minutes. Flip the bacon, and bake until desired crispiness, usually another 5 to 7 minutes (timing depends on how thick the bacon is). Remove from the oven and place on paper towels to drain. Chop with a large knife. Set aside.
    8 slices bacon

Prepare the Salad

  • Cut the broccoli into very small florets. Place the broccoli, along with most of the chopped bacon, cheddar cheese, red onion, most of the cranberries, and most of the sunflower seeds into a large bowl. Toss to combine.
    2 crowns broccoli, 1 cup cheddar cheese, ½ cup red onion, ½ cup dried cranberries, ½ cup sunflower seeds
  • In a small bowl, whisk the mayonnaise, vinegar, sugar, salt, pepper, and garlic powder together until smooth and completely combined.
    1 cup mayonnaise, 2 tablespoon apple cider vinegar, 3 tablespoon sugar, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • Pour the dressing over the salad and use two large wooden spoons to gently toss until all components are completely coated.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for one hour. Sprinkle the remaining bacon, cranberries, and sunflower seeds over the top of the salad. Serve chilled.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Adjusting the Sweetness: This recipe calls for 3 tablespoons of sugar to achieve that classic, tangy-sweet deli flavor. If you prefer a less sweet dressing, feel free to start with 1 or 2 tablespoons and adjust to your personal preference.
  • Keep it Crunchy: If you are preparing this salad several hours in advance, store the cooked bacon and roasted sunflower seeds in separate containers or bags and stir them in just before serving to ensure they stay perfectly crisp.
  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Note that the broccoli will soften slightly the longer it sits in the dressing.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 435kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 708mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 175IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 1mg

The Best Grilled Steak Kabobs (Tender and Flavorful)

by 4 Comments

Elevate your outdoor cookout with these vibrantly charred Grilled Steak Kabobs, featuring melt-in-your-mouth beef and a rainbow of fresh summer vegetables. Pair them with our Zesty Corn and Black Bean Salad and our Classic Pasta Salad to create a visually stunning and delicious spread that’s perfect for outdoor entertaining. This easy yet impressive recipe is guaranteed to be the star of your special weekend feast!

An overhead view of four metal skewer filled with grilled steak kabobs of chunks of beef tenderloin, vegetables, and mushrooms topped with a garlic and balsamic vinaigrette.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe pairs a bold, herb-infused savory marinade with premium cuts of beef and a colorful medley of fresh garden vegetables to ensure every bite is as visually stunning as it is flavorful. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for grilled steak kabobs on a grey wooden background including beef tenderloin, bell peppers, onion, baby Bella mushrooms, Worcestershire sauce, balsamic vinegar, garlic, herbs, and spices.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Beef Tenderloin: We chose tenderloin for its unmatched “melt-in-your-mouth” texture, but Top Sirloin is an excellent, more budget-friendly alternative that offers a robust beefy flavor and holds its shape perfectly on the skewer.
  • Bell Peppers: Using a mix of red, yellow, and orange peppers creates the most vibrant visual for your platter; however, you can easily substitute zucchini rounds or cherry tomatoes if you prefer.
  • Baby Bella Mushrooms: Also known as Cremini, these offer a deeper, earthier flavor than white button mushrooms, though either variety works well to soak up the savory marinade.
  • Balsamic Vinegar: This adds a hint of sweetness and helps the beef achieve a beautiful dark “char” on the grill; if you prefer a sharper tang, red wine vinegar is a great substitute.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh rosemary and thyme provide the best aromatic experience for summer grilling, but if you are using dried herbs, reduce the measurement to one-third of what the recipe calls for.
  • Worcestershire Sauce: This is the secret to that deep “umami” finish. If you need a gluten-free option, Tamari or Coconut Aminos can be used as a 1:1 replacement.
  • Red Onion: Red onions provide a lovely purple hue and get sweet when charred, but sweet Vidalia onions or even large shallots are delicious alternatives.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips for Perfect Steak Kabobs

  • Uniformity is Key: Cut your beef and vegetables into consistent 1.5 to 2-inch pieces. This not only looks professional but ensures that everything cooks at the same rate, so you don’t end up with raw onions and overcooked steak.
  • Don’t Crowd the Plate: Leave a tiny bit of space between each ingredient on the skewer. If the pieces are packed too tightly, the meat will steam rather than sear, and you’ll miss out on those iconic, dark grill marks.
  • Soak Your Skewers: If you are using wooden or bamboo skewers, soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before threading. This prevents the ends from burning or snapping off over the high heat of the grill.
  • High Heat for the Best Char: Get your grill screaming hot before the kabobs hit the grates. Since tenderloin is so lean, you want to sear the outside quickly to lock in the juices without overcooking the center.
  • The Power of the Rest: Once the kabobs come off the grill, let them rest on a platter for 5 minutes under a loose tent of foil. This allows the juices to redistribute, ensuring every bite of steak is incredibly tender.
  • The Final Flourish: For a “restaurant-quality” look, wait until just before serving to sprinkle the fresh Italian parsley and coarse sea salt. The bright green herbs and the sparkle of the salt crystals make the dish look instantly more enticing for your guests (and your photos!).

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make the Best Grilled Steak Kabobs

A person using a small whisk to combine the ingredients for a balsamic garlic marinade for steak kabobs in glass bowl on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Add all of the marinade ingredients to a small bowl and whisk to combine. Transfer about one-third of the sauce for serving.
A person pouring a garlic balsamic marinade from a small glass bowl into another glass bowl that is filled with large chunks of beef tenderloin.
  1. Step 2: Pour the marinade over the meat, toss to coat, and refrigerate for 30 to 45 minutes (no longer).
A person using his hand to skewer vegetables, mushrooms, and chunks of marinated beef tenderloin onto metal skewers on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 3: Thread the meat and vegetables onto the skewers, alternating for color.
Four steak kabobs being grilled on a gas stove.
  1. Step 4: Place over direct heat on your grill over medium-high heat.
A person using a brush to apply a marinade over the tops of steak kabobs that are being grilled on a gas stove.
  1. Step 5: Brush the kabobs with the marinade (not the reserved marinade).
A person using a pastry brush to apply a balsamic sauce over the tops of freshly grilled steak kabobs.
  1. Step 6: Remove from the grill and let the kabobs rest for a few minutes. Garnish with the reserved marinade, chopped parsley, and coarse sea salt.

Expert Tip: The Double Skewer Method

To prevent the meat and vegetables from spinning or rotating when you try to flip them, use two parallel skewers for each kabob. This “ladder” technique locks the ingredients in place, making the kabobs much easier to handle and ensuring both sides get an even, beautiful sear without the frustration of the meat sliding around.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Ultimate BBQ Platter: Arrange the kabobs on a large wooden serving board or a white ceramic platter to make the vibrant colors of the peppers and the charred beef pop.
  • Pair with Cheddar and Ranch Pasta Salad: This creamy, crowd-pleasing side provides a cool and savory contrast to the warm, herb-marinated steak. The sharp cheddar and herb-heavy ranch dressing complement the beef perfectly.
  • The Classic Potato Salad Combo: For a truly nostalgic Memorial Day spread, serve these kabobs alongside a hearty Classic Potato Salad. The soft, tangy potatoes are the ideal “comfort food” balance to the lean, grilled tenderloin.
  • Add a Fresh Garnish: Just before your guests dig in, give the entire platter a final sprinkle of freshly chopped Italian parsley and a pinch of coarse sea salt to enhance the flavors and add a professional, “enticing” touch.
  • Sauce on the Side: While these kabobs are incredibly juicy on their own, you can serve them with a small bowl of chimichurri sauce or a balsamic reduction for those who want an extra punch of flavor.
  • Keep it Cold: Serve with a pitcher of iced tea or a crisp, cold lager to balance the smoky flavors from the grill and keep your guests refreshed in the summer heat.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best cut of beef to use for Grilled Steak Kabobs?

While we recommend tenderloin for its incredible softness, you can also use top sirloin or New York strip. Just be sure to avoid tough cuts like chuck or round, which require much longer cooking times to become tender and are better suited for slow-cooking.

How long should I marinate the meat for Grilled Steak Kabobs? 

Aim for 30 to 45 minutes at room temperature. Because high-quality cuts are already naturally soft, over-marinating in acidic ingredients can actually break down the fibers too much, resulting in a mushy texture rather than a firm, juicy bite.

What is the ideal internal temperature for Grilled Steak Kabobs?

For a perfect medium-rare, pull them off the heat when they reach 130°F to 135°F. Remember that the internal temperature will continue to rise a few degrees as the platter rests under foil before serving.

Can I assemble Grilled Steak Kabobs in advance?

The skewers can be assembled an hour to two hours before grilling. Keep them refrigerated and covered.

Four metal skewers filled with lightly charred steak kabobs that are being grilled on a gas stove.

🔥 More Amazing Grilled Recipes

Ready to make the best kabobs on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of four metal skewer filled with grilled steak kabobs of chunks of beef tenderloin, vegetables, and mushrooms topped with a garlic and balsamic vinaigrette.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

The Best Grilled Steak Kabobs

These Grilled Steak Kabobs feature melt-in-your-mouth beef tenderloin and vibrant summer vegetables marinated in a savory garlic-herb blend. Perfectly charred and incredibly juicy, they are the ultimate "showstopper" for your Memorial Day weekend grilling.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Chill time and rest time35 minutes
Total Time1 hour 5 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 3428kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Gas, charcoal, or electric grill
  • 4 skewers metal or wooden, see NOTES

Ingredients

For the Marinade

  • ½ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • ¼ cup Worcestershire sauce
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon rosemary fresh, chopped (1 teaspoon dried)
  • 1 tablespoon thyme fresh, chopped (1 teaspoon dried)
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper

For the Kabobs

  • 2 lbs beef tenderloin cut into 1½-2" chunks, see NOTES
  • 1 red onion cut into wedges
  • 3 bell peppers seeded and cut into ½-2" squares
  • 8 baby bella mushrooms brushed clean, and caps removed
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped, for garnish
  • coarse sea salt for serving

Instructions

  • Whisk the marinade ingredients together in a medium bowl. Transfer about a third of it to another bowl (for serving).
    ½ cup extra-virgin olive oil, ¼ cup Worcestershire sauce, ¼ cup balsamic vinegar, 4 cloves garlic, 1 tablespoon rosemary, 1 tablespoon thyme, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Place the cubed beef in a bowl and pour the marinade (except the reserved) over the meat. Toss to coat the beef completely. Refrigerate for 30 to 45 minutes.
    2 lbs beef tenderloin
  • Thread the meat onto the skewers (see NOTES if using wooden skewers), alternating with the vegetables. Try not to pack them too tightly; leave a small amount of space between components so the heat can circulate and sear all sides of the beef.
    1 red onion, 3 bell peppers, 8 baby bella mushrooms
  • Preheat your grill to HIGH heat.
  • Place the kabobs on the grill for 5 to 7 minutes. Brush the marinade (not the reserved) over the tops of the kabobs. Flip and cook for another 5 to 7 minutes, brushing with the marinade again. Cook until the internal temperature of the meat reaches 135°F for medium.
  • Remove from the grill, and the kabobs rest for a few minutes. Liberally brush the kabobs with the reserved sauce. Garnish with parsley, and serve with coarse sea salt and more of the sauce.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley, coarse sea salt

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Wooden Skewers: If you are using wooden or bamboo skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before threading. This prevents the wood from burning, charring excessively, or snapping over the high heat of the grill.
  • Choice of Beef: While beef tenderloin provides the ultimate “melt-in-your-mouth” luxury experience, Top Sirloin is a fantastic alternative. It is more budget-friendly, offers a robust, beefy flavor, and has a firm structure that holds up exceptionally well on the grill.
  • Don’t Over-Marinate: Because tenderloin is already a very tender cut, avoid marinating it for longer than 45 minutes. The acidic balsamic vinegar can begin to “cook” the exterior of the meat, which may result in a mushy texture.
  • Resting is Crucial: For the juiciest steak, always allow the kabobs to rest on a warm platter for 5 minutes after they come off the grill. This allows the juices to redistribute so they don’t run out the moment you take your first bite.

Nutrition

Calories: 3428kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 679mg | Potassium: 620mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 3325IU | Vitamin C: 125mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 3mg

NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers

by 6 Comments

Experience the legendary flavors of a Little Italy festival with our NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers, crafted completely from scratch for the ultimate flavor experience. This epic dish features our juicy homemade Italian sausage and caramelized peppers nestled into soft, toasted Italian rolls with a perfect finish of our signature homemade marinara. It’s a “from-scratch” masterpiece that brings the spirit of the street fair right to your backyard!

A close-up view of a NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers in a homemade Italian roll resting in a basket lined with red-checkered wax paper.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧅 The Ingredients

This dish relies on a vibrant mix of fresh garden produce and traditional aromatics to perfectly highlight the rich, savory flavors of our homemade components. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Sausage and Peppers on a grey wooden background including a rope of uncooked Italian sausage, onion, bell peppers, Italian rolls, marinara sauce, oil, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Italian Sausage: While we highly recommend using our Homemade Italian Sausage, you can use high-quality store-bought links. Sweet (mild) is the traditional choice for NYC street fairs, but spicy Italian sausage adds a fantastic kick if you prefer some heat.
  • Bell Peppers: Using a mix of red, yellow, and green peppers isn’t just for the beautiful colors; the red and yellow peppers provide a natural sweetness that balances the savory sausage, while the green peppers add a classic, slightly bitter earthiness.
  • Onions: Yellow or white onions are best for this recipe as they caramelize beautifully on the griddle. For a milder, sweeter flavor, you can substitute Vidalia or Walla Walla onions.
  • Vegetable Oil: We use vegetable oil because of its high smoke point, which is perfect for the high heat of an outdoor griddle. Substitution: Canola, grapeseed, or avocado oil also works well.
  • Dried Oregano: This is the “secret” herb that gives the dish its nostalgic street-fair aroma. Note: Rub the dried oregano between your palms before sprinkling it over the peppers to release the essential oils.
  • Marinara Sauce: A “kiss” of our Homemade Marinara creates a jammy, rich glaze that binds the peppers and onions together. Substitution: If you are short on time, a high-quality jarred marinara will work.
  • Italian Rolls: You want a roll that is “soft but sturdy” to hold all the juices without falling apart. Our Homemade Italian Rolls are designed for this, but a high-quality hoagie or sub roll from a local bakery is a great alternative.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Sausage and Peppers

  • Master the Two-Zone Heat: Set one side of your griddle to medium-high for searing the sausage and charring the vegetables, and keep the other side on medium-low. This “safe zone” allows you to finish cooking the sausages through without burning the casings while simmering the peppers in the sauce.
  • Uniform Slicing: Try to slice your peppers and onions into uniform strips (about ¼ inch thick). This ensures that they all soften and caramelize at the same rate, preventing some pieces from turning to mush while others are still crunchy.
  • Create a “Jammy” Sauce: When you add the marinara to the peppers and onions, let it sizzle and reduce on the griddle for a few minutes. You want the sauce to thicken into a rich, “jammy” glaze that clings to the vegetables rather than making the bread soggy.
  • Use the Griddle Dome: If your sausages are beautifully browned but haven’t quite reached an internal temperature of 165°F, toss a splash of water on the griddle and cover the sausages with a metal dome. The steam will finish them perfectly in just a minute or two while keeping them incredibly juicy.
  • The “Hinge” Cut: When slicing your rolls, don’t cut all the way through! Leave a “hinge” on one side to help hold the sausage and that mountain of peppers and onions in place for the mess-free (well, mostly mess-free) first bite.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers

An overhead view of a coiled rope of uncooked Italian sausage being seared on a outdoor griddle in a thin layer of oil.
  1. Step 1: Heat the oil on your griddle (or skillet) over medium-high heat and carefully add the sausage. Cook for about 5 minutes, until browned on the bottom.
An overhead view of a coiled rope of Italian sausage that has been seared on an outdoor griddle in a thin layer of hot oil.
  1. Step 2: Carefully flip the sausage over and cook for another 5 minutes.
An overhead view of strips of onion, and colorful strips of bell peppers being sautéed in oil on a large outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 3: Move the sausage to the lower heat side of the griddle (or another skillet over low heat) and add the vegetables. Sauté until softened and lightly charred.
A person using a small ladle to drizzle marinara sauce of the top of sautéed peppers and onions simmering on a large outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 4: Season with salt, pepper, and dried oregano. Drizzle about ¼ cup of marinara sauce over the vegetables and stir until coated.
A person placing a large silver pot over a cooked rope of Italian sausage on a large outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 5: If possible, cover the sausage with a dome. Cook the sausage until an internal temperature of 165°F is reached.
An overhead view of a fully cooked coiled rope of Italian sausage resting on a bed of sautéed strips of onions and bell peppers on an outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 6: Place the sausage on top of the sautéed vegetables. Simmer for a few minutes, allowing the flavors to infuse each other.
A person using a large metal spatula to cut a large link from a fully cooked rope of Italian sausage that is simmering on a bed of sautéed peppers and onions on an outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 7: Use the end of a metal spatula to cut off a link the size of your rolls.
A person using a pair of metal tongs to place sautéed onions and peppers over the top of a cooked link of Italian sausage inside an opened Italian roll.
  1. Step 8: Place the sausage in the opened roll and top with a generous pile of peppers and onions. Serve at once!

Expert Tip: No Griddle? No Problem!

If you don’t have an outdoor griddle, you can achieve the same “street-fair” results using a large cast-iron skillet or a heavy-bottomed Dutch oven on your stovetop. Start by searing the sausages over medium-high heat to develop a deep crust, then remove them and sauté the peppers and onions directly in the flavorful rendered fat.

Once the veggies are soft, stir in the marinara to create that signature jammy glaze, nestle the sausages back into the pan, and cover with a lid for a few minutes to ensure everything is heated through and perfectly tender.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What kind of meat is best for Sausage and Peppers?

Sweet Italian links are the classic choice for that authentic street fair flavor, but spicy varieties work beautifully if you want a bit of a kick. Whichever you choose, look for a high fat-to-lean ratio to ensure the links stay juicy during the high-heat cooking process.

Can I make Sausage and Peppers ahead of time?

Absolutely! This dish actually tastes even better the next day as the flavors have more time to meld. Simply store the mixture in an airtight container in the refrigerator and reheat it in a skillet or on the griddle when you’re ready to serve.

Is marinara sauce traditionally used in Sausage and Peppers?

While some regions prefer a “dry” version, the iconic NYC street fair style often includes a small amount of red sauce.

Should I toast the rolls for Sausage and Peppers?

It’s a matter of preference! While many enjoy a soft roll that soaks up the juices, toasting creates a crisp barrier that keeps the bread sturdy.

What are the best ways to use leftover Sausage and Peppers?

Beyond the classic sandwich, the mixture is fantastic tossed with your favorite pasta, folded into a morning frittata, or served over a bed of creamy polenta for a hearty, comforting dinner.

A person holding a large NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers in an Italian roll in the palm of his hand.

🎡 More Classic Street Fair Recipes

Ready to make the best sandwich this side of Little Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon

An overhead view of a NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers nestled into a homemade Italian roll resting in a basket lined with a red-checkered piece of wax paper.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

NYC-Style Sausage and Peppers

Bring the iconic NYC street fair experience home with this authentic Sausage and Peppers recipe! While we love using our homemade sausage and rolls—which are great to prepare ahead of time—high-quality store-bought versions work perfectly too. It's a flavorful and juicy masterpiece that's sure to be a hit at your next cookout!
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time25 minutes
Total Time35 minutes
Course: Lunch / Dinner
Cuisine: Italian / American
Servings: 4
Calories: 465kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil plus more, as needed
  • 2 lbs Italian sausage sweet, 5 to 6 links, or one "rope"
  • 1 large yellow onion cut into thin strips
  • 3 bell peppers seeded and cut into strips
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ cup marinara sauce
  • 4 Italian rolls

Instructions

  • Set up a 2-zone heat area on your griddle (one medium-high heat and the other low heat). Drizzle the oil (2 tbsp) over the hot zone.
    2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • Place the sausage in the oil and let it sear until browned on the bottom, about 5 minutes. Carefully flip the sausage and sear for another 5 minutes. At this point, the sausage should be browned all over, but not completely cooked through. Move the sausage to the lower heat zone. If you have a cook dome, cover the sausage with it. See NOTES.
    2 lbs Italian sausage
  • Add the onions to the hot zone (add a little more oil if needed). Sauté for 2 minutes, stirring with metal tongs often. Add the peppers and continue to cook and stir until soft and starting to char and caramelize, about another 5 minutes.
    1 large yellow onion, 3 bell peppers
  • Sprinkle the peppers and onions with the salt, pepper, and oregano. Then drizzle enough of the marinara over the vegetables just to coat them when stirred (don't oversauce!). Stir for another minute.
    ½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon dried oregano, ½ cup marinara sauce
  • Use a large spatula to place the sausage on top of the peppers and onions. Let them cook together for another few minutes.
  • If desired, toast your split open rolls on the griddle until lightly browned.
    4 Italian rolls
  • If you are using "rope" sausage, use your spatula to cut links the size of your rolls.
  • Place a sausage link in each roll and top with a generous pile of peppers and onions. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • No Griddle? No Problem! If you don’t have an outdoor griddle, you can make this easily on your stovetop. Use a large cast-iron skillet or a heavy-bottomed pan. Sear the sausages first to get a good crust, set them aside, and then sauté your peppers and onions in the flavorful rendered fat before combining everything at the end.
  • No Cook Dome? If you don’t have a professional metal basting cover, you can use a large stainless steel mixing bowl or even a lid from a large stockpot. The goal is simply to trap the steam and heat to ensure the sausage reaches an internal temperature of 165°F without over-browning the outside. If this isn’t possible, don’t worry, you’ll still have amazing sausage (just don’t let it burn on the griddle before it reaches the necessary internal temperature. 
  • Prep Ahead: To make things easy on the day of your cookout, you can prepare the Homemade Italian Sausage and Homemade Italian Rolls a day or two in advance. However, if you’re short on time, high-quality store-bought versions are a perfectly delicious substitute!
  • The “Jammy” Finish: When adding the marinara, start with a small amount. You want the sauce to reduce on the hot surface until it becomes a thick, “jammy” glaze that clings to the peppers and onions rather than a thin sauce that might make your rolls soggy.
  • The “Hinge” Cut: When slicing your rolls, try not to cut all the way through. Leaving a “hinge” on one side helps keep the sausage and the mountain of peppers and onions tucked securely inside the bread.

Nutrition

Calories: 465kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 172mg | Sodium: 687mg | Potassium: 911mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2929IU | Vitamin C: 124mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 3mg

Homemade Italian Sausage (NYC Street Fair-Style)

by 2 Comments

There’s nothing quite like the legendary aroma of an NYC street fair, and today we’re bringing that magic home with our authentic, from-scratch Italian sausage. We’re walking you through every step—from the perfect grind and seasoning to achieving that world-class “snap” on the griddle—to ensure your next cookout is truly epic and will take your sausage and peppers to the next level!

An overhead view of a circular rope of homemade Italian sausage the has been cooked and seared and is resting on a wooden cutting board and is surround by small bowls of seasonings.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🐖 The Ingredients

This recipe relies on a perfect balance of traditional aromatics and classic seasonings to capture the unmistakable essence of an authentic NYC street festival. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Homemade Italian Sausage on a grey wooden background including cubed pork butt, natural sausage casings, garlic, sugar, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Pork Butt: Also known as Boston Butt or Pork Shoulder, this is the ideal cut because of its natural 70/30 lean-to-fat ratio. If your cut looks particularly lean, you can ask your butcher for a small amount of pork fatback to grind in; otherwise, the standard shoulder is perfect.
  • Fennel Seed: This is the signature flavor of Italian sausage. If you prefer a less “textured” sausage, you can use ground fennel, but whole crushed seeds provide that authentic street-fair look.
  • Fresh Garlic: Use fresh cloves and crush them into a paste for the most pungent, traditional flavor. While garlic powder can be used in a pinch (use 1 teaspoon for every 3 cloves), it won’t have the same “bite” as fresh.
  • Dry White Wine: A dry wine adds acidity and helps the meat “bind” together. Substitution: If you prefer not to use alcohol, you can substitute it with an equal amount of ice-cold water.
  • Fresh Italian Parsley: Flat-leaf Italian parsley is preferred over curly parsley for its robust flavor and tender texture.
  • Sugar: A small amount of granulated sugar doesn’t make the sausage sweet; instead, it balances the salt and helps the casing caramelize and brown beautifully on the griddle.
  • Kosher Salt: We recommend Kosher salt for its clean flavor and coarse grains. Substitution: If using fine table salt, reduce the amount by half to avoid over-salting.
  • Natural Hog Casings: These provide the classic “snap.” If you cannot find natural casings, collagen casings are an alternative, though they won’t have the same traditional texture or flavor.

⚙️ Important Tools and Substitutions

  • Sturdy Meat Grinder: A powerful grinder is essential for achieving a clean, coarse grind without “smearing” the fat. Always remember to chill the grinder head and blades in the freezer before use.
    • Substitution: If you don’t have a grinder, you can ask your butcher to coarse-grind a whole pork butt for you on a single-pass setting.
  • LEM 5 lb Sausage Stuffer: A dedicated vertical crank stuffer like the LEM provides consistent pressure and prevents air pockets much better than a grinder attachment.
    • Substitution: You can use the stuffing attachment that comes with many stand mixers or meat grinders, though it may require a bit more patience and a second set of hands to manage the speed.
  • Sausage Pricker: This specialized tool features tiny, sharp needles designed to pop air bubbles without tearing the casing. This is the secret to preventing your sausages from bursting on the grill.
    • Substitution: A clean, sterilized sewing needle or a very thin toothpick can be used in a pinch.
  • Blackstone Outdoor Griddle: The large, flat surface of a Blackstone is ideal for searing long “rope” sausages and sautéing a mountain of peppers and onions all at once.
    • Substitution: A large cast-iron skillet or a heavy-bottomed griddle pan on your stovetop will work perfectly for smaller batches—just be sure to cook in stages to avoid crowding the pan.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Homemade Italian Sausage

Pork butt being processed and ground through an electric grinder into a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: Cube the meat, chill it along with the grinder parts) until very cold, then grind through the coarse plate into a bowl.
A person pouring white wine from a small carafe into a large glass bowl filled with ground pork butt, Italian parsley, and other Italian sausage seasonings.
  1. Step 2: Add the remaining ingredients (except the casings) and mix with your hands to combine.
Season pork butt being ground and extruded from an electric grinder into a large ceramic bowl.
  1. Step 3: Pass the mixture through the coarse plate again.
A person using his gloved hands to mix an Italian sausage meat mixture in a large ceramic bowl on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 4: Mix the meat by hand for 5 minutes.
A person scrunching a long hog casing onto a tube that is attached to a metal canister used for stuffing sausage.
  1. Step 5: After rinsing the casings and soaking them (in warm water), scrunch them onto the tube of the sausage stuffer.
A person using his hands to help guide Italian sausage that is being cranked from a sausage stuffer canister into one long rope that he is shaping into a circular formation.
  1. Step 6: Crank enough sausage filling until it reaches the end of the tube, tie the end of the casing into a knot, and continue cranking and filling, guiding as you go, to the desired length of sausage (rope or links).
A person using a sausage pricker to pop visible air pockets out of freshly stuffed Italian sausage link on a metal sheet pan.
  1. Step 7: Use a sausage pricker (or sharp needle) to pop any visible air pockets. Chill uncovered overnight (this is important!
A person using a large spatula to lift up a rope of Italian sausage that is being cooked on an outdoor griddle.
  1. Step 8: Cook on a griddle in a little oil until browned all over, and an internal temperature of 165°F is reached.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the difference between sweet and hot homemade Italian sausage?

The primary distinction lies in the spice blend. The sweet version focuses on the aromatic combination of fennel and garlic, while the spicy variety incorporates a generous amount of crushed red pepper flakes and occasionally cayenne or paprika to provide heat and a deeper red color.

Can I freeze my homemade Italian sausage after it has been stuffed?

Absolutely! These links freeze exceptionally well. To maintain the best quality, wrap them tightly in plastic wrap or use a vacuum sealer to prevent freezer burn, and they will stay fresh for up to three months.

Why does my homemade Italian sausage crumble or fall apart when I slice it?

This is usually a sign that the meat wasn’t mixed long enough to develop a proper “bind.” Mixing the ground pork with the chilled liquid until it becomes tacky and sticky ensures the proteins bond together, resulting in a juicy, cohesive link that holds its shape.

Do I have to use natural hog casings for homemade Italian sausage?

While natural casings are the secret to that iconic street-fair “snap,” you can certainly enjoy the flavor without them. You can form the seasoned meat into breakfast-style patties or use it loose in your favorite pasta sauces, lasagnas, or stuffed pepper recipes.

How long should I let my homemade Italian sausage rest before cooking?

For the best results, let the links sit uncovered in the refrigerator for at least four hours or ideally overnight. This allows the flavors to meld and helps the exterior dry out slightly, which is essential for achieving a crisp, browned finish on the griddle.

A straight-on view of a circular rope of homemade Italian sausage that has been seared and cooked and is resting on a wooden cutting board with small bowls of seasoning and Italian parsley nearby.

🗽 More Classic NYC Recipes

Ready to make the best Italian sausage this side of Little Italy, NYC? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a circular rope of homemade Italian sausage the has been cooked and seared and is resting on a wooden cutting board.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Homemade Italian Sausage (NYC Street Fair-Style)

Bring the legendary flavor of an NYC street fair to your own backyard with this authentic, from-scratch Sweet Italian Sausage. Perfectly balanced with toasted fennel, fresh garlic, and a splash of white wine, these juicy links deliver that world-class "snap" and "Old Country" taste that is truly off-the-charts delicious!
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Grind, chill, and rest time12 hours
Total Time12 hours 30 minutes
Course: Sausage – Entree or Sandwich
Cuisine: Italian / American
Servings: 12
Calories: 270kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • natural hog casings 32-35mm, pre-tubed
  • 5 lbs pork butt aka Boston Butt, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 6 cloves garlic crushed
  • 2½ tablespoon Kosher salt
  • 2½ tablespoon fennel seeds
  • 1 tablespoon sugar
  • 1 tablespoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup Italian parsley chopped
  • ½ cup white wine dry
  • vegetable oil for cooking the sausage

Instructions

  • Carefully push the casing off the tubing in a colander in the sink. with cool running tap water. Find the end of the casing, open it up, and run water down it, pushing the water through the casing until it's been completely rinsed inside and out. Place the casings in a bowl and cover with lukewarm water while you prepare the sausage filling.
    natural hog casings
  • Place the cubed pork and the parts of your meat grinder (auger, blade, and coarse grinding plate) in the freezer for 30 minutes.
    5 lbs pork butt
  • Grind the chilled pork through the coarse plate into a chilled bowl.
  • Add the crushed garlic, salt, fennel, sugar, pepper, parsley, and wine to the pork. Mix with your hands until combined. Pass the seasoned through the grinder again with the coarse plate into a bowl. Hand mix for 3 to 5 minutes until the meat becomes "tacky" and sticky. It should stay in the palm of your hand when you turn your hand palm-side down.
    6 cloves garlic, 2½ tablespoon Kosher salt, 2½ tablespoon fennel seeds, 1 tablespoon sugar, 1 tablespoon black pepper, ¼ cup Italian parsley, ½ cup white wine
  • Place the meat into the canister/cylinder one handful at a time, pressing down gently as you proceed to remove any air pockets.
  • Add the largest tube to your sausage stuffer and lubricate it (and the counter) with a few splashes of water. Find the end of the casing, and begin scrunching it onto the tube. Continue doing this until all of the casing is on the tube (this takes a little practice, but you'll get the hang of it).
  • Crank the meat until it reaches the tip of the tube, then stretch the end of the casing and tie it off in a tight knot. Begin cranking again and stuff into one long rope, whatever your desired length is. Guide the links with your hands as the sausage is being cranked into the casings. Tie off the end of the casing into another tight knot. If desired, pinch and twist into 6-inch links (twist the first one forward, the second one backward to lock them).
  • Use your 3-prong pricker to pop any visible air bubbles you see under the casing. Place the sausage ropes (in a circle) on a baking sheet and refrigerate (uncovered) for 4 hours, or better, overnight.
  • Turn your griddle to medium-high heat. Add a couple of tablespoons of oil and heat until shimmering. Add the sausage and cook until browning on the underside. Use a couple of spatulas and/or tongs to flip the sausage over. Continue cooking until nicely browned and an internal temperature of 165°F is reached. Removed from the griddle. The sausage is ready to be served!
    vegetable oil

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Keep it Cold: For the best texture, place your cubed pork and all your metal grinder parts (auger, blade, and plate) in the freezer for about 30 minutes before you start. This prevents the fat from melting and ensures a clean, coarse grind.
  • The “Bind” is Key: Don’t rush the mixing process. Mixing the meat for a full 5 minutes until it becomes “tacky” and sticky is what ensures a juicy sausage that won’t crumble when sliced.
  • The Secret to the “Snap”: For that authentic street-fair texture, let the stuffed sausages rest on a sheet pan in the refrigerator, uncovered, for at least 4 hours or ideally overnight. This dries the casing slightly, which creates that world-class snap when bitten into.
  • Two-Person Job: If possible, have a partner help with the stuffing process. One person can focus on turning the crank at a steady pace while the other guides the casing to ensure it fills evenly without bursting.
  • Safe Cooking: Always cook your sausage until the internal temperature reaches 165°F. Using a metal dome on the Blackstone helps the center reach temperature while keeping the outside perfectly seared and juicy.

Nutrition

Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 113mg | Sodium: 1579mg | Potassium: 689mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 110IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 3mg

Classic Lomo Saltado (Peruvian Steak and Potatoes Stir-Fry)

by 2 Comments

Classic Lomo Saltado is the ultimate Peruvian comfort food, representing a stunning fusion of Chinese stir-fry techniques and bold Latin American ingredients. By searing tender beef strips and tossing them with vibrant vegetables and our signature garlic steak fries, we’ve captured the heart of this traditional dish in a way that is both approachable and incredibly delicious. Serve it with Peruvian Garlic Rice for the perfect meal!

An overhead view of a serving of Classic Lomo Saltado, Peruvian Steak and Potatoes Stir-Fry, on a black dinner plate with a mound of Peruvian Garlic Rice on the plate as well.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This iconic dish relies on a vibrant harmony of fresh produce, tender protein, and a signature blend of savory and tangy staples that perfectly bridge the gap between Asian and Latin American flavors. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Classic Lomo Saltado on a grey wooden background including beef tenderloin, pepper paste, roma tomatoes, red onion, potato wedges, garlic, oil, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Beef Tenderloin or Sirloin: For the most tender results, we recommend beef tenderloin; however, a high-quality sirloin or even ribeye works beautifully. The key is to slice it against the grain into uniform strips so it sears quickly without becoming chewy.
  • Aji Amarillo: Often called the “soul” of Peruvian cooking, these yellow chilies have a unique, fruity heat. If you can’t find them fresh or frozen at a local Latin market, a tablespoon of Aji Amarillo paste is a perfect and widely available substitute.
  • Red Wine Vinegar: This is the secret to that signature “tang” in the sauce. It deglazes the pan and balances the richness of the beef and soy sauce. Soy Sauce (Sillao): This brings the “Chifa” (Chinese-Peruvian) influence to the dish. Use a high-quality soy sauce to ensure a deep, savory umami flavor.
  • Garlic Steak Fries: While traditional recipes often use standard fries, our thick-cut, garlic-infused steak fries are the perfect vessel for soaking up the savory pan sauce.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Lomo Saltado

  • The Smoking Hot Pan: You want your wok or skillet to be screaming hot before the beef hits the oil. This ensures a dark, caramelized sear on the outside without overcooking the center.
  • Don’t Crowd the Pan: If you add too much beef at once, the temperature of the pan will drop, and the meat will steam instead of sear. Work in batches if necessary!
  • Prep Everything First: This is a “fast” cook. Have your sauce mixed and your vegetables chopped before you turn on the heat, as the entire stir-fry process takes less than 10 minutes.
  • The 30-Second Rule: Only toss the fries in the wok at the very end for about 30 seconds. This allows them to get coated in the “jugo” (sauce) while maintaining their crispy exterior.
  • The Perfect Rice Dome: Use a small, lightly oiled bowl to mold your Peruvian Garlic Rice. It creates a beautiful presentation that makes the dish look like it came straight from a high-end bistro in Lima.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Prepare Classic Lomo Saltado

A person using two large wooden spoons to toss potato wedges in a glass bowl with vegetable oil, salt, and pepper.
  1. Step 1: Cut the potatoes into wedges and then toss them in a bowl with oil, salt, and pepper. Bake for 30 minutes at 450°F until crispy, flipping halfway through.
A person sprinkling minced garlic over bake steak fries that are on a silicone mat on a baking pan.
  1. Step 2: Toss the hot fries with 2 minced cloves of garlic.
A wok that is filled with chunks of beef tenderloin that are being stir-fried in hot oil.
  1. Step 3: Heat the oil over HIGH in your wok (or skillet) and sear the beef until just browned, about 1 to 2 minutes. Remove from the wok and set aside.
A person pouring aji amarillos paste from a small white bowl into a wok that is filled with wedges of red onion.
  1. Step 4: Add the onion and paste and stir-fry for 1 minute.
A person transferring quartered Roma tomatoes into a wok that is filled with red onion wedges, garlic, and pepper paste being stir-fried.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the tomatoes and seared beef.
A person pouring Peruvian soy sauce from one bowl and red wine vinegar from another bowl into a wok that is filled with pieces of beef tenderloin and vegetables that are being stir-fried.
  1. Step 6: Add the soy sauce, vinegar, and cumin. Toss and simmer for a minute or so.
A person transferring crispy steak fries from a white bowl into a large wok filled with simmering Classic Lomo Saltado.
  1. Step 7: Just before serving, stir in most of the potatoes. Save a few for plating.
An overhead view of a serving of Classic Lomo Saltado, Peruvian Steak and Potatoes Stir-Fry, on a black dinner plate with a mound of Peruvian Garlic Rice on the plate as well.
  1. Step 8: Serve at once with Peruvian Garlic Rice and extra fries on the side. Be sure to pour extra sauce over the top of the dish.

Expert Tip

Since fresh Aji Amarillo peppers can be difficult to find locally, we highly recommend ordering a jar of Aji Amarillo paste online; just two or three tablespoons of this “liquid gold” delivers the authentic, fruity heat and vibrant color that is essential to the soul of this dish.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best cut of beef for Classic Lomo Saltado?

Tenderloin is the premium choice for its buttery texture, though sirloin is a more traditional and budget-friendly option that still delivers excellent flavor when sliced thinly.

Can I make Classic Lomo Saltado without a wok?

Absolutely, a large heavy-bottomed stainless steel or cast-iron skillet works perfectly as long as you allow it to get hot enough to properly sear the meat.

Is Classic Lomo Saltado supposed to be spicy?

While the Aji Amarillo chili provides a distinct flavor and a mild kick, the heat level is generally quite manageable and can be adjusted by removing the seeds or using less paste.

Why are the potatoes served inside the Classic Lomo Saltado?

This unique tradition allows the fries to act as a sponge, soaking up the delicious vinegar and soy-based sauce, creating a wonderful contrast of textures in every bite.

An overhead view of a wok that is filled with freshly prepared Classic Lomo Saltado, Peruvian Steak and Potatoes Stir-fry.

🌎 More Amazing Recipes from Around the World

Ready to make the best meat and potatoes dish this side of Lima? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a serving of Classic Lomo Saltado, Peruvian Steak and Potatoes Stir-Fry, on a black dinner plate with a mound of Peruvian Garlic Rice on the plate as well.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Lomo Saltado (Peruvian Beef and Potatoes Stir-Fry)

This Classic Lomo Saltado is a vibrant Peruvian stir-fry featuring tender seared beef, red onions, and tomatoes tossed with crispy garlic steak fries. Served with a side of fluffy garlic rice, it’s a bold, savory meal that brings the best of Peruvian "Chifa" flavors right to your kitchen!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Total Time50 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Peruvian
Servings: 4
Calories: 465kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Wok or large sturdy skillet

Ingredients

Getting Started – Garlic Rice and Steak Fried

  • Peruvian Garlic Rice
  • 3 medium Russet potatoes sliced into wedges (not too thick, about ¼-inch)
  • 3 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 3 cloves garlic

For the Lomo Saltado

  • ¼ cup soy sauce preferably Peruvian
  • 3 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon cumin ground
  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 1½ lbs beef tenderloin cut into 1-inch strips, or sirloin
  • 1 large red onion sliced into wedges
  • 2 tablespoon Aji Amarillo paste 3 tablespoon for a little more heat
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 3 Roma tomatoes cut into wedges
  • ¼ cup cilantro fresh, chopped, for garnish

Instructions

Before You Stir-Fry

  • Prepare the Garlic Rice (while it's cooking, prepare the skeak fries)
    Peruvian Garlic Rice
  • Preheat your oven to 450°F.
  • Place the potato wedges in a bowl and toss them with the oil, salt, and pepper. Spread onto a baking pan lined with parchment paper or a silicone mat.
    3 medium Russet potatoes, 3 tablespoon vegetable oil, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Bake for 30 minutes, carefully flipping them halfway through. They should be lightly browned and crispy on the edges. Place the hot potatoes back into the bowl and immediately toss them with the garlic. Set aside.
    3 cloves garlic

Prepare the Lomo Saltado (Be sure you have everything prepped)

  • In a small bowl, combine the soy sauce, red wine vinegar, and cumin. Set aside.
    ¼ cup soy sauce, 3 tablespoon red wine vinegar, 1 teaspoon cumin
  • Heat the oil over HIGH heat in a wok or sturdy, large skillet. Once the oil is shimmering, add the beef. Stir fry it until it is browned all over, but not fully cooked, about 1 to 2 minutes. Use a slotted spoon to remove the beef onto a platter. Set aside.
    2 tablespoon vegetable oil, 1½ lbs beef tenderloin
  • Add the onion and Aji Amarillo paste to the wok. Stir-fry for about 1 minute. Add the garlic and stir-fry for another 30 seconds.
    1 large red onion, 2 tablespoon Aji Amarillo paste, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the tomatoes and beef (with collected juices) into the wok. Stir-fry for a minute or two.
    3 Roma tomatoes
  • Pour in the soy/vinegar mixture and cook for another minute. Gently stir in the steak fries and toss until coated.
  • Remove from the heat and serve at once, garnished with chopped fresh cilantro.
    ¼ cup cilantro

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • High Heat is Essential: Ensure your pan is smoking hot to get that authentic charred flavor on the beef and onions.
  • The Fries: Bake your fries until they are extra crispy so they can stand up to being tossed in the sauce at the end.
  • The Sauce: Don’t skip the cumin; it provides the warm, earthy undertone that defines the flavor profile of the dish.
  • Serving: Serve immediately! This dish is at its absolute best when the beef is hot, and the fries have just been kissed by the sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 465kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 1407mg | Potassium: 917mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 481IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 2mg

Peruvian Garlic Rice

by 3 Comments

If you’ve ever wondered why restaurant rice tastes so much better than the standard stovetop version at home, the secret is this authentic Peruvian Garlic Rice (Arroz con Ajo). By toasting the grains with fragrant, golden garlic before simmering, we’ve created a side dish so fluffy and savory that it’s the absolute must-have companion for soaking up every drop of that delicious Lomo Saltado (Peruvian Beef Stir-Fry) sauce.

An overhead view of a large bowl filled with Peruvian Garlic Rice and garnished with a sprig of fresh cilantro.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍚 The Ingredients

By combining fragrant Jasmine rice with plenty of sautéed garlic and a rich, savory broth, you transform simple pantry staples into a fluffy, restaurant-quality masterpiece. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Peruvian Garlic Rice on a grey wooden background including Jasmine rice, chicken broth, oil, garlic, and salt.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Jasmine Rice: We love using Jasmine rice for its beautiful floral aroma and slightly buttery flavor, but any high-quality long-grain white rice will work perfectly. Just be sure to rinse it thoroughly until the water runs clear to ensure those grains stay fluffy and separate!
  • Fresh Garlic: For the most authentic flavor, fresh is a must. While jarred minced garlic is a time-saver, freshly minced cloves provide that pungent, savory “bite” that defines this dish.
  • Chicken or Vegetable Broth: While traditional Arroz con Ajo is often made with water, using a high-quality chicken or vegetable broth is a “Loon-level” secret that adds a deep, savory richness. If you prefer a cleaner, more traditional taste, water works beautifully as well.
  • Neutral Oil: Use an oil with a high smoke point, like vegetable, canola, or grapeseed oil. This allows you to “toast” the rice and sauté the garlic without the oil burning or adding an overpowering flavor.
  • Salt: Don’t be shy with the salt! It is essential for drawing out the sweetness of the toasted garlic and making the flavors of the rice pop. If you are using a salted broth, you may want to taste the liquid before adding the full amount of extra salt.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥Tips and Tricks for Perfect Peruvian Garlic Rice

  • Rinse for Success: Always rinse your rice in a fine-mesh sieve under cold water until the water runs completely clear. This removes the surface starch, which is the #1 secret to achieving perfectly separate, non-sticky grains.
  • Watch the Garlic: Keep a close eye on your garlic while sautéing! You want it to be fragrant and a pale golden blonde. If it turns dark brown or black, it will become bitter and ruin the delicate flavor of the rice.
  • The “Toast” is Key: Don’t skip the step of sautéing the dry rice in the garlic oil for a few minutes. This “toasting” phase coats every grain in fat, which helps them stay individual and adds a wonderful nutty depth to the final dish.
  • Hands Off the Lid: It’s tempting to peek, but resist the urge! Lifting the lid lets out the precious steam needed to cook the rice evenly. Trust the timer and let the steam do its magic.
  • The Power of the Rest: Once the timer goes off, let the rice sit covered and undisturbed for at least 5 to 10 minutes. This “resting” period allows the moisture to redistribute, making the rice much easier to fluff and preventing it from being gummy.
  • The Restaurant Look: For that classic presentation, pack the finished rice into a small bowl or ramekin and invert it onto your plate. It creates a beautiful, clean dome that looks professional and provides the perfect “anchor” for your Lomo Saltado!

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Peruvian Garlic Rice

A person using his hand to hold back Jasmine rice that has been rinsed with water in a glass bowl while the water drains into a kitchen sink.
  1. Step 1: Place the rice in a bowl and cover with cool water. Swirl the rice and then drain it into the sink (with your hand). Repeat two more times. Drain into a colander.
A silver saucepan on a stovetop containing minced garlic that is being sautéed in olive oil.
  1. Step 2: Heat the oil over medium heat in a medium saucepan. Sauté the garlic until aromatic and soft, about 2 minutes.
A person using a large wooden spoon to cook Jasmine rice in oil in a silver saucepan on a stove.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the rinsed rice and cook, stirring often, until toasty, about 5 minutes.
A person pouring chicken broth from a glass measuring cup into a saucepan filled with toasted Jasmine rice.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the broth and salt. Bring to a boil (scrape down rice from the sides of the pan).
A person placing a clear lid onto a saucepan filled with simmering broth and Jasmine rice.
  1. Step 5: Cover, reduce the heat to LOW, and cook for 18 minutes. Leave the lid on for another 5 minutes.
A person using a fork to fluff freshly prepared Peruvian garlic rice in a silver saucepan.
  1. Step 6: Fluff with a fork and serve at once.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make Peruvian Garlic Rice in a rice cooker?

Yes, simply sauté the aromatics in a pan first, then transfer them along with the toasted grains and liquid into your machine to finish the cooking process as you normally would.

Why is my Peruvian Garlic Rice sticky instead of fluffy?

This usually happens if the grains weren’t rinsed thoroughly to remove excess starch or if the lid was lifted too often during the simmering stage, which disrupts the essential steaming process.

How long does Peruvian Garlic Rice stay fresh in the refrigerator?

When stored in an airtight container, it will remain delicious for up to four or five days, making it an excellent option for meal prep throughout the week.

Can I use brown rice for this Peruvian Garlic Rice recipe?

While you can certainly use whole grains, you will need to increase the amount of liquid and significantly extend the simmering time to ensure the texture is tender and fully cooked.

A close-up view of Peruvian Garlic Rice that has been molded into a small dome and is resting on a black dinner plate next to a serving of Peruvian Beef and Potato Stir-Fry.

🍛 More Amazing Rice Recipes

Ready to make the best rice this side of Peru? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of Peruvian Garlic Rice that has been molded into a small dome and is resting on a black dinner plate next to a serving of Peruvian Beef and Potato Stir-Fry.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Peruvian Garlic Rice (Arroz con Ajo)

This authentic Peruvian Garlic Rice (Arroz con Ajo) is the ultimate side dish, featuring fragrant Jasmine rice toasted with golden garlic and simmered in savory broth. Perfectly fluffy and aromatic, it’s the essential companion for soaking up every drop of delicious sauce from your Lomo Saltado!
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time20 minutes
Resting time10 minutes
Total Time40 minutes
Course: Side
Cuisine: Peruvian
Servings: 8
Calories: 176kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 bowl and colander for rinsing the rice
  • 1 medium saucepan with lid

Ingredients

  • 2 cups Jasmine rice or long-grain white rice
  • 2 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 3 cups chicken broth or veggie broth, or water
  • 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place the rice in a medium bowl and cover it with cool tap water. Use your hands to swish the rice around in the water. The water will become cloudy as you do this (this is the starch being released). Cup your hand on the side of the bowl and let the water drain out, holding the rice in the bowl with your hand. Repeat this process two more times, or until the water no longer turns cloudy. Transfer the rice to a colander and give it one more rinse. Set aside.
    2 cups Jasmine rice
  • Heat the oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add the garlic and sauté until aromatic and soft, about 2 minutes. Add the drained rice to the pan and stir constantly for 3 to 5 minutes until the rice smells toasty, the grains have turned from translucent to a toasty white.
    2 tablespoon vegetable oil, 4 cloves garlic
  • Stir in the broth (or water) and salt. Bring to a boil, and then lower the heat to LOW, cover, and let the rice cook for 17 to 18 minutes. Turn the heat off and let the rice stay in the pan (covered) for another 5 to 10 minutes.
    3 cups chicken broth, 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Remove the lid and fluff the rice gently with a fork. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Rinse Thoroughly: This is the most important step for fluffy rice! Rinse the grains in a fine-mesh sieve under cold water until the water runs completely clear to remove excess starch.
  • Watch the Garlic: Sauté the garlic only until it is fragrant and a pale golden blonde. If it turns dark brown or burnt, it will become bitter and affect the flavor of the entire batch.
  • The “No-Peeking” Rule: Do not lift the lid during the simmering or resting stages. The trapped steam is what finishes the cooking process and ensures the grains are tender and separate.
  • The Rest Period: Letting the rice sit covered for 5–10 minutes after turning off the heat is the secret to perfect texture. It allows the moisture to redistribute so the rice fluffs easily without becoming gummy.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. To reheat, add a splash of water or broth and microwave or heat on the stovetop until steaming.
  • The Classic Presentation: For a professional restaurant look, pack the warm rice into a small bowl or ramekin and invert it onto the plate to create a perfect, clean dome.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 766mg | Potassium: 75mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 2IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 19mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The Best Southern Chicken Fried Chicken with Cream Gravy

by 4 Comments

If you’re a fan of classic Southern chicken fried steak, you’re going to absolutely love this golden, crispy chicken fried chicken. It’s a tender, juicy comfort food staple that features a perfectly seasoned, “craggy” crust in every bite. This dish is amazing served with classic sides like fried okra and buttery mashed potatoes for the ultimate home-cooked meal.

A person pouring cream gravy over a cutlet of Southern chicken fried chicken on a white dinner plate with fried okra.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥛 The Ingredients

A blend of traditional pantry spices and a classic buttermilk wash combine to create a deeply flavorful, extra-crispy coating for these tender, boneless breasts. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Southern Chicken Fried Chicken on a grey wooden background including thin chicken breast, flour, an egg, buttermilk, oil, seasonings, and cream gravy.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chicken: Use boneless, skinless breasts pounded to a uniform ½-inch thickness to ensure they cook quickly and evenly; you can also use boneless skinless thighs if you prefer darker, juicier meat.
  • Buttermilk: If you don’t have buttermilk on hand, you can make a quick substitute by stirring 1 tablespoon of lemon juice or white vinegar into 1 cup of whole milk and letting it sit for five minutes.
  • Flour: All-purpose flour provides the best structure for the crust, but you can swap in a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend if needed.
  • Spices: Smoked paprika adds a lovely depth of flavor, but regular sweet paprika works too; feel free to adjust the cayenne pepper to control the level of heat.
  • Hot Sauce: This is used to add a subtle “zing” and acidity to the dredge, rather than heat; any vinegar-based sauce, such as Frank’s or Louisiana-style, works great.
  • Vegetable Oil: This is ideal for its high smoke point and neutral flavor, but canola oil or peanut oil are also excellent choices for frying.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Chicken Fried Chicken

  • Pound the Chicken Evenly: Don’t skip the step of pounding the chicken to a uniform ½-inch thickness. This breaks down the fibers for a “fork-tender” result and ensures the chicken cooks through at the same time the breading reaches golden-brown perfection.
  • The “Craggy” Crust Secret: For those extra-crispy bits that catch the gravy, drizzle a few tablespoons of your buttermilk mixture into the dry flour and toss it with a fork before dredging. This creates small clumps that stick to the chicken and fry up into a beautiful, textured crust.
  • Let the Breading Set: Once the chicken is breaded, let it rest on a wire rack for about 10–15 minutes before frying. This “dries” the coating slightly, helping it adhere to the meat so it doesn’t fall off in the skillet.
  • Maintain Your Oil Temp: Use a kitchen thermometer to keep your oil at a steady 350°F. If the oil is too cold, the breading will absorb grease and become soggy; if it’s too hot, the outside will burn before the chicken is cooked through.
  • Don’t Overcrowd the Pan: Fry the chicken in batches if necessary. Adding too many pieces at once will drop the oil temperature significantly, leading to oily, limp breading.
  • Use a Wire Rack for Cooling: Instead of placing the finished chicken on paper towels—which can trap steam and make the bottom soggy—place them on a wire cooling rack set over a baking sheet. This allows air to circulate and keeps the crust crispy on all sides.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Prep for Chicken Fried Chicken

A person using a small whisk to mix an egg and hot sauce into buttermilk in a round baking pan.
  1. Step 1: In a shallow pan, whisk the buttermilk, egg, and hot sauce together.
A person holding a small white bowl with cayenne pepper in it in one hand and a small white bowl with more seasonings in his other hand both over a baking pan filled with flour and black pepper.
  1. Step 2: In a second shallow pan, combine the flour with the salt, pepper, onion powder, garlic powder, paprika, and cayenne pepper.
A person using a tablespoon to drizzle wet fried chicken batter into a baking pan filled with seasoned flour.
  1. Step 3: Drizzle three tablespoons of the wet mixture into the dry mixture and gently toss with a fork.
A person dredging a thin floured chicken cutlet through a wet fried chicken batter in a round baking pan.
  1. Step 4: Lightly season the chicken cutlets with salt and pepper. Dredge through the seasoned flour and then coat it with the wet batter.
A person dredging a thin chicken breast cutlet that is coated with a wet batter in a pan filled with seasoned flour.
  1. Step 5: Dredge once again through the seasoned flour.
A person placing uncooked bread chicken cutlets on a wire rack in a baking pan that is nestled into a baking sheet pan.
  1. Step 6: Place the coated cutlets on a wire rack in a baking pan and let rest for 10 to 15 minutes.

Expert Tip: Prepping Your Own Cutlets

If you can’t find pre-sliced thin cutlets at the store, you can easily prep them yourself by “butterflying” a large chicken breast: place your hand flat on top of the breast and use a sharp knife to carefully slice horizontally through the middle to create two thinner halves.

To ensure they cook evenly and stay tender, place these pieces between two sheets of plastic wrap and use the flat side of a meat mallet (or even a heavy skillet) to gently pound them to a uniform ½-inch thickness.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Southern Chicken Fried Chicken with Cream Gravy

A person using a pair of metal tongs to flip a chicken fried chicken cutlet in a large cast-iron skillet filled with hot, bubbling oil.
  1. Step 1: Heat half an inch of oil in a sturdy skillet to 350°F. Working in batches, carefully add the cutlets to the oil. Flip occasionally until golden and crispy all over.
A person using a pair of metal tongs to place cutlets of freshly prepared chicken fried chicken on a wire rack in a baking sheet pan.
  1. Step 2: Place on a wire rack on a baking pan. Keep warm in a low-temperature oven (220°F) while you prepare the gravy.
A person lifting a large wooden spoon from a cast-iron skillet that is filled with homemade cream gravy.
  1. Step 3: Use pan drippings and flour to create a roux and then whisk in the milk and seasonings to create the gravy.
A person pouring Classic Southern Cream Gravy from a glass gravy boat over a cutlet of chicken fried chicken on a white dinner plate.
  1. Step 4: Serve at once with extra gravy on the side.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Smother it in Gravy: For the classic experience, ladle a generous amount of warm homemade cream gravy directly over the crispy chicken just before serving. This ensures the crust stays crunchy while soaking up that savory, peppery flavor.
  • The Perfect Starch: Serve it alongside a big scoop of buttery mashed potatoes. The potatoes act as the perfect vessel for any extra gravy and round out the meal beautifully.
  • Classic Southern Sides: Pair your chicken with traditional favorites like crispy fried okra, Southern green beans with bacon, or maple-glazed carrots to add a touch of sweetness and color to the plate.
  • Add some Bread: No Southern meal is complete without a side of warm, flaky buttermilk biscuits or a slice of honey butter cornbread to mop up every last bit of gravy.
  • Family Style: If serving a crowd, place the crispy chicken on a large platter and serve the cream gravy in a separate boat so guests can customize exactly how much “smothering” they prefer.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Why is it called Southern Chicken Fried Chicken?

The name describes the preparation method, which mimics “chicken fried” steak. The meat is pounded thin, double-dredged, and pan-fried before being smothered in a peppery cream gravy.

How do I keep the breading from falling off my Southern Chicken Fried Chicken?

Let the breaded pieces rest on a wire rack for 10–15 minutes before frying. This allows the buttermilk and flour to bond, ensuring the crust sticks to the meat during cooking.

Can I make Southern Chicken Fried Chicken in an air fryer?

Yes, though it won’t be quite as rich as the pan-fried version. Spray the breading generously with oil and cook at 350°F for 12–15 minutes, flipping once, until golden and cooked through.

What is the best way to reheat leftovers of this Southern Chicken Fried Chicken?

Reheat in a 350°F oven for about 10 minutes to restore the crispy texture. Avoid using a microwave, as it will make the breading soggy.

Two white dinner plates filled with servings of Southern Chicken Fried Chicken with Cream Gravy, mashed potatoes, and fried okra.

😋 More Classic Comfort Food Recipes

Ready to make the best fried chicken this side of Fort Worth? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of Southern chicken fried chicken with cream gravy on a white dinner plate along with mashed potatoes and gravy and fried okra.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

The Best Southern Chicken Fried Chicken with Cream Gravy

This classic Southern Chicken Fried Chicken features tender, pounded-thin breasts with a signature "craggy" crust. Smothered in a rich, peppery cream gravy, it’s a crispy, golden-brown comfort food favorite that pairs perfectly with mashed potatoes and fried okra.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Making Gravy10 minutes
Total Time40 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American Southern
Servings: 4
Calories: 762kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large chicken breasts skinless, boneless. Cut in half lengthwise and pounded to ½-inch thickness
  • salt and pepper

For the Dry Mixture

  • 2 cups all-purpose flour
  • ¼ cup cornstarch
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper

For the Wet Mixture

  • 1 cup buttermilk
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon hot sauce ie, Franks or Tobasco

For Frying and Serving

  • vegetable oil enough to fill the pan halfway up
  • cream gravy

Instructions

  • Cut each breast in half, lengthwise. Place them in a plastic baggie or between two pieces of plastic wrap and pound them to a consistent ½-inch thickness. Lightly season each cutlet with salt and pepper.
    2 large chicken breasts, salt and pepper
  • In a shallow bowl or pan, whisk the dry ingredients together. Set aside.
    2 cups all-purpose flour, ¼ cup cornstarch, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, ½ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • In a second bowl or pan, whisk the wet ingredients together.
    1 cup buttermilk, 1 large egg, 1 teaspoon hot sauce
  • Drizzle 3 tablespoons of the wet mixture into the dry mixture and toss with a fork to create small lumps in the flour (this makes extra crispy bits on the fried chicken).
  • Working one cutlet at a time, dredge the chicken in the flour (shake off excess). Next, place in the wet batter. Flip to fully coat. Add the cutlet back into the dry mixture, pressing the flour firmly into the chicken to ensure a thick coating.
  • Place the coated cutlets on a wire rack in a baking pan for 10 minutes. Meanwhile, heat your oil in a cast-iron skillet (only halfway up) to 350°F.
    vegetable oil
  • Working in batches, carefully add the chicken to the hot oil. Fry until golden, flipping with a pair of metal tongs every minute or so. The cutlets should be perfectly fried after about 8 to 10 minutes. Place on a clean baking rack on a baking pan and keep warm in a low-temperature oven (220°F) while you fry the remaining cutlets and make the gravy.
  • Once the chicken is finished frying, prepare the cream gravy. Serve at once with extra gravy on the side.
    cream gravy

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Uniform Thickness: Pounding the chicken to a consistent ½-inch thickness is the secret to ensuring the meat stays juicy while the crust reaches a perfect golden brown.
  • Don’t Skip the Rest: Letting the breaded chicken sit on a wire rack for 10 minutes before frying is essential; it allows the coating to “set” so it doesn’t fall off in the skillet.
  • The “Craggy” Secret: For extra texture, remember to drizzle a small amount of buttermilk into your flour mixture and toss with a fork before dredging.
  • Oil Temperature: Maintain a steady oil temperature of 350°F. Use a kitchen thermometer to ensure the chicken fries properly without absorbing excess grease.
  • The Gravy: This recipe is designed to be paired with our [Homemade Cream Gravy]. Be sure to reserve ¼ cup of the flavorful pan drippings after frying the chicken to use as your gravy base!
  • Storage: Store chicken and gravy in separate airtight containers in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat the chicken in the oven or air fryer to restore its crispy texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 762kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 1404mg | Potassium: 622mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 555IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 4mg

Classic Southern Cream Gravy

by 2 Comments

Whether you’re serving up our crispy Chicken Fried Chicken or a fresh batch of warm biscuits, this Classic Southern Cream Gravy is the ultimate finishing touch. It’s a thick, peppery white gravy that comes together in minutes using simple pantry staples you likely already have on hand. Once you taste this rich, homemade version, you’ll never go back to a store-bought mix again.

An overhead view of Classic Cream Gravy in a black cast-iron skillet with a wooden spoon resting in the middle of the pan.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥛 The Ingredients

This recipe transforms simple pantry staples and flavorful skillet drippings into a rich, velvety sauce with a savory depth of seasoning. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Classic Southern Cream Gravy on a grey wooden background including milk, pan drippings, flour, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Pan Drippings: These provide the foundational flavor from the fried chicken bits; if you don’t have enough drippings, you can supplement with unsalted butter or bacon grease.
  • Flour: All-purpose flour is best for creating a smooth roux, but you can use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend if needed.
  • Whole Milk: Whole milk creates the creamiest texture, though 2% milk works in a pinch; for an even richer gravy, replace a half-cup of milk with heavy cream.
  • Adobo Seasoning: This adds a wonderful savory depth and a hint of garlic; if you don’t have it, you can substitute with a blend of garlic powder, onion powder, and a pinch of dried oregano.
  • Black Pepper: To get that classic “sawmill” look and taste, use a coarse-ground black pepper and don’t be afraid to be generous with it.
  • Salt: Since adobo seasoning contains salt, always taste your gravy before adding extra salt to ensure it is perfectly balanced.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Cream Gravy

  • Scrape the Bits: Use a whisk to scrape up the “fond” (the browned bits) left in the pan from frying the chicken. These bits are concentrated flavor and are what give authentic Southern gravy its deep, savory character.
  • The Perfect Ratio: Stick to a 1:1 ratio of fat to flour for your roux. This ensures the gravy thickens properly without being overly greasy or tasting like raw flour.
  • Whisk Constantly: To achieve a silky-smooth texture, add the milk slowly—about a half-cup at a time—and whisk vigorously. This prevents lumps from forming as the flour absorbs the liquid.
  • Don’t Overcook the Roux: Unlike a dark Cajun roux, Southern cream gravy should stay light in color. Cook the flour and fat just long enough to remove the raw flour taste (about 1–2 minutes) before you start adding the milk.
  • Temperature Matters: If you have time, let your milk sit out for a few minutes to take the chill off. Room-temperature milk incorporates into the hot roux more easily than ice-cold milk, resulting in a smoother sauce.
  • Adjust at the End: Gravy thickens significantly as it cools. If it looks a little too thick in the pan, simply whisk in an extra splash of milk right before serving to reach your desired consistency.
  • The Pepper Test: Southern gravy is famous for being peppery. Start with the recommended amount, but don’t be afraid to add an extra crack of fresh black pepper at the very end to give it that signature “sawmill” look.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Southern Cream Gravy

A person holding a metal quarter-cup measuring cup that is partially filled with pan drippings from a skillet below that is filled with oil that was used to fry chicken.
  1. Step 1: Take a quarter cup of the pan grease from frying chicken. Or, use melted butter or bacon grease (¼ cup).
A person using a wooden spoon to stir a roux of flour and fried chicken pan drippings in a black cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 2: Heat the grease in a skillet over medium heat. Stir in the flour to create a roux. Cook (stirring often) for 1 minute.
A person whisking whole milk into a roux in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 3: Whisk in the milk. Continue whisking until all lumps are gone.
A person using a wooden spoon to stir cream gravy that is just starting to thicken in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 4: Cook and stir until thickened, just a few minutes.
A person adding adobo seasoning into a cast-iron skillet that is filled with freshly prepared classic Southern cream gravy with black pepper.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the salt, pepper, and adobo seasoning.
A person pouring Classic Southern Cream Gravy from a glass gravy boat over a cutlet of chicken fried chicken on a white dinner plate.
  1. Step 6: Serve warm!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How do I fix lumps in my Classic Southern Cream Gravy?

If lumps form, whisk vigorously. Or, simply pour the sauce through a fine-mesh strainer or give it a quick pulse with an immersion blender to restore a silky-smooth texture.

Can I make this Classic Southern Cream Gravy ahead of time? 

Yes, you can prepare it in advance and store it in the refrigerator for up to three days. When reheating, add a splash of milk and whisk over low heat to bring back the original creamy consistency.

Why is my Classic Southern Cream Gravy too thick?

This often happens if the sauce simmers for too long or begins to cool. To fix it, whisk in a small splash of milk over low heat until it reaches your desired thickness.

A person pouring Classic Southern Cream Gravy from a glass gravy boat over a cutlet of chicken fried chicken on a white dinner plate.

😋 Dishes That Pair Perfectly with Cream Gravy

Ready to make the best gravy in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of Classic Cream Gravy in a black cast-iron skillet with a wooden spoon resting in the middle of the pan.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Classic Southern Cream Gravy

This Classic Southern Cream Gravy is a rich, velvety white sauce with a savory depth from pan drippings and a hint of adobo seasoning. Perfectly peppery and easy to make, it’s the ultimate topping for chicken fried chicken, biscuits, or mashed potatoes.
Prep Time5 minutes
Cook Time10 minutes
Total Time15 minutes
Course: Gravy
Cuisine: American Southern
Servings: 6
Calories: 236kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup fried chicken pan drippings see NOTES
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 cups whole milk
  • ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon adobo seasoning ie, Goya

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Stir in the flour to create a roux. Cook, stirring often, for 1 to 2 minutes.
  • Slowly whisk in the milk. Whisk vigorously until any lumps disappear. Stir until thickened. Season with salt, pepper, and adobo. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Fat Alternatives: If you aren’t making this immediately after frying chicken, you can substitute the ¼ cup of pan drippings with unsalted butter or rendered bacon grease for a delicious, smoky flavor.
  • Preventing Lumps: For the smoothest results, add the milk gradually—about a half-cup at a time—whisking vigorously to fully incorporate the flour before adding more liquid.
  • Adjusting Consistency: Gravy thickens significantly as it cools. If it becomes too thick, simply whisk in a tablespoon of milk at a time over low heat until it reaches your preferred consistency.
  • Salt Control: Since adobo seasoning already contains salt, always taste your gravy before adding any additional salt to ensure it’s perfectly balanced.
  • The “Sawmill” Look: For a traditional Southern appearance, use coarse-ground black pepper. It provides those beautiful dark flecks and the signature bold flavor profile.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Reheat slowly on the stovetop, adding a splash of milk to loosen the sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 236kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 322mg | Potassium: 138mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 103mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Bakery-Style Homemade Italian Rolls

by 4 Comments

Elevate your sandwich game with these bakery-style homemade Italian rolls that boast a perfectly rounded shape and a thin, crackly crust. By using a professional hybrid method with a silicone channel mat, you can achieve that elusive sub-shop quality right in your home oven. These sturdy yet soft torpedoes are the ultimate foundation for any hero, grinder, or sub.

An overhead view of a row of homemade Italian rolls resting on a baking rack over a red and white linen napkin.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥖 The Ingredients

Crafted from high-protein organic staples and enriched with premium oil, this dough produces a flavorful, structured crumb finished with a signature golden shine.

An arrangement of ingredients for Homemade Italian Rolls on a grey wooden background including organic bread flour, active dry yeast, warm water, sugar, salt, olive oil, and an egg.

📝 Ingredient Notes

  • Organic Bread Flour: Using a high-protein bread flour is essential for creating the strong gluten network needed to achieve a chewy “hero” texture and a roll that holds its shape.
  • Active Dry Yeast: To ensure a successful rise, always “bloom” your yeast in warm water (ideally between 105°F–110°F) with the sugar until it becomes foamy and active.
  • Extra-Virgin Olive Oil: This provides an authentic Italian flavor profile while tenderizing the crumb, ensuring the rolls are soft enough to eat comfortably but sturdy enough to handle juicy fillings.
  • Granulated Sugar: In addition to feeding the yeast, a touch of sugar aids in the Maillard reaction, resulting in a more vibrant, caramelized crust color.
  • Fine Sea Salt: This not only enhances the natural flavors of the organic flour but also helps regulate the yeast’s fermentation for a more consistent rise.
  • Egg Bath: A simple egg wash applied right before baking is the secret to achieving that professional, glossy sheen and a deep golden-brown finish.

⚖️ Important Tools You Will Need

  • Digital Kitchen Scale (or Dry Measuring Cups): While standard measuring cups work, a digital scale is highly recommended for precision—especially when weighing out individual dough portions to ensure every roll is perfectly uniform.
  • Stand Mixer with Dough Attachment: This is the most efficient way to handle the intensive kneading required to develop the strong gluten structure needed for a chewy, bakery-style crumb.
  • Silicone Mat with “Channels”: This perforated mold is the secret to the “torpedo” shape; it supports the dough as it rises, forcing it to grow upward rather than spreading out flat.
  • Perforated Half Sheet Pan: A flat pan with holes provides a rigid base for your silicone mat while allowing heat and steam to circulate directly to the bottom of the rolls for a superior crust.
  • Razor Blade (or Bread Lame): A very sharp blade is necessary for “scoring” the dough; a clean, shallow slit down the center allows the roll to expand beautifully in the oven without tearing.
  • Shallow Metal Pan: Placed on the bottom rack of the oven, this pan is used to hold boiling water, creating the steam necessary to achieve a thin, professional, crackly crust.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Italian Rolls Dough

An overhead view of a metal mixing bowl filled with a mixture of active yeast that is blooming in warm water mixed with sugar.
  1. Step 1: In the bowl of your stand mixer, combine the warm water, sugar, and yeast. Let rest for 5 – 7 minutes, until foamy.
A person dumping bread flour from a small bowl into the bowl of a stand mixer that is mixing Italian roll dough.
  1. Step 2: Add the oil and 2 cups of the bread flour. Use the dough attachment to beat the mixture until fully combined. Add the other 2 cups of flour and salt. Beat for 8 minutes, until smooth.
A ball of homemade Italian rolls dough that has been placed in a plastic proofing container that has been sprayed with cooking oil.
  1. Step 3: Form into a smooth ball and place in a bowl or proofing container that has been oiled with cooking spray. Cover and place in a warm, non-drafty area.
A person using his hands to remove that lid from a plastic proofing container that is holding Italian bread dough that has risen to the 2 quart marker.
  1. Step 4: Let it proof until doubled in size, usually 60 to 90 minutes.
A person using his fist to punch down risen dough in a large plastic proofing container.
  1. Step 5: Gently punch the dough down.
A person forming a ball of dough in his hands that he has pinched for a large ball of dough on a lightly floured marble counter.
  1. Step 6: Turn the dough out onto a lightly floured surface. Form into five smooth balls, about 175 grams each.

Expert Tip: Master the “Finger Poke Test” for Maximum Height

The secret to a tall, airy roll is catching the dough at its peak “oven spring” potential. Avoid the temptation to over-proof; if the dough rises for too long, the gluten structure weakens, and the rolls will flatten or collapse once they hit the heat. Gently press a floured finger into the side of a rising roll—if the indent springs back slowly but remains slightly visible, it is perfectly primed for the oven.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Bakery-Style Italian Rolls

A person folding over the edges of a rectangular piece of Italian rolls dough on a black marble countertop.
  1. Step 1: Use your fingers to gently stretch the dough into a rectangle. Fold the top to the middle, then the bottom to the middle. Repeat and pinch the seal.
A person using the palms of his hands to gently roll a tubular piece of dough into a 6-inch cylinder.
  1. Step 2: Roll the dough under your palms until it is a long cylinder about 6 to 8 inches long.
A 10-inch cylinder of Italian rolls dough that has been placed in the channel of a silicone baking mat.
  1. Step 3: Place the dough into the silicone mat channels, that is preferably on a perforated pan. Cover with oiled plastic wrap and proof for another 45 minutes.
A person using a razor blade to score loaves of risen, un-baked homemade Italian rolls dough that are resting in the channels of an aerated silicone baking mat.
  1. Step 4: Wash the tops of the rolls with the egg wash and then score down the middle with a razor blade or sharp knife (about ½-inch deep).
A person transferring boiling water from a pan into a baking pan that is an oven with a row of un-baked homemade Italian rolls on the grate above it.
  1. Step 5: Place in a 400°F oven and immediately pour boiling water into a pan below the rolls.
A person holding a pan that is holding an aerated silicone mat with channels containing freshly baked homemade Italian rolls on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 6: Bake until golden, about 17 – 18 minutes. Let rest for 5 minutes, then remove from the mat to cool on a wire rack.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Why are my Homemade Italian Rolls coming out flat instead of tall?

This usually occurs when there is a lack of surface tension during the shaping process or if the dough has been allowed to rise for too long. To fix this, ensure the outer “skin” of the dough is pulled tight when rolling your torpedoes and bake them as soon as they pass the finger-poke test (see Expert Tip above).

What is the ideal weight for the individual Homemade Italian Rolls?

For a substantial hero that can support heavy fillings, aiming for 165 to 175 grams per portion is best. This amount of dough fills the channels of a silicone mat perfectly, resulting in a taller and more professional profile.

Do I need a special pan to bake Homemade Italian Rolls?

Using a perforated channel mat placed on a flat, hole-filled sheet pan is the most effective way to mimic a commercial bakery. This combination provides the necessary structure for the shape while allowing heat to circulate around the entire crust.

How do I get a crackly crust on my Homemade Italian Rolls?

Introducing steam into the oven during the first few minutes of baking is the key. By pouring boiling water into a preheated metal pan on the bottom rack, you create a humid environment that allows the exterior to expand and crisp up beautifully.

A person holding a homemade Italian roll that has been split open lengthwise revealing the soft crumb interior of the bread.

🍞 More Amazing Bread Recipes

Ready to make the best sandwich rolls this side of Little Italy? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A color red and white linen-lined bread basked filled with a pile of homemade Italian rolls.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Bakery-Style Homemade Italian Rolls

These bakery-style Italian rolls feature a sturdy, chewy crumb and a thin, crackly crust, making them the perfect foundation for a loaded hero. Designed for use with a silicone channel mat, they maintain a professional torpedo shape that’s ideal for cradling heavy fillings like sausage and peppers.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time18 minutes
Proofing and Cooling Time2 hours
Total Time2 hours 33 minutes
Course: Bread
Cuisine: Italian
Servings: 5
Calories: 437kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Digital scale or dry measuring cups
  • Stand mixer with dough attachment
  • perforated silicone mat with channels
  • perforated half-baking sheet pan
  • razor or very sharp knife (small)
  • sturdy pan for holding boiling water
  • baking rack for cooling rolls

Ingredients

  • 1½ cups warm water (350ml), 105°F
  • 2¼ teaspoon active dry yeast (0.25 ounces/7 grams), 1 packet
  • 1 tablespoon sugar
  • 4 cups bread flour (500 grams), preferably organic
  • 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1½ teaspoon fine sea salt
  • cooking spray
  • 1 egg beaten with 1 tablespoon water

Instructions

  • In a stand mixer, combine the warm water, yeast, and sugar. Gently whisk until combined. Let it rest for 5 to 8 minutes, until it becomes foamy. See NOTES.
    1½ cups warm water, 2¼ teaspoon active dry yeast, 1 tablespoon sugar
  • Add 2 cups of the flour (approx. 125 grams per cup) and the olive oil. Mix with the dough attachment until the mixture is fully combined. You may need to scrape down the sides of the bowl with a spatula.
    4 cups bread flour, 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • Add the salt and the remaining 2 cups of flour gradually. Let the mixer run on medium for 8 minutes. The dough should be smooth and elastic. If it is sticking to the side of the bowl, add another tablespoon of flour. It should be "tacky" but not "sticky."
    1½ teaspoon fine sea salt
  • Spray a bowl (or proofing container) with cooking spray.
    cooking spray
  • Form the dough into a smooth ball, and place it in the oiled bowl (or container). Turn the dough over a time or two to coat it with the oil. Cover and let it rise (proof) in a warm spot for 60 to 90 minutes until doubled in size.
  • Gently punch the dough down and then turn it out onto a lightly floured surface (not too much flour!). Divide the dough into 5 equal pieces (a digital scale helps you do this). Each ball should be around 165 grams. Cover with a kitchen towel and let them rest for 15 minutes.
  • Working one piece of dough at a time, flatten the ball into a rectangle (about 5×7"). Take the long edge furthest from you and fold it to the center. Press the edge into the dough with your fingertips to "tack" it down. Take the edge closest to you and fold it up to the center (like you are folding a piece of paper to put into an envelope). Now, fold the entire log in half again, bringing the top edge to the center and then the bottom edge to the center. Seal with your fingetips.
  • Turn the dough seal-side down, and place your palms over the center of the log. Gently roll the log back and forth on the counter. As you roll, slowly move your hands apart toward the ends of the log. Don't just press down, press outward. Taper the ends slightly.
  • Place the silicon mat with channels on the perforated sheet pan. Pick up your shaped log and look for the seam. Place the log into the silicone channel with the seam-side facing down. Repeat with the remaining dough pieces.
  • Spray a large piece of plastic wrap with cooking spray and then loosely cover the silicone mat with the dough in the channel. Place in a warm spot for 45 minutes. They should look puffy and fill the width of the channels.
  • Preheat oven to 400°F. Bring 1 to 2 cups of water to a boil. Place a pan on the bottom rack of the oven and place another rack in the middle.
  • In a small bowl, combine the beaten egg with 1 tablespoon of the water. Gently brush the tops of the rolls with the egg wash. Use a razor blade (or very sharp knife) to make one, long slit (about ½-inch deep) down the center of each roll.
    1 egg
  • Put the tray on the middle rack and immediately pour (carefully) the boiling water into the pan on the bottom rack. Shut the door immediately and bake for 17 to 19 minutes, until the rolls are a deep golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool in the mat for 5 minutes. Then, move them directly to a wire rack to finish cooling. Store the rolls in a brown paper bag at room temperature. The paper allows the bread to "breathe," which keeps the crust from getting soft and chewy.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Test Your Yeast: If the mixture of yeast, warm water, and sugar does not become foamy or creamy within 5–10 minutes, the yeast is no longer active. Discard the mixture and start again with fresh yeast; using “dead” yeast will prevent the dough from rising and result in dense, flat rolls.
  • Precision Portioning: For a professional “tall” profile that fills out your silicone channels, use a digital scale to portion your dough into 160g–170g pieces. This ensures every roll is uniform in size and has enough volume to rise upward rather than spreading.
  • Water Temperature: Aim for a water temperature between 105°F and 110°F. Water that is too cold won’t activate the yeast, while water above 120°F can kill it instantly.
  • The Steam Secret: Don’t skip the pan of boiling water on the bottom rack. The steam keeps the dough’s surface moist during the first few minutes of baking, allowing the rolls to expand fully (oven spring) before the crust sets and becomes crackly.
  • Proper Cooling: To maintain the integrity of the crust, move the rolls from the silicone mat to a wire cooling rack immediately after baking. This prevents steam from being trapped underneath, which can lead to a “soggy bottom.”

Nutrition

Calories: 437kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 713mg | Potassium: 126mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 50IU | Vitamin C: 0.004mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 1mg

Authentic Chicken Madeira with Mushrooms and Asparagus

by 8 Comments

This authentic Chicken Madeira features tender pan-seared cutlets, crisp asparagus, and savory mushrooms all bathed in a rich, velvety wine reduction. Topped with a bubbly blanket of melted mozzarella, this one-pan masterpiece brings restaurant-quality flavors right to your kitchen. It is perfectly served with creamy mashed potatoes to soak up every last drop of the decadent sauce.

A spoon being used to drizzle a brown sauce over the top of a serving of chicken Madeira with mushrooms and asparagus on a white dinner plate.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍷 The Ingredients

This elegant dish brings together tender poultry and crisp seasonal greens, all elevated by a deeply savory wine reduction and a blanket of perfectly melted, golden cheese. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Chicken Madeira on a grey wooden background including chicken breast, mushrooms, asparagus, garlic, shallot, beef stock, Madeira wine, flour, Mozzarella cheese, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chicken Breasts: Use thin-cut cutlets to ensure the chicken cooks quickly and remains tender. If you only have standard large breasts, slice them in half horizontally and pound them to an even ¼-inch thickness.
  • Madeira Wine: This is a fortified Portuguese wine that gives the dish its unique smoky-sweet flavor. Look for “Sercial” (dry) or “Rainwater” (medium-dry). Substitution: If you can’t find Madeira, a Dry Marsala is the closest alternative, though the flavor profile will shift slightly toward a classic Marsala.
  • Low-Moisture Mozzarella: It is crucial to use the firm block style of mozzarella. Avoid “fresh” mozzarella (the kind stored in water), as it will release too much liquid under the broiler and thin out your sauce. Substitution: Provolone or Monterey Jack can be used for a similar melt and mild flavor.
  • Beef Stock: A high-quality beef stock or bone broth provides the deep, dark color and savory “umami” base for the sauce. Substitution: Chicken stock works in a pinch, but the sauce will be lighter in color and less robust.
  • Baby Bella Mushrooms: Also known as Cremini, these offer a deeper, earthier flavor than white button mushrooms. However, white mushrooms or even sliced Shiitakes work well.
  • Asparagus: Choose medium-thickness spears for the best texture. If using very thin “pencil” asparagus, skip the blanching step, as they will cook through completely just from the heat of the broiler.
  • Shallots: These provide a sophisticated, mild onion-garlic hybrid flavor. Substitution: You can use the white part of a leek or a small amount of finely minced yellow onion.
  • Cornstarch Slurry: This is the key to a glossy, restaurant-style “glaze” that clings to the chicken. Ensure you mix the cornstarch with cold water before adding it to the hot pan to prevent clumping.
  • Alcohol-Free Option: To make this without wine, substitute the Madeira with additional beef stock mixed with 1 tablespoon of balsamic vinegar and 1 teaspoon of brown sugar to mimic the acidity and sweetness of the wine.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Chicken Madeira

  • Use an Oven-Safe Skillet: Since this is a one-pan meal that moves from the stovetop to the broiler, ensure you use a heavy-duty, oven-safe skillet like cast iron or stainless steel. Safety Tip: Remember that the handle will be extremely hot when it comes out of the oven—drape a towel over it as a reminder!
  • Don’t Overcook the Veggies Early: When sautéing the asparagus and mushrooms at the beginning, aim for “just tender.” They will go back into the pan later and spend time under the broiler, so keeping them slightly crisp prevents them from becoming mushy later.
  • The “Fond” is Flavor: After searing the chicken, you’ll see brown bits stuck to the bottom of the pan. This is called “fond.” When you pour in the Madeira wine, use a wooden spoon to scrape those bits up.
  • Patience with the Reduction: The most important step for a rich sauce is the reduction. Don’t rush it! Let the wine and stock bubble until it is visibly thicker and darker. If the sauce is too thin, it won’t “cling” to the chicken and potatoes.
  • Don’t Fully Cook the Chicken in the Skillet: Since you are using thin cutlets, sear them just until they are golden brown on both sides. They will finish cooking to a juicy perfection while the sauce simmers and the cheese melts under the broiler.
  • The “Mashed Potato Well”: When serving, create a small “well” in the center of your mashed potatoes with the back of a spoon. This acts as a bowl to catch the extra Madeira sauce.
  • Check Your Broiler Height: For the best “bubbly” cheese without burning the sauce, place your oven rack about 5–6 inches away from the broiler element. This allows the cheese to brown evenly while the sauce underneath stays glossy and hot.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Chicken Madeira with Mushrooms and Asparagus

A bunch of seasoned asparagus stalks being sautéed in butter in a large black cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Melt 1 tablespoon butter in a cast-iron skillet and sauté the asparagus until just beginning to soften. Season with salt and pepper. Remove from the skillet and set aside.
Sliced baby bella mushrooms being sautéed in butter in a large black cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add another tablespoon of butter and sauté the mushrooms until soft. Season with salt and pepper. Remove them from the skillet and set aside.
Four seasoned thin chicken breasts being seared in butter in a large black cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Dredge the thin chicken cutlets in flour seasoned with salt and pepper. Add more butter and olive oil to the skillet and sear until lightly browned on both sides (about 5 minutes per side). Remove them from the skillet.
A person dumping minced garlic into a cast-iron skillet that contains finely chopped shallot that is being sautéed in butter in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the shallots and garlic and sauté for about 1 minute.
A person pouring beef stock from a measuring cup into a large cast-iron skillet that is filled with a simmer beef stock and Madeira wine sauce.
  1. Step 5: Pour in the wine and then the beef stock. Bring to a boil and simmer for about 10 to 15 minutes, until the liquid has reduced by at least half, has thickened, and is glossy.
A person pouring a cornstarch slurry from a small white bowl into a skillet that is filled with a beef stock and Madeira wine sauce.
  1. Step 6: Mix the cornstarch with 2 teaspoon of water and stir it into the sauce. Stir until slightly thickened. Remove from the heat.
A person sprinkling shredded mozzarella cheese over the top of chicken Madeira and sautéed mushrooms and asparagus in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 7: Nestle the chicken into the sauce, and then top with the mushrooms, asparagus, and a sprinkling of the Mozzarella.
A person wearing oven mitts holding a cast-iron skillet that is filled with a simmering chicken Madeira with mushrooms and asparagus.
  1. Step 8: Place under the broiler (6″ from the heating element) and cook until the cheese has melted and it is lightly browned in spots. Keep an eye on it! Serve at once!

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Perfect Base: Serve each portion over a generous bed of creamy mashed potatoes. Use the back of a spoon to create a “well” or a slight indentation in the center of the potatoes to hold the extra sauce.
  • The “Lift and Shift”: Use a wide, flat spatula to carefully lift each chicken cutlet from the skillet. By supporting the bottom of the chicken, you ensure the “blanket” of melted cheese, asparagus, and mushrooms stays perfectly intact as it moves to the plate.
  • The Sauce Drizzle: Once the chicken is nestled on the potatoes, use a ladle or large spoon to drizzle the hot Madeira reduction over the chicken and into the potato well.
  • Serve with Crusty Bread: This sauce is often the star of the show. Serve the dish with a side of warm, sliced rye bread or a skillet dinner rolls to ensure your guests can “mop up” every last drop of the Madeira reduction.
  • Pair with a Light Side: Because this is a hearty, indulgent meal, it pairs beautifully with a simple side salad with a French vinaigrette.
  • Wine Pairing: If you are serving wine with dinner, a glass of the same Madeira used in the sauce is a classic choice. If you prefer a standard table wine, a medium-bodied red like a Merlot or a buttery Chardonnay complements the earthy mushrooms and rich sauce perfectly.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this Chicken Madeira Recipe without alcohol?

Yes! You can swap the wine for an equal amount of beef broth mixed with a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar and a teaspoon of brown sugar. This combination mimics the acidity and slight sweetness that the fortified wine usually provides.

What is the best type of wine to buy for a Chicken Madeira Recipe?

Look for a bottle labeled “Sercial” or “Rainwater.” These are dry to medium-dry varieties that provide a sophisticated, smoky flavor. Avoid the “cooking wines” found in the vinegar aisle, as they are often loaded with excess salt.

Can I use a different type of cheese for this Chicken Madeira Recipe?

While low-moisture mozzarella is preferred for its classic melt, you can certainly use Provolone or Monterey Jack.

Is it possible to use frozen asparagus in this Chicken Madeira Recipe?

It is highly recommended to use fresh spears for the best texture. Frozen vegetables tend to hold more water and can become quite soft, which may cause the sauce to become runny during the final broiling step.

Do I need a special pan to make this Chicken Madeira Recipe?

Any heavy-duty, oven-safe skillet will work perfectly. Stainless steel or cast iron are the best choices because they can move safely from the high heat of the stovetop to the intense direct heat of the broiler without damage.

An overhead view of a large cast-iron skillet filled with chicken madeira topped with sautéed mushrooms and asparagus.

😋 More Amazing One-Pot Chicken Dishes

Ready to make a chicken dish that’s better than Cheesecake Factory? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A spoon being used to drizzle a brown sauce over the top of a serving of chicken Madeira with mushrooms and asparagus.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Authentic Chicken Madeira with Mushrooms and Asparagus

Indulge in this restaurant-quality Chicken Madeira featuring tender pan-seared cutlets, crisp asparagus, and savory mushrooms. Bathed in a rich, velvety wine reduction and topped with a blanket of melted mozzarella, this one-pan masterpiece is the ultimate gourmet comfort food for any night of the week.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time25 minutes
Total Time40 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 533kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 oven-safe large skillet (12") ie, cast-iron or stainless steel

Ingredients

  • 2 large chicken breasts slice in half, lengthwise, see NOTES
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • salt and pepper
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter divided
  • 1 bunch asparagus ends trimmed off
  • 8 oz mushrooms preferably baby Bella, sliced
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 shallot finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup Madeira wine not cooking wine
  • 1 cup beef stock
  • 1 teaspoon cornstarch mixed with 2 teaspoon water
  • 1 cup mozzarella low-moisture, shredded, see NOTES

Instructions

  • If using large boneless, skinless chicken breasts, slice them in half, lengthwise, and place them in a plastic baggie and pound them to approximately ¼-inch thick. Or use thinly sliced chicken breasts.
    2 large chicken breasts
  • Place the flour on a platter or in a dish and toss it with 1 teaspoon salt and 1 teaspoon black pepper. Dredge the chicken cutlets through the flour until completely coated. Set aside.
    ½ cup all-purpose flour, salt and pepper
  • Heat 1 tablespoon of the butter in your large oven-safe skillet over medium heat. Add the asparagus and sauté until just starting to soften (it will cook more in the oven). Season with a pinch of salt and pepper. Remove from the skillet onto a plate. Set aside.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 bunch asparagus
  • Add another 1 tablespoon of butter to the pan over medium heat. Add the mushrooms and sauté them until soft. Season with a healthy pinch of salt and pepper. Remove from the pan and set aside.
    8 oz mushrooms
  • Add the remaining 2 tablespoon of butter and the oil (2 tbsp) to the skillet over medium heat. Shake any excess flour from the cutlets and place them in the skillet. Sear them (moving them around from time to time) until golden brown on the bottom, about 4 to 5 minutes. Flip the cutlets and sear the other side until browned, another 4 to 5minutes. Remove from the skillet and set aside.
    2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Add the chopped shallot and garlic to the pan and sauté for 1 minute. Pour in the wine and then the beef stock. Bring to a boil and then simmer until reduced by half and somewhat thickened, about 10 minutes.
    1 shallot, 2 cloves garlic, 1 cup Madeira wine, 1 cup beef stock
  • Mix the water with the cornstarch until smooth. Stir into the sauce and simmer until thickened a little more and silky. Stir in ½ teaspoon of salt and pepper, each.
    1 teaspoon cornstarch
  • Turn off the heat and nestle the chicken cutlets into the sauce. Top with the mushrooms and then the asparagus (arrange any extra around the chicken cutlets). Top each cutlet with a small mound of the mozzarella.
    1 cup mozzarella
  • Turn your broiler to HIGH and place the top grate about 6 inches from the heating element. Place the skillet under the broiler and cook until the cheese is melted and browned in a few spots. Keep an eye on this! This should only take 1 to 2 minutes. Don't let it burn! Remove from the oven and serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Chicken Preparation: For the most tender results, use thin-cut chicken cutlets or pound standard breasts to an even ¼-inch thickness. This ensures the chicken cooks quickly and stays juicy while the cheese melts under the broiler.
  • Choosing the Right Cheese: Use “low-moisture” mozzarella (the firm block style) for that perfect bubbly, golden topping. Avoid using “fresh” mozzarella (the kind packed in water), as it will release too much liquid and make your rich Madeira sauce watery.
  • The Secret to the Sauce: Don’t rush the reduction step! Allowing the wine and stock to simmer until reduced by half is what creates that signature, velvety glaze that clings to the chicken and potatoes.
  • Skillet Safety: Since this recipe moves from the stovetop to the broiler, the handle of your skillet will be extremely hot. Always use an oven mitt and consider draping a dry kitchen towel over the handle once it’s out of the oven as a visual reminder to stay safe.
  • Wine Substitution: If you cannot find Madeira wine, a dry Marsala is the best substitute. For an alcohol-free version, use extra beef stock with a splash of balsamic vinegar and a pinch of brown sugar.

Nutrition

Calories: 533kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 437mg | Potassium: 1048mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1424IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 197mg | Iron: 4mg

Crispy Baked Red Enchilada Chicken Tacos

by 12 Comments

Elevate your next taco night with these Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos, featuring tender chicken smothered in an easy homemade red enchilada sauce. Baked in oil-brushed white corn tortillas until perfectly golden and blistered, these tacos offer a satisfying crunch and a stunning, restaurant-quality presentation.

A large silver sheet pan filled with two rows of overlapping crispy baked chicken tacos garnished with chopped cilantro.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌶️ The Ingredients

This recipe harmoniously combines tender chicken with a bold, aromatic sauce, a crisp, golden base, and a vibrant array of fresh, zesty garnishes, resulting in a perfectly balanced and colorful meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos on a grey wooden background including chicken thighs, red enchilada sauce, cheddar cheese, corn tortillas, oil, garlic, onion, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chicken Thighs: Poaching the thighs with onion, garlic, and salt ensures the meat stays incredibly juicy and flavorful; however, you can substitute with chicken breasts or a rotisserie chicken if you are short on time.
  • Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce: This is the flavor powerhouse of the dish, but if you don’t have a batch ready, a high-quality store-bought red enchilada sauce will work in a pinch.
  • White Corn Tortillas: These provide a delicate texture and beautiful golden-brown blisters when baked, though yellow corn tortillas can be used for a more robust corn flavor. Flour tortillas can also be used.
  • Shredded Cheddar Cheese: Cheddar offers a sharp, bold flavor that stands up well to the red sauce, but you can swap it for Monterey Jack or Oaxaca cheese for a smoother, more “stretchy” melt.
  • Vegetable Oil: A neutral oil with a high smoke point is essential for achieving that “oven-fried” crunch; avocado oil or grapeseed oil are excellent alternatives.
  • Garnishes & Sides: While cilantro and lime provide essential brightness, feel free to customize your taco bar with Greek yogurt instead of sour cream, or add sliced jalapeños for an extra kick of heat. Pico de gallo and homemade salsa are classic additions.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Baked Chicken Tacos

  • Warm Your Tortillas: To prevent white corn tortillas from cracking when you fold them, always warm them in a damp paper towel in the microwave for 30–45 seconds first; this makes them pliable and easy to work with.
  • The “Cheese Shield”: To keep your tacos from getting soggy, place a layer of shredded cheddar on the tortilla before adding the saucy chicken. This creates a delicious, melted barrier that protects the crunch of the shell.
  • Don’t Overcrowd the Pan: For the ultimate “oven-fried” texture, give each taco a little breathing room on the baking sheet. Proper airflow ensures the edges get crispy and blistered rather than just steaming.
  • The Mid-Bake Flip: For perfectly even browning, use a wide spatula to carefully flip the tacos halfway through the baking time. This ensures both sides are equally golden and crunchy.
  • Control the Moisture: Ensure your shredded chicken is well-coated but not dripping with excess sauce. If the filling is too wet, it can make the tortillas difficult to crisp up.
  • Garnish for Contrast: For a professional, “visually stunning” look, add your cold toppings (like cilantro, sour cream, and pico de gallo) immediately after the tacos come out of the oven. The contrast between the hot, golden shell and the bright, fresh garnishes makes the dish pop.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos

A large skillet filled with skin-on chicken thighs and wedges of onion being poached in water on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Place the chicken in a skillet with water, onion, garlic, and salt. Bring to a boil, lower the heat, cover, and simmer for 15 to 20 minutes.
A person using two forks to shred poached chicken thighs on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: Remove the chicken and let it cool. Remove the skin and then shred the meat with two forks (or your fingers).
A person using two wooden spoons to toss shredded chicken in a red enchilada sauce in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 3: Toss the chicken with the red enchilada sauce, cumin, garlic powder, and salt.
A person using a pastry brush to apply a thin layer of vegetable oil over the surface of a white corn tortilla.
  1. Step 4: Wrap the tortillas in damp paper towels and warm them in the microwave until pliable. Brush one side of each tortilla with a thin layer of vegetable oil.
A person placing shredded cheddar cheese over red enchilada shredded chicken resting on more cheese all on one half of a corn tortilla.
  1. Step 5: Place the tortilla oil side down, and add a small layer of cheese on one half of the tortilla, topped with a small mound of chicken, and another layer of cheese.
A person folding one half of a white corn tortilla over a filling of red enchilada chicken and shredded cheddar cheese.
  1. Step 6: Fold the other half of the tortilla over and press it so it stays in place. Brush a little more oil over the top and add a sprinkle of coarse salt. Repeat with the remaining tortillas.
A person using a perforated spatula to flip a baked chicken taco over on a baking sheet lined with a silicone matt and other tacos.
  1. Step 7: Bake at 425°F for 10 minutes. Remove them from the oven and use a spatula to carefully flip the tacos over.
Two rows of crispy baked chicken tacos on a large baking sheet that is lined with a silicone matt.
  1. Step 8: Bake for another 8 minutes, until crispy and dark on the edges. Remove from the oven and let them rest for 1 to 2 minutes. Serve at once with all the fixings!

Expert Tip

Don’t be alarmed if you see a little sauce or cheese escaping onto the baking sheet while they bake! Allowing the tacos to rest for a minute or two after they come out of the oven gives the tortillas a chance to absorb those flavorful drippings, ensuring the base is infused with the rich essence of the red enchilada sauce while still maintaining its signature crunch.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Platter Presentation: Arrange the tacos in a slightly overlapping row on a large wooden board or a bright white ceramic platter to make the golden-brown, blistered color of the tortillas truly pop.
  • Dress the Tacos Directly: For a professional look, don’t just serve toppings on the side—scatter the chopped cilantro and spoonfuls of fresh pico de gallo directly over the tacos to create an immediate “visual wow.”
  • Create a Dipping Station: Place small, individual ramekins of salsa, sour cream, fresh pico de gallo, and your extra homemade red enchilada sauce around the platter so guests can easily customize their level of creaminess and spice.
  • The Finishing Zest: Tuck fresh lime wedges into the gaps between the tacos; the bright green color adds a beautiful contrast, and the citrus juice is essential for cutting through the richness of the cheddar and chicken.
  • Serve While Hot: For the best experience, serve these tacos while the cheese is still melty and the shells are at their peak “oven-fried” crispness.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make these Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos ahead of time?

You can certainly prepare the shredded meat and the red sauce up to two days in advance. However, for the best results, wait to assemble and put them in the oven until you are ready to eat so the shells stay perfectly crunchy.

What is the best way to reheat leftover Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos?

To bring back the original texture, place them in an air fryer or a toaster oven at 350°F for about 3–5 minutes. Avoid using the microwave, as it will cause the tortillas to become soft and chewy rather than firm.

Can I use flour tortillas for these Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos?

Yes, you can swap the corn for flour if you prefer. Just keep a close eye on the oven, as flour tends to brown much faster and will result in a softer, more “quesadilla-like” finish.

How do I prevent my Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos from getting soggy?

The secret is to create a barrier by sprinkling a layer of shredded cheese onto the tortilla before adding the saucy filling. This prevents the liquid from soaking into the base, ensuring the exterior remains toasted and crisp.

A close-up view of a silver trey filled with Crispy Baked Chicken Tacos stacked against one another with a lime wedge and a bowl of enchilada sauce nearby.

🌮 More Amazing Taco Recipes

Ready to make the best tacos in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large steel sheet pan filled with two rows of crispy baked chicken tacos with a bowl of enchilada sauce in one corner and another bowl of sour cream in the other corner.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Crispy Baked Red Enchilada Chicken Tacos

Experience the ultimate crunch with these oven-baked tacos featuring tender chicken tossed in an easy homemade red enchilada sauce. Wrapped in oil-brushed white corn tortillas and baked until golden and blistered, these tacos are a vibrant, restaurant-quality meal that's incredibly easy to make.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time20 minutes
Make the Enchilada Sauce15 minutes
Total Time50 minutes
Course: Entree / Lunch
Cuisine: Tex-Mex / American
Servings: 4
Calories: 645kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large skillet with lid for poaching the chicken
  • 1 Baking sheet lined with parchment paper (or silicone mat) is ideal, but not 100% required.

Ingredients

For the Red Enchilada Chicken Filling

  • 5 chicken thighs skin-on, bone-in
  • 1 large onion quartered
  • 2 cloves garlic crushed (or minced)
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • 1 cup red enchilada sauce click for the easy recipe
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder

For the Tacos

  • 12 corn tortillas white or yellow
  • 3 tablespoon vegetable oil
  • 2 cups cheddar cheese shredded
  • sea salt
  • fresh cilantro chopped, for garnish
  • lime wedges for serving (optional)
  • pico de gallo for serving (optional)
  • salsa for serving (optional)
  • sour cream for serving (optional)

Instructions

Do Ahead – Up to 2 Days

  • Make the red enchilada sauce (click the link above)
    1 cup red enchilada sauce

Prepare the Chicken Filling

  • Place the chicken, skin side-up, in a large skillet (with a lid). Fill with water until the chicken is just barely covered. Nestle the onion wedges around the chicken, add the crushed (or minced) garlic, and 1 teaspoon salt. Bring to a boil, lower the heat, cover, and simmer for 17 to 20 minutes.
    5 chicken thighs, 1 large onion, 2 cloves garlic, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Use a slotted spoon to remove the chicken from the skillet onto a cutting board. Once cool enough to handle, remove the skin. Use two forks (or your fingers) and remove the meat. Shred and place in a large bowl. You should have about 3 to 4 cups of shredded chicken.
  • Add 1 cup of the enchilada sauce, cumin, garlic powder, and 1 teaspoon salt. Toss with a wooden spoon until fully coated. Set aside.
    1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 teaspoon garlic powder

Make the Tacos

  • Preheat your oven to 475°F.
  • Wrap the tortillas in damp paper towels and microwave for 30 to 40 seconds (this makes them pliable and easy to bend without cracking).
    12 corn tortillas
  • Lightly brush one side of a tortilla with oil. Place it oil-side-down on the baking sheet (preferably lined with parchment paper or a silicone mat). On one half of the tortilla, add a sprinkle of cheese, a generous scoop of chicken, and another sprinkle of cheese on top. Fold the tortilla over and press down to "lock" the taco. Repeat with the remaining tacos. You should have 12 to 14 tacos.
    3 tablespoon vegetable oil, 2 cups cheddar cheese
  • Brush the tops of the folded tacos with a bit more oil and sprinkle with a pinch of sea salt.
    sea salt
  • Bake for 8 to 10 minutes, until starting to get crispy on the edges of the tortillas. Remove the pan from the oven and use a spatula to carefully flip the tacos over. Return the pan to the oven and bake for another 8 minutes. Remove from the pan and let them sit, untouched, for 1 to 2 minutes.
  • Place the tacos on a platter and garnish with chopped cilantro and lime wedges. Serve with pico de gallo, salsa, and sour cream, if desired.
    fresh cilantro, lime wedges, pico de gallo, salsa, sour cream

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Shred Your Own Cheese: For the best melt and a truly professional look, shred your cheddar fresh from the block. Pre-shredded cheeses are coated in anti-caking agents (like potato starch) that prevent them from melting smoothly and can result in a “grainy” texture.
  • The Resting Period: Allow the tacos to rest for 2 minutes before serving. This brief pause lets the tortillas absorb any flavorful sauce that may have leaked during baking, ensuring every bite is infused with the red enchilada seasoning.
  • Don’t Skip the Steam: Warming the white corn tortillas in a damp paper towel is essential. This makes them flexible enough to fold without cracking, ensuring your tacos look beautiful and stay intact.
  • Make-Ahead Tip: You can poach the chicken and prepare the red enchilada sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store them separately in the fridge and simply assemble and bake when you’re ready for dinner!

Nutrition

Calories: 645kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 42g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 195mg | Sodium: 743mg | Potassium: 557mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1085IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 491mg | Iron: 3mg

Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce

by 3 Comments

Ditch the store-bought cans for this rich, smoky, and incredibly Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce that comes together in just 15 minutes. With a deep flavor profile enhanced by savory tomato paste and a hint of cinnamon, it is the perfect addition to everything from crispy Baked Chicken Tacos to Classic Beef Enchiladas.

A person using a spoon to hold up a spoonful of easy homemade red enchilada sauce from a jar filled with the same.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥫 The Ingredients

This sauce relies on a handful of everyday pantry staples and aromatic spices to achieve a rich, restaurant-quality depth that elevates any Mexican-inspired meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce on a grey wooden background including chicken broth, tomato paste, flour, oil, vinegar, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Neutral Oil: Use vegetable, canola, or avocado oil for the best results; avoid extra virgin olive oil, as its strong flavor can clash with the spices.
  • All-Purpose Flour: This is the thickening agent for the roux. If you need a gluten-free version, you can substitute it with a 1:1 gluten-free all-purpose flour blend.
  • Chili Powder: Make sure to use a standard American-style chili powder blend (which contains other spices) rather than pure ground cayenne or chili flakes, which would be far too spicy.
  • Tomato Paste: This adds a rich “cooked-down” flavor and beautiful color; if you are out, you can omit it, though the sauce will be slightly thinner and less robust.
  • Chicken Broth: You can use low-sodium chicken broth to better control the saltiness, or easily swap it for vegetable broth to make this recipe completely vegetarian.
  • Apple Cider Vinegar: The acidity cuts through the earthiness of the spices, to brightening the final sauce. If you don’t have it, white vinegar or a squeeze of fresh lime juice works just as well.
  • Cinnamon: Don’t be tempted to skip this! A tiny pinch doesn’t make the sauce sweet; instead, it adds a professional, “hidden” complexity that mimics traditional Mexican dried peppers.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Enchilada Sauce

  • Don’t Rush the Roux: When cooking the flour and oil, wait until it smells slightly nutty and has a golden appearance. This removes the “raw flour” taste and ensures a smooth, stable base for your sauce.
  • Bloom Your Spices: Adding the chili powder, cumin, and cinnamon to the hot oil for 30 seconds is crucial. This “blooming” process releases the essential oils in the spices, making the final sauce much more fragrant and flavorful.
  • Fry the Tomato Paste: Make sure to stir the tomato paste into the oil/flour mixture for about a minute before adding the broth. This caramelizes the sugars in the paste and removes any metallic “canned” aftertaste.
  • Whisk Gradually to Avoid Lumps: To get a silky-smooth texture, add the broth just a splash at a time at first. Whisk it into a thick, smooth paste before pouring in the rest of the liquid.
  • Adjust the Bitterness: Some brands of chili powder can be slightly bitter. If your sauce tastes a bit sharp after simmering, stir in a tiny pinch of sugar or honey to perfectly balance the flavors.
  • Make it Ahead: This sauce actually tastes even better the next day as the spices continue to meld. You can store it in the fridge for up to 5 days or freeze it in an airtight container for up to 3 months.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Easy Red Enchilada Sauce

A person using a wooden spatula to stir flour in hot oil in a skillet to create a roux.
  1. Step 1: Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Stir in the flour and cook for 1 minute to create a roux.
A person adding two tablespoons of tomato paste into a skillet that has a simmering roux in it.
  1. Step 2: Stir in the tomato paste and cook for 1 to 2 minutes.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir chili powder and other seasonings into a skillet that contains tomato paste that has been cooked with a roux.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the seasonings and cook for 1 to 2 minutes.
A person using a whisk to stir chicken broth that is being poured into an enchilada sauce roux that is simmering in a large black skillet.
  1. Step 4: Slowly whisk in the chicken broth.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir gurgling red enchilada sauce in a large black non-stick skillet.
  1. Step 5: Bring to a boil, and then lower the heat and simmer until slightly thickened, smooth, and silky.
A person pouring apple cider vinegar from a small white bowl into a skillet filled with simmering Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce
  1. Step 6: Stir in the apple cider vinegar. Let cool and chill until ready to use.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I freeze this Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce?

Yes! Simply let it cool completely and store it in a freezer-safe container or heavy-duty bag for up to three months. Thaw it in the refrigerator overnight before reheating on the stove.

How do I adjust the heat level of this Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce?

To make it milder, ensure you are using a mild chili powder blend. If you prefer more kick, add a pinch of cayenne pepper or a teaspoon of chipotle powder during the spice-blooming step.

Is this Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce gluten-free?

As written, it contains all-purpose flour. However, you can easily adapt it by using a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend or cornstarch to thicken the mixture instead.

Why does my Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce taste slightly bitter?

This sometimes happens depending on the brand of chili powder used. To fix it, stir in a small amount of sugar or honey at the end of the simmering process to neutralize the acidity and round out the flavors.

A person holding a Mason jar filled with Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce between his thumb and fingers.

🇲🇽 More Classic Mexican Condiments and Sauces

Ready to make the best (and easiest) enchilada sauce on the block? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a spoon to hold up a spoonful of easy homemade red enchilada sauce from a jar filled with the same.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce

This Easy Homemade Red Enchilada Sauce is a 15-minute game-changer that far surpasses anything you'll find in a can. Rich, smoky, and perfectly balanced with a hint of cinnamon and savory tomato paste, it’s the ultimate flavorful topping for enchiladas, tacos, and all your favorite Mexican-inspired dishes.
Prep Time5 minutes
Cook Time10 minutes
Total Time15 minutes
Course: Sauce
Cuisine: Tex-Mex, Mexican
Servings: 8
Calories: 104kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large skillet or saucepan

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup avocado oil or vegetable oil
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 tablespoon tomato paste
  • ¼ cup chili powder
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 pinch ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 cups chicken broth or stock
  • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a large skillet (or medium saucepan) over medium heat. Add the flour and stir to combine. Cook, stirring often, for 1 minute.
    ¼ cup avocado oil, ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Stir in the tomato paste until combined. Cook for 1 to 2 minutes, stirring often.
    2 tablespoon tomato paste
  • Add the chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, cumin, oregano, cinnamon, and salt. Stir to combine and cook for 1 to 2 minutes.
    ¼ cup chili powder, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon onion powder, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon dried oregano, 1 pinch ground cinnamon, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Slowly whisk in the chicken broth. Stir until all lumps are gone. Bring to a boil and then reduce the heat to a simmer. Allow the sauce to simmer until slightly thickened, smooth, and silky, usually 4 to 6 minutes.
    2 cups chicken broth
  • Stir in the apple cider vinegar. Let cool and then transfer to a jar (or container) with a lid. Chill until ready to use.
    1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Storage: Store any leftover sauce in an airtight glass jar in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. For longer storage, freeze it in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months; thaw in the fridge before reheating.
  • Dietary Swaps: To make this recipe vegetarian or vegan, simply use vegetable broth. For a gluten-free version, replace the all-purpose flour with a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend.
  • Balance the Flavor: If your chili powder is particularly earthy or bitter, stir in ½ teaspoon of sugar or honey at the end to perfectly balance the acidity of the tomato paste and vinegar.
  • Consistency Check: The sauce will continue to thicken as it cools. If it becomes too thick for your preference, whisk in a tablespoon of broth or water at a time until you reach the desired consistency.
  • Yield: This recipe makes approximately 2 cups of sauce, which is the perfect amount for one standard 9×13 pan of enchiladas (about 10–12 tortillas).

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 517mg | Potassium: 206mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 2256IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

The Best Restaurant-Style White Queso (Blanco)

by Leave a Comment

Stop settling for clumpy, stringy cheese dips and learn how to make the ultimate Restaurant-Style White Queso (Blanco) right at home. This 15-minute recipe delivers that signature silky-smooth texture you crave from your favorite Mexican grill using one simple secret ingredient. It’s the perfect pourable white cheese dip for your next taco night or game day spread!

An overhead view of a cast-iron skillet filled with restaurant-style white queso (blanco) that has been garnished with pico de gallo, sliced jalapeños, and chopped cilantro.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🫕 The Ingredients

This recipe combines a perfectly meltable cheese base with a savory blend of pantry spices and tangy peppers, all finished with a trio of fresh, vibrant garnishes for that authentic Mexican grill presentation. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for white queso blanco on a grey wooden background including cube white American cheese, jalapeños, green chiles, jalapeño brine, milk, water, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • White American Cheese: For the best results, get this from the deli counter (ask for a 1lb block) rather than using pre-packaged singles. If you can’t find it, Velveeta Blanco is a functional substitute, though it will have a slightly different flavor profile.
  • Whole Milk & Water: The combination of milk and water creates a dip that is creamy but light enough to stay “pourable.” You can substitute the milk with half-and-half for an even richer dip, or use chicken broth instead of water for extra savory depth.
  • Diced Green Chiles: These provide a mild, smoky flavor without much heat. If you want more fire, you can substitute these with diced canned habaneros or extra jalapeños.
  • Pickled Jalapeños & Brine: The brine (the liquid in the jar) provides the essential acidity that cuts through the richness of the cheese. If you don’t have pickled jalapeños, you can use a squeeze of fresh lime juice, though you will lose that classic “nacho” tang.
  • Kosher Salt: Use ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt to enhance the savory flavors. Because American cheese is naturally salty, I recommend stirring the salt in at the very end after a quick taste test to ensure it’s perfectly balanced.
  • Spices (Cumin, Garlic, Cayenne): These provide the “Tex-Mex” backbone. If you prefer a very white, clean-looking dip, you can use white pepper instead of cayenne.
  • Garnishes: While the queso is delicious on its own, adding pico de gallo, fresh cilantro, and sliced fresh jalapeños right before serving adds a necessary crunch and brightness.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect White Queso

  • Low and Slow is Key: Never let your queso come to a boil. High heat can cause the cheese proteins to seize or the sauce to break, resulting in a grainy or oily texture. Keep the burner on its lowest setting and be patient while melting.
  • The “Deli Counter” Secret: Always buy your White American cheese in a block from the deli counter. Pre-shredded bagged cheeses are coated in potato starch or cellulose to prevent clumping in the bag, which will prevent your dip from reaching that perfectly smooth, “pourable” restaurant consistency.
  • Adjust for Cooling: Queso naturally thickens as it sits and cools. If you aren’t serving it in a heated dish, make the dip slightly thinner than you think it should be by adding an extra tablespoon of milk right before serving.
  • Don’t Skip the Brine: The pickled jalapeño juice is the “secret” ingredient. The acidity cuts through the richness of the cheese and provides that signature tang found in authentic Tex-Mex spots.
  • Use a Mini Slow Cooker: For parties, the best way to serve this is in a small 1.5-quart slow cooker on the “Warm” setting. This keeps the cheese at the perfect dipping temperature for hours without it hardening.
  • Garnish at the Last Second: Add your pico de gallo, fresh cilantro, and sliced jalapeños just before serving. If you stir them in too early, the cold vegetables will drop the temperature of the cheese, and the cilantro will wilt.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Restaurant-Style Queso Blanco

A person using a wooden spoon to stir cubed chunks of white American cheese, milk, and water over low heat in a black cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 1: Place the cubed cheese, milk, and water in a skillet over low heat.
A person using a wooden spoon to stir melting white American cheese with milk and water in a black cast-iron skillet over low heat.
  1. Step 2: Stir constantly, don’t let it come to a boil.
A person raising a wooden spoon form fully melted white American cheese combined with milk and water in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 3: Cook until all lumps are gone and the texture is smooth and silky.
A person pouring jalapeño brine from a small white bowl into a skillet that is filled with white queso and topped with chopped pickled jalapeños.
  1. Step 4: Add the green chiles, jalapeños, and brine.
A person dumping dried cumin and garlic powder from a small bowl into a cast-iron skillet that is filled with melty white queso.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the cumin, garlic powder, and salt.
A person garnishing white queso blanco that is in a black cast-iron skillet with pico de gallo and chopped fresh cilantro.
  1. Step 6: Garnish (if desired) and serve at once (see NOTES if not serving immediately).

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Classic Way: Serve in a warm ceramic bowl alongside a large basket of thin, salty corn tortilla chips. For an extra restaurant-quality touch, warm your chips in a 300°F oven for 5 minutes before serving.
  • The “Compuesto” Style: Turn your dip into a meal by adding a scoop of seasoned ground beef or spicy chorizo to the center of the bowl before adding your garnishes.
  • As a Gourmet Topping: Drizzle this silky sauce over steak fajitas, chicken enchiladas, or even a “Mexican-style” loaded baked potato for an instant upgrade.
  • Fresh Garnishes: Don’t forget the final touch! Top the bowl with a generous spoonful of pico de gallo, a sprinkle of chopped fresh cilantro, and a few sliced fresh jalapeños for a pop of color and heat.
  • Low-Carb Dippers: If you’re skipping the chips, this queso pairs beautifully with fresh vegetable dippers like sliced bell peppers, chilled cucumber rounds, or roasted cauliflower florets.
  • Keep it Warm: Because this is a real cheese sauce, it will firm up as it cools. For parties, serve it in a mini slow cooker or a fondue pot on the lowest setting to keep it perfectly meltable for hours.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this White Queso Blanco ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare the dip up to two days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator and reheat it gently on the stovetop over low heat, adding a splash of milk to restore its creamy texture.

Why did my White Queso Blanco turn out grainy or lumpy?

This usually happens if the heat was too high during the melting process or if you used pre-shredded bagged cheese. To keep the sauce silky, always use deli-sliced blocks and melt them slowly over the lowest possible setting.

Can I substitute other cheeses in this White Queso Blanco recipe?

While you can use Monterey Jack or Pepper Jack, they won’t have the same “extra melt” properties as the American variety. If you choose to swap ingredients, be aware that the consistency may become stringy or thick rather than pourable.

What is the best way to store and reheat leftover White Queso Blanco?

Keep any remaining sauce in a sealed container in the fridge for up to four days. When you’re ready for more, use 30-second intervals in the microwave, stirring well between each session and adding a teaspoon of water or cream if it needs thinning out.

A person holding a triangular corn tortilla chip that he just dipped into a skillet filled with white queso blanco.

🇲🇽 More Mexican / Tex-Mex Appetizer Recipes

Ready to make the best dip this side of San Antonio? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of restaurant-style white queso blanco in a cast-iron skillet that has been garnished with pico de gallo, sliced jalapeño peppers, and chopped cilantro.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Restaurant-Style White Queso (Blanco)

Ditch the clumpy, stringy dips for this perfectly silky, pourable White Queso (Blanco) that tastes exactly like your favorite Mexican restaurant. Made with deli-quality cheese, tangy green chiles, and a hint of jalapeño brine, this authentic 15-minute recipe is the ultimate crowd-pleaser for any party or taco night.
Prep Time5 minutes
Cook Time10 minutes
Total Time15 minutes
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: Mexican / TexMex
Servings: 8
Calories: 330kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 medium skillet 9 – 10 inches

Ingredients

  • 1 lb white American cheese cubed, see NOTES
  • ½ cup whole milk plus more, if needed
  • ¼ cup water
  • 4 oz green chiles chopped (1 small can, undrained)
  • 2 tablespoon pickled jalapeños finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon pickled jalapeño brine
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 pinch cayenne pepper optional

Garnishes

  • pico de gallo
  • 1 fresh jalapeño sliced
  • fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium saucepan (skillet), heat the cheese, milk, and water over very low heat. Stir frequently until the cheese has completely melted. Do not let it boil.
    1 lb white American cheese, ½ cup whole milk, ¼ cup water
  • Once silky and smooth, stir in the green chiles, chopped jalapeños, brine, cumin, garlic, and salt. Stir until fully combined.
    4 oz green chiles, 2 tablespoon pickled jalapeños, 1 tablespoon pickled jalapeño brine, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 pinch cayenne pepper
  • Serve at once, and if desired, garnish with pico de gallo, sliced jalapeños, and chopped cilantro. Serve with warm corn tortilla chips.
    pico de gallo, 1 fresh jalapeño, fresh cilantro

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Sourcing the Cheese: For the most authentic texture, head to the grocery store deli counter and ask for a 1 lb block of White American cheese. Avoid pre-wrapped singles or shredded bags, as they contain additives that prevent the dip from becoming perfectly smooth.
  • How to Cube: Cut the cheese block into uniform ½-inch cubes. Smaller, even pieces ensure the cheese melts quickly and consistently without the bottom of the pan scorching.
  • Adjusting Consistency: Queso will naturally thicken as it sits. If it becomes too thick for your liking, whisk in an additional tablespoon of warm milk or water until it reaches your desired “drizzle” consistency.
  • Salt to Taste: Since different brands of American cheese have varying salt levels, always taste the dip before adding the ½ teaspoon of Kosher salt. You may find you need slightly more or less, depending on the brand you use.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. Reheat gently on the stovetop over low heat or in the microwave in 30-second bursts, adding a splash of milk to loosen it back up

Nutrition

Calories: 330kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 241mg | Potassium: 32mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 74IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Authentic Greek Keftedes: Crispy Juicy Greek Meatballs

by Leave a Comment

Transport your kitchen to a sun-drenched Greek island with these authentic Keftedes, featuring a perfectly crispy golden-brown exterior and a melt-in-your-mouth juicy center. Infused with fresh mint and aromatic oregano, these traditional Greek meatballs are best served alongside a bowl of cool, creamy homemade tzatziki sauce for the ultimate Mediterranean feast.

Five Greek Meatballs resting on a bed of homemade tzatziki sauce surrounded by a cucumber salad, crumbled feta cheese, olives, red onion, and pita triangles all on a white dinner plate.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe pairs a rich blend of savory meats with vibrant Mediterranean herbs and a traditional moisture-locking binder to ensure every bite is bursting with authentic flavor and a perfectly tender texture. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Greek meatballs on a grey wooden background including ground beef, ground lamb, bread, milk, garlic, vinegar, grated onion, chopped herbs, egg, flour, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • The Meat Blend: A 2:1 ratio of ground beef to ground lamb offers the most authentic, rich flavor, but you can easily substitute the lamb with ground pork or use 100% lean ground beef if preferred.
  • The Bread Binder: Using stale white bread soaked in milk creates a “panade” that keeps the meatballs incredibly moist; for a gluten-free alternative, use your favorite GF bread or ½ cup of gluten-free breadcrumbs.
  • Fresh Herbs: While dried oregano provides the earthy base, the fresh mint and Italian parsley are essential for that signature Mediterranean brightness—don’t skip the mint, as it is the defining flavor of a true Keftede!
  • Red Wine Vinegar: This is a traditional “secret” ingredient that helps tenderize the meat fibers and balances the richness; if you don’t have it on hand, fresh lemon juice is a perfect 1:1 substitute.
  • The Flour Coating: Lightly dredging the meatballs in all-purpose flour before frying is what creates that stunning golden-brown crust; for an even crunchier, gluten-free option, you can use white rice flour or cornstarch.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Greek Meatballs

  • Chill the Mixture: For the best results, let the meat mixture rest in the refrigerator for at least 30–60 minutes before rolling. This allows the bread to fully hydrate and the flavors of the mint and garlic to deeply infuse the meat.
  • The “Tester” Patty: Before rolling the entire batch, fry a small, marble-sized piece of the mixture in a pan. Taste it to check the seasoning—this is your chance to add more salt, pepper, or herbs before the whole batch is cooked!
  • Wet Your Hands: To prevent the meat from sticking to your palms while shaping, keep a small bowl of water or olive oil nearby and lightly dampen your hands between rolling every few meatballs.
  • Don’t Overcrowd the Pan: Fry the meatballs in batches. If you put too many in the skillet at once, the oil temperature will drop, causing the meatballs to “steam” and become mushy rather than developing that iconic crispy, golden crust.
  • Check the Oil Temp: Your oil should be shimmering but not smoking (around 350°F/175°C). If you don’t have a thermometer, dip the end of a wooden spoon into the oil; if it bubbles steadily around the wood, you’re ready to fry.
  • Uniform Sizing: Use a small cookie scoop or a tablespoon to portion out the meat. This ensures they all cook at the same rate and look stunning and consistent when served on a platter.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Authentic Keftedes (Greek Meatballs)

A person pouring whole milk from a small white bowl into a glass bowl filled with pieces of torn white bread.
  1. Step 1: Pour the milk over the bread pieces in a small bowl. Let it absorb the milk, and then squeeze it with your hands.
A person holding a small glass bowl filled with chopped herbs in one hand and the other hand holding a small bowl of spices both over a glass bowl filled with the ingredients for Greek meatballs.
  1. Step 2: Place the soaked bread in a large bowl, and add the ground beef, lamb, grated onion, garlic, egg, olive oil, vinegar, herbs, and spices.
A person using his hands to combine the ingredients for Greek meatballs in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 3: Press into patties
A person rolling uncooked Greek meatballs in flour on a large oval platter.
  1. Step 4: Form the meatballs into the size of golf balls and then roll them in the flour on a platter or plate.
  1. Step 5: Working in batches, fry the balls in hot oil (350°F) until dark brown and crispy, about 7 minutes.
A person using a metal slotted spoon to place fried Greek meatballs from a skillet filled with hot oil onto a paper towel-line plate being held above the skillet.
  1. Step 6: Drain on paper towels. Fry the remaining meatballs and serve them at once.

Expert Tip: The Secret to the Perfect Sear

For a professional-grade crust, ensure your oil is shimmering but not smoking before adding the meatballs, and resist the urge to move or flip them for the first two minutes. 

Allowing that initial sear to develop undisturbed creates a “natural release” barrier and a deep Maillard reaction; this ensures your Keftedes release easily from the pan with a perfectly even, golden-brown exterior while locking in all the juices inside.

🍽️ How to Serve Greek Meatballs

  • The Classic Mezze Platter: Arrange the warm meatballs on a large platter surrounded by bowls of creamy homemade tzatziki, kalamata olives, chunks of feta cheese, and sliced cucumbers for a traditional Greek appetizer spread.
  • Warm Pita Wraps: Stuff 3–4 meatballs into a charred, fluffy pita pocket with sliced red onions, juicy tomatoes, and a generous dollop of tzatziki for a satisfying Mediterranean lunch.
  • The Full Greek Dinner: Serve them as a main course alongside a side of Sheet Pan Greek Chicken or a buttery rice pilaf to soak up all the savory flavors.
  • Fresh Cucumber/Tomato Salad: Pair the hot Keftedes with a crisp, traditional Greek salad (no lettuce!) made of tomatoes, cucumbers, and red onion tossed in extra virgin olive oil and red wine vinegar.
  • Always Add Citrus: No matter how you serve them, always provide fresh lemon wedges on the side; a bright squeeze of citrus right before eating cuts through the richness of the meat and makes the herbs pop.
  • Garnish for the “Wow” Factor: Sprinkle the platter with a pinch of flaky sea salt, a dusting of dried oregano, and a handful of freshly chopped Italian parsley.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I bake this Greek Meatballs Recipe instead of frying it?

Yes, you can cook them in the oven at 400°F (200°C) for about 15–20 minutes. While they won’t have the same signature crunch as the pan-fried version, they will still be delicious and tender.

What is the best type of meat to use for a Greek Meatballs Recipe?

A combination of beef and lamb is most traditional, providing a rich and savory profile. However, using just ground beef or a mix of beef and pork works exceptionally well for a milder flavor.

Can I prepare this Greek Meatballs Recipe in advance?

Absolutely, you can mix the ingredients and shape the rounds up to 24 hours before you plan to cook them. Simply keep them covered in the refrigerator until you are ready to sear them.

How do I store leftovers from this Greek Meatballs Recipe?

Place any remaining pieces in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to three days. To maintain the crispy texture, reheat them in a skillet or an air fryer rather than the microwave.

Is there a gluten-free version of this Greek Meatballs Recipe?

You can easily adapt this dish by using gluten-free bread or certified GF breadcrumbs as the binder. Additionally, use a gluten-free flour blend or cornstarch for the light coating before frying.

A person using a small spoon to drizzle homemade tzatziki sauce over a split open Greek meatball resting on a pita triangle along with cucumber salad.

🇬🇷 More Classic Greek Recipes

Ready to make the best meatballs this side of Athens? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of five Greek Meatballs resting on a bed of homemade tzatziki sauce surrounded by a cucumber salad, crumbled feta cheese, olives, red onion, and pita triangles.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Authentic Keftedes (Greek Meatballs)

Experience the ultimate Mediterranean comfort food with these traditional Keftedes. These Greek meatballs are perfectly seasoned with fresh herbs and pan-fried to golden-brown perfection, resulting in a crispy exterior and an incredibly juicy center. Serve them with cool tzatziki and fresh lemon for a restaurant-quality meal right at home.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Chill time1 hour
Total Time1 hour 30 minutes
Course: Appetizer / Entree
Cuisine: Greek
Servings: 8
Calories: 310kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large (12") sturdy skillet or pan for frying

Ingredients

  • 2 slices white bread crusts removed and torn into pieces, let sit out for 30 minutes (or longer)
  • ¼ cup whole milk
  • 1 lb ground beef 92% lean
  • ½ lb ground lamb see NOTES
  • 1 red onion grated, about ½ cup, see NOTES
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 large egg
  • ½ cup Italian parsley chopped, plus extra for garnish
  • 2 tablespoon fresh mint chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • Vegetable oil for frying
  • lemon wedges for garnish
  • coarse sea salt for serving
  • tzatziki sauce for serving

Instructions

  • Place the bread in a bowl and pour the milk over it. Toss the bread in the milk. Allow the bread to absorb the milk for about 5 minutes. Use your fingers to press and squeeze the bread. Place it in a large bowl.
    2 slices white bread, ¼ cup whole milk
  • To the soaked bread, add the beef, lamb, grated onion, garlic, egg, parsley, mint, oregano, cumin, vinegar, oil, salt, and pepper. Use your hands to mix everything until evenly combined. Cover with plastic wrap and chill for at least 1 hour.
    1 lb ground beef, ½ lb ground lamb, 1 red onion, 3 cloves garlic, 1 large egg, ½ cup Italian parsley, 2 tablespoon fresh mint, 1 teaspoon dried oregano, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar, 1 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil, 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Roll the mixture into golf ball-sized balls (about 1½-inch thick). You should have about 20 meatballs.
  • Spread the flour on a platter or plate. Roll the meatballs in the flour, shaking off excess.
    ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • Add the oil to your skillet about halfway up (don't overfill it!). Heat the oil until shimmering (about 350°F).
    Vegetable oil
  • Working in batches, carefully add the meatballs to the hot oil. Don't overcrowd the pan. Fry for about 7 minutes, stirring occasionally, until they are dark brown and crispy on the outside. Place on a plate lined with paper towels. Repeat with the remaining meatballs.
  • Serve at once with lemon wedges, and garnish with chopped parsley and sprinkled with coarse sea salt. If desired, have plenty of tzatziki sauce on the side. See NOTES for serving suggestions.
    lemon wedges, coarse sea salt, tzatziki sauce

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Meat Blend: Using a mix of ground beef and lamb provides the most authentic Greek flavor profile. If you prefer a milder taste or cannot find lamb, you can substitute it with more ground beef or ground pork.
  • Grate the Onion: Use the large holes of a box grater for the red onion. It is essential to include all the juices that collect while grating, as this liquid acts as a natural tenderizer and keeps the meatballs incredibly moist.
  • Frying Technique: Use just enough oil to reach halfway up the sides of the meatballs (shallow frying) rather than deep frying. Always cook in batches to avoid overcrowding the pan; if the pan is too full, the temperature will drop, and the meatballs will steam instead of getting that signature crispy crust.
  • Serving Suggestions: For the best experience, serve these hot with a side of creamy homemade tzatziki, fresh lemon wedges, and warm pita bread. They also pair beautifully with a traditional Greek salad (chopped cucumber, tomatoes, red onion, Italian parsley, red wine vinegar, olive oil, and a pinch of salt and pepper). 

Nutrition

Calories: 310kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 536mg | Potassium: 313mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 420IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 59mg | Iron: 3mg

The Best Split Pea Soup with Ham Bone

by Leave a Comment

Transform your leftover holiday ham bone into a velvety, protein-packed masterpiece with this smoky split pea soup recipe. Featuring a double-dose of ham and vibrant, tender carrots, it’s a “stick-to-your-ribs” comfort food that tastes even better the next day.

Two white soup bowls filled with split pea soup with ham bone on small plates also holding a slice of toasted bread and a soup spoon.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍖 The Ingredients

This recipe balances a savory aromatic base with deep smoky spices and a bright acidic finish to transform humble pantry staples and holiday leftovers into a rich, multi-layered masterpiece. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for split pea soup with ham bone on grey wooden background including split peas, celery, carrots, onion, chicken stock, cubed ham, a ham bone, garlic, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Green Split Peas: Use standard dried green split peas for that classic color and texture. Unlike other dried legumes, split peas do not require soaking; just a quick rinse and sort to remove any small pebbles is all you need.
  • The Ham Bone: This is the “flavor engine” of the soup. If you don’t have a leftover holiday bone, you can easily substitute it with two smoked ham hocks from your local butcher to achieve that same deep, collagen-rich broth.
  • Cubed Ham: Using leftover ham is ideal, but if you’re starting from scratch, a thick-cut ham steak works perfectly. Searing the cubes before adding them to the soup is the “pro secret” for better texture and visual appeal.
  • Chicken Stock: For the best results, use a high-quality chicken bone broth or low-sodium stock. Since ham is naturally salty, using low-sodium liquid allows you to control the final seasoning more accurately.
  • Sherry Vinegar: This is the “secret” ingredient that brightens the entire dish. If you don’t have Sherry vinegar on hand, fresh lemon juice or apple cider vinegar are excellent substitutes that provide that necessary acidic “pop.”
  • Smoked Paprika: Make sure your paprika is labeled “Smoked” (Pimentón). Regular sweet paprika will provide color, but it won’t give the soup that signature wood-fired flavor that makes this recipe stand out.
  • The Aromatics (Mirepoix): The combination of onion, celery, and carrots creates the flavor foundation. If you’re short on time, many grocery stores sell pre-diced “mirepoix” mixes in the produce section.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Homemade Split Pea Soup

  • Don’t Salt Too Early: Ham bones and cubed ham are naturally very salty. Wait until the very end of the cooking process—after the ham has been added back in—to taste the soup and add extra salt. You’ll often find that the ham has provided all the salt you need!
  • The “Acid Splash” is Non-Negotiable: Split peas are earthy and heavy. Adding a splash of Sherry vinegar or lemon juice at the end acts as a “flavor highlighter,” cutting through the richness and making the smoky notes truly pop.
  • Manage the “Pea Pudding” Effect: This soup thickens significantly as it sits and will turn into a thick “pudding” in the refrigerator. When reheating, simply stir in a splash of water or broth to bring it back to your desired silky consistency.
  • Sauté for Depth: Don’t skip browning the ham cubes! The “fond” (those little brown bits) left on the bottom of the pot after searing the ham creates a layer of “umami” flavor that you simply can’t get by just boiling the meat.
  • The Low and Slow Simmer: If your peas aren’t softening, check your heat. A gentle simmer is better than a rolling boil, which can sometimes cause the outside of the pea to turn to mush while the inside stays gritty.
  • Freshness Matters: Check the “best by” date on your dried peas. While they last a long time, very old dried peas can take much longer to soften and may never reach that perfectly creamy consistency.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Split Pea Soup with Ham Bone

A person using a large wooden spatula to stir chunks of crispy ham that are being cooked in a large pot with hot oil.
  1. Step 1: Heat the oil in a large pot over medium heat. Add the ham and cook until crispy and lightly browned. Remove the ham from the pot and set it aside.
A person using a large spatula to stir chopped onions, carrots, and celery that are being sautéed in a large stock pot on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add the onion, carrots, and celery and sauté until soft and translucent, about 4 – 5 minutes. Add the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds.
A person transferring split peas from a bowl into a pot filled with a simmering broth and large ham bone on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Add the stock, seasonings, bay leaves, ham bone, and split peas. Bring to a boil. Lower the heat and simmer for 60 minutes.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the crispy ham chunks.
  1. Step 5: Remove the ham bone and shred any remaining meat on it, and add it back to the soup along with the ham bone. Simmer for another 20 minutes.
  1. Step 6: Remove the bay leaves and ham bone. Stir in the vinegar and serve at once.

🥣 How to Serve

  • The Creamy Swirl: To balance the smoky saltiness, add a dollop of Greek yogurt, sour cream, or a tiny drizzle of heavy cream. Use a toothpick to swirl it into the green soup for a visually stunning contrast.
  • The Perfect Bread Pairing: This thick soup begs for a “dipper.” Serve it alongside warm, homemade rye bread with butter, or a piece of honey-sweetened cornbread to complement the smoky ham.
  • Add Some Crunch: If you love texture, top your bowl with homemade buttery croutons or even crispy fried onions. The crunch provides a fantastic counterpoint to the velvety, smooth texture of the peas.
  • The Refreshing Side: Because this soup is incredibly rich and hearty, it pairs beautifully with a leafy, green side salad with a bright vinaigrette.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Do I need to soak the peas before making split pea soup with ham bone?

No, unlike many other dried legumes, these small pulses are tender enough to break down completely during the simmering process without any prior preparation.

Why is my split pea soup with ham bone so thick?

This happens because the legumes release a high amount of natural starch as they disintegrate, creating a hearty, porridge-like consistency. If you prefer a thinner texture, simply stir in a little extra broth or water until you reach your desired results.

Can I use ham hocks if I don’t have a leftover ham bone for split pea soup with ham bone?

Absolutely! Two smoked hocks will provide the same deep, smoky essence and rich collagen that a traditional holiday carcass offers.

Can you freeze split pea soup with ham bone?

Yes, this dish holds up beautifully in the freezer for up to three months. 

How much meat should be left on the carcass for split pea soup with ham bone?

While a “meaty” frame is ideal for adding texture, even a relatively clean one will provide incredible depth of flavor from the marrow and connective tissue. 

An overhead view of a large circular pot filled with homemade split pea soup with a mound of crispy ham in the center of the soup.

🍲 More Classic Soup Recipes

Ready to make the best soup in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a soup bowl filled with split pea soup with ham bone garnished with chopped Italian parsley and chunks of crispy ham.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

The Best Split Pea Soup with Ham Bone

This smoky, velvety split pea soup is the ultimate way to transform a leftover ham bone into a gourmet meal. Featuring seared ham cubes for extra texture and a splash of sherry vinegar for brightness, this hearty "stick-to-your-ribs" classic is as visually stunning as it is delicious.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 45 minutes
Total Time2 hours
Course: Appetizer or Soup
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 417kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large soup pot

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 cups ham cubed
  • 1 cup onions chopped
  • 1 cup carrots chopped
  • 1 cup celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 8 cups chicken stock or broth, see NOTES
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 lb split peas
  • 1 ham bone
  • 1 tablespoon Sherry vinegar or lemon juice
  • 2 tbps Italian parsley chopped, for garnish, optional

Instructions

  • Heat the oil over medium heat in a large pot. Add the ham and cook, stirring often, until crispy and lightly browned. Use a slotted spoon to remove the pan from the skillet to a plate or platter. Set aside.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 2 cups ham
  • Add the onions, carrots, and celery. Sauté until soft and translucent, about 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and sauté for an additional 30 seconds to 1 minute.
    1 cup onions, 1 cup carrots, 1 cup celery, 3 cloves garlic
  • Add the broth (see NOTES), bay leaves, paprika, thyme, salt, pepper, split peas, and ham bone. Bring to a boil, then lower the heat and partially cover. Simmer for 60 minutes.
    8 cups chicken stock, 2 bay leaves, 1 teaspoon smoked paprika, 1 teaspoon dried thyme, 1¼ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper, 1 lb split peas, 1 ham bone
  • Carefully remove the ham bone and cut away any meat that is attached to the bone. Shred (or chop) it and return the meat, along with the bone, back to the soup. Simmer uncovered for an additional 30 minutes.
  • Stir in the Sherry vinegar (or lemon juice). Taste and add more salt, if necessary (see NOTES). Serve at once, garnish with chopped Italian parsley (if desired).
    1 tablespoon Sherry vinegar, 2 tbps Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Customizing Consistency: For a very thick, “stick-to-your-ribs” soup, use 6 to 7 cups of broth. If you prefer a slightly thinner, more traditional “soupy” texture, increase the liquid to 8 cups. Keep in mind that the soup will continue to thicken significantly as it cools and sits.
  • A Note on Salt: Ham bones and seared ham cubes vary greatly in saltiness. To prevent the dish from becoming overly salty, avoid adding any supplemental salt until the very end of the cooking process. Always taste the finished soup first, then season with salt only if necessary.
  • Reheating Tip: Leftovers will likely firm up into a thick “pudding” once refrigerated. When reheating on the stovetop or in the microwave, simply stir in a splash of water or chicken broth to loosen the texture and restore its original velvety creaminess.

Nutrition

Calories: 417kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 28g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 1155mg | Potassium: 1058mg | Fiber: 16g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 3264IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 4mg

Cast-Iron Skillet Ratatouille (Easy Confit Byaldi)

by 2 Comments

Elevate your seasonal cooking with this stunning Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille, where simple garden vegetables are transformed into a vibrant, edible masterpiece. By spiraling thinly sliced zucchini, eggplant, and tomatoes over a savory herb-infused sauce, you create a rustic yet elegant dish that is as flavorful as it is beautiful. This recipe perfectly balances the earthy depth of the vegetables with the heat-retaining power of cast iron for a tender, caramelized finish.

An overhead view of a cast-iron skillet ratatouille with two glasses of white wine sitting nearby as well as a light blue napkin.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍆 The Ingredients

A harmonious blend of garden-fresh produce and fragrant aromatics simmers together to create a rich, savory foundation for this elegant and colorful meal. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for cast-iron skillet ratatouille on a grey wooden background including zucchini, yellow squash, tomatoes, chopped onion, Chinese eggplant, red bell pepper, crush tomatoes, herbs, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Eggplant: For the best visual results, look for slender Japanese or Chinese eggplants, as their diameter closely matches that of zucchini and Roma tomatoes.
  • Roma Tomatoes: These are the ideal choice because they are firm and hold their shape well during baking; if you use a different variety, try to find “on-the-vine” tomatoes that aren’t too large.
  • Yellow Squash: While it tastes very similar to zucchini, it provides a beautiful color contrast; if you can’t find it, you can simply use extra green zucchini.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh thyme and basil offer the most vibrant, aromatic flavor, but you can substitute with one-third the amount of dried herbs if fresh ones aren’t available.
  • Red Bell Pepper: If you are short on time, you can substitute the fresh sautéed pepper with finely chopped jarred roasted red peppers for a smoky depth.
  • Crushed Tomatoes: For a silkier sauce base, you can use tomato purée (passata) in place of crushed tomatoes.
  • Olive Oil: Since this is a vegetable-forward dish, using a high-quality extra virgin olive oil will significantly enhance the final flavor.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Ratatouille

  • Know Your Tools: While a mandoline is perfect for getting paper-thin slices of firm squash, it can often snag on tomato skins or eggplant. Don’t hesitate to switch to a sharp knife for the softer produce to keep your slices intact and beautiful.
  • Match Your Diameters: When shopping, try to “size up” your vegetables. Hold a zucchini next to an eggplant and a Roma tomato to ensure they are roughly the same width so the layers stack neatly without some pieces disappearing.
  • The Parchment Paper Trick: Don’t skip the parchment paper “lid” (cartouche). It traps enough steam to cook the vegetables until they are tender while preventing the delicate edges from burning before the centers are done.
  • Control the Moisture: If your tomatoes are very juicy, pat the slices with a paper towel before arranging them in the skillet. This prevents the sauce from becoming too watery during the roasting process.
  • Let it Rest: Resist the urge to serve it the moment it comes out of the oven. Letting the dish sit for 10 to 15 minutes allows the sauce to thicken and the flavors to meld, making it much easier to serve clean, beautiful portions.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Cast-Iron Skillet Ratatouille

A close-up view of chopped red bell pepper and onion being sautéed in a cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Heat the olive oil over medium heat and sauté the onions and bell pepper until soft, about 4 to 5 minutes.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir simmering crushed tomatoes along with sautéed onions and red bell pepper in a cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add the garlic and sauté for 30 seconds. Stir in the crushed tomatoes and herbs and simmer for 5 minutes, stirring often.
A person placing a stack of vegetables including sliced tomatoes, yellow squash, zucchini, and eggplant on their sides in a cast-iron skillet that has a layer of sautéed tomatoes, onions, and red bell pepper in the bottom of the pan.
  1. Step 3: Pick up a slice of each vegetable in a sequence and stack them in your hand. Place them on their side (standing upright) in the pan.
A person placing a small stack of sliced vegetables on their side in the middle of an uncooked cast-iron skillet ratatouille.
  1. Step 4: Continue following the curve of the pan until the circle is complete. Repeat with a circle of veggies on the inside. Finish with a few slices in the very center.
A person using a spoon to drizzle herbed oil over the top of an uncooked cast-iron skillet ratatouille.
  1. Step 5: Mix the olive oil, thyme leaves, garlic, salt, and pepper in a small bowl. Drizzle over the top of the ratatouille.
A person placing a circular piece of parchment paper over the top of an uncooked cast-iron skillet ratatouille.
  1. Step 6: Cut a piece of parchment paper into a circle the size of your skillet and lay it directly on top of the vegetables.
A person removing a circular piece of parchment paper from a cast-iron skillet ratatouille that is being baked in an oven.
  1. Step 7: Bake for 40 minutes at 375°F. Remove the parchment and bake for another 15 to 20 minutes.
A person placing a sprig of fresh basil leaves in the top center of a freshly baked cast-iron skillet ratatouille.
  1. Step 8: Remove from the oven and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Garnish with fresh basil leaves.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Family-Style Presentation: Bring the cast-iron skillet directly to the table (on a heat-proof trivet) to let everyone admire the beautiful vegetable spiral before digging in.
  • With Crusty Bread: Serve with a warm, sliced baguette or toasted sourdough. It is essential for mopping up the rich tomato-pepper sauce at the bottom of the pan.
  • Over a Bed of Grains: For a more filling meal, spoon the vegetables and sauce over creamy polenta, fluffy couscous, or a bed of buttery rice.
  • As an Elegant Side: This dish pairs beautifully with grilled chicken, roasted lamb shoulder, or steamed cod in parchment paper.
  • The Vegetarian Main: Make it the star of the show by serving a large portion topped with a dollop of fresh ricotta, crumbled goat cheese, or even a perfectly poached egg.
  • Fresh Finishing Touches: Just before serving, add a final garnish of fresh torn basil leaves and a drizzle of high-quality balsamic glaze or extra virgin olive oil to brighten the flavors.
  • Plating Tip: To keep the “shingled” look on the plate, use a wide spatula to carefully lift a section of the spiral, keeping the vegetables upright as you transfer them.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I prepare Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille in advance?

Absolutely! You can assemble the entire dish a day early and keep it covered in the refrigerator. When you are ready to eat, simply bake it according to the instructions, though you may need to add a few extra minutes to the cooking time since it will be starting from a cold temperature.

What is the best way to store leftovers of my Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille?

Place any remaining portions in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to four days. The flavors actually deepen and improve over time, making it a fantastic option for lunch the next day.

Is this Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille recipe vegan and gluten-free?

Yes, as written, this dish is naturally plant-based and contains no wheat products.

Can I use a different pan if I don’t have the tools for Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille?

While heavy metal cookware provides excellent heat distribution and a beautiful rustic look, you can certainly use a round ceramic or glass baking dish.

A slanted row of thinly sliced vegetables from a cast-iron skillet ratatouille resting on a thin bed of sautéed tomatoes and red bell pepper all on a white dinner plate.

🥒 More Amazing Vegetable-Focused Recipes

Ready to make the best veggie dish this side of Paris? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a serving of cast-iron skillet ratatouille with concentric layers of evenly slice eggplant, zucchini, squash, and tomatoes.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Cast-Iron Skillet Ratatouille

This elegant Cast Iron Skillet Ratatouille features a vibrant spiral of seasonal vegetables layered over a rich, savory tomato and pepper sauce. Slow-roasted to perfection, it’s a stunning, veggie-forward dish that’s as flavorful as it is beautiful.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 15 minutes
Resting time10 minutes
Total Time1 hour 40 minutes
Course: Side or Main
Cuisine: French
Servings: 4
Calories: 234kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 9-10-inch cast-iron skillet
  • mandolin see NOTES
  • Parchment paper

Ingredients

For the Sauce Base (Piperade)

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 15 oz can crushed tomatoes or tomato purée
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh basil chopped
  • salt and pepper

For the Vegetable Spiral

  • 2 zucchini sliced into ⅛-inch rounds
  • 2 yellow squash sliced into ⅛-inch rounds
  • 1 Chinese eggplant or Japanese, sliced into ⅛-inch rounds
  • 8 Roma tomatoes sliced into ⅛-inch rounds

For the Herb Drizzle and Finishing the Dish

  • 3 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme chopped
  • salt and pepper
  • 1 tablespoon basil fresh, chopped, for garnish
  • coarse sea salt for finishing

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 375°F.

Prepare the Base

  • Heat the olive oil in your cast-iron skillet over medium heat. Add the onion and red bell pepper and sauté until soft and translucent, about 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds to 1 minute.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 1 medium onion, 1 red bell pepper, 3 cloves garlic
  • Stir in the tomatoes, thyme, basil, and a healthy pinch of salt and pepper. Simmer, stirring often, for 5 minutes. Turn off the heat and use a spatula to spread the mixture evenly in the bottom of the pan.
    1 15 oz can crushed tomatoes, 1 tablespoon fresh thyme, 1 tablespoon fresh basil, salt and pepper

Arrange the Spiral

  • Pick up a slice of each vegetable in a sequence (ie, zucchini, squash, eggplant, tomato) and stack them in your hand. Start at the outer edge of your skillet and lay the stack against the edge, standing them upright but slightly leaning.
    2 zucchini, 2 yellow squash, 1 Chinese eggplant, 8 Roma tomatoes
  • Continue following the curve of the pan until you have completed the outer circle. Create another circle inside the outer circle. Finish with a stack of a few of the veggies in the very center, filling the gap.

Season, Bake, and Serve

  • In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil (3 tbsp), thyme, garlic, and a healthy pinch of salt and pepper. Drizzle this mixture evenly over the top of the ingredients.
    3 tablespoon olive oil, 1 teaspoon fresh thyme, salt and pepper
  • Cut a piece of parchment paper into a circle the size of your skillet and lay it directly on top of the vegetables.
  • Place the skillet in the oven and bake for 40 minutes. Remove the parchment paper and bake for another 15 to 20 minutes. The veggies should be very tender, and the sauce should be bubbling.
  • Remove the skillet from the oven and let it rest for 5 – 10 minutes. Garnish with chopped basil (or basil leaves) and a sprinkling of coarse sea salt.
    1 tablespoon basil, coarse sea salt

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Mandoline vs. Knife: Use a mandoline to get perfectly uniform slices of the firm zucchini and yellow squash. However, for the softer skins of the Roma tomatoes and the spongy texture of the eggplant, a very sharp chef’s knife and a steady hand will provide much cleaner results and prevent crushing.
  • Vegetable Sizing: For a professional-looking spiral, try to select vegetables that are roughly the same diameter so they stack neatly in the skillet.
  • The “Cartouche”: Don’t skip the parchment paper circle! It acts as a lid that allows the vegetables to steam and become tender while preventing the delicate edges from browning too quickly.
  • Make Ahead: You can assemble the sauce and slice the vegetables a few hours in advance. For the best texture, wait to arrange the spiral and bake until you are nearly ready to serve.
  • Leftovers: This dish reheats beautifully in the oven or microwave and is often considered even more flavorful the next day once the aromatics have fully melded.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 234kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 20mg | Potassium: 936mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 2517IU | Vitamin C: 96mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 2mg

The Best Caramelized Brioche French Toast

by 2 Comments

Transform your weekend brunch with this stunning Caramelized Brioche French Toast, featuring a perfectly crispy brûlée crust and a melt-in-your-mouth custard center. Topped with a billowy cloud of vanilla bean mascarpone and vibrant macerated berries, this recipe is as visually impressive as it is delicious. It’s the ultimate sweet breakfast for bringing the luxury of a high-end cafe right to your own kitchen table.

A small white pitcher being used to drizzle warm maple syrup over the top of a plate filled with a serving of caramelized brioche French toast.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍞 The Ingredients

This recipe elevates simple pantry staples and fresh, seasonal produce into a decadent masterpiece by layering rich, velvety textures with warm aromatics and a bright, citrus-kissed finish. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Caramelized Brioche French Toast on a grey wooden background including sliced Brioche, eggs, milk, cream, mascarpone, lemon juice, assorted fruits, sugar, and spices.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Brioche Loaf: For the best results, use a high-quality, thick-cut brioche or Challah; if these aren’t available, any thick-cut, enriched white bread will work, provided it is slightly stale to better absorb the custard.
  • Vanilla Bean Paste: This provides those beautiful gourmet black flecks and a deep flavor, but you can substitute it with an equal amount of high-quality pure vanilla extract.
  • Mascarpone Cheese: If you can’t find mascarpone, you can swap it for softened cream cheese whipped with a splash of heavy cream for a similarly rich, tangy topping.
  • Superfine Sugar: Also known as caster sugar, this is ideal for the “brûlée” crust because the smaller crystals melt quickly and evenly, though regular granulated sugar is a perfectly fine substitute.
  • Heavy Cream: Using heavy cream in the custard is the secret to a rich, “bread pudding” interior, but you can use half-and-half if you prefer a slightly lighter breakfast.
  • Fresh Berries: While the recipe calls for a mix of four berries, feel free to use whatever is in season, such as sliced peaches in the summer or sautéed apples in the fall.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect French Toast

  • Dry Out Your Bread: If your brioche is very fresh, place the slices on a wire rack for about 30 minutes (or in a 300°F oven for 5 minutes) before dipping. Slightly dry bread acts like a sponge, soaking up the custard without becoming structurally weak or “mushy.”
  • Don’t Rush the Soak: Because brioche is dense and thick-cut, it needs about 45–60 seconds per side in the custard. You want the liquid to penetrate the center so the final result has a creamy, bread-pudding-like texture rather than a dry middle.
  • Master the Heat: Cook your French toast over medium-low heat. If the pan is too hot, the outside will burn before the custard in the center has a chance to set. Patience is the key to that perfect golden-brown edge.
  • The “Brûlée” Secret: For the ultimate crunch, sprinkle the sugar onto the cooked side of the bread while it is still in the pan, then flip it for just 30–60 seconds. This creates a glass-like caramelized crust that shatters when you hit it with a fork.
  • Keep the Mascarpone Cold: To achieve that creamy “cloud” consistency, ensure your mascarpone and heavy cream are ice-cold before whipping. Stop the mixer the moment the cream holds its shape; over-whipping can cause the mascarpone to become grainy.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Caramelized Brioche French Toast

A person using an electric hand mixer to whip mascarpone cheese and heavy cream into soft peaks in a metal bowl.
  1. Step 1: Place the cold mascarpone, heavy cream, and powdered sugar in a chilled bowl. Beat with an electric hand mixer until soft peaks just begin to form. Keep chilled.
A person using a whisk to mix an egg and cinnamon custard in a glass bowl for caramelized brioche French toast.
  1. Step 2: In a large bowl, whisk the eggs, milk, cream, sugar, vanilla, cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt together.
A person holding a large glass bowl that is filled with a French toast custard with two thick slices of brioche bread submerged in the liquid.
  1. Step 3: Submerge the slices of bread into the custard for about 45 to 60 seconds per side.
Two custard-soaked slices of brioche being lightly fried in a large black non-stick skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 4: Heat the butter in a large non-stick skillet over medium heat. Carefully transfer the soaked bread slices to the skillet and cook until browned on one side.
A person sprinkling superfine sugar over the surface of brioche French toast that are being lightly fried in a non-stick skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 5: Flip the bread over and liberally sprinkle the superfine sugar over the tops of the bread. Flip and let cook (and caramelize) for another minute. Repeat with the remaining slices.
A person holding a small bowl of blackberries in one hand and a small bowl of raspberries with his other hand both over a large bowl filled with macerated strawberries and blueberries.
  1. Step 6: Toss the berries with the macerated strawberries and blueberries in a large glass bowl.
A person using a spoon to drizzle a mascarpone cream sauce over the top of two pieces of caramelized brioche French toast that are stacked on a white dinner plate.
  1. Step 7: Plate two slices and drizzle the mascarpone sauce over the top.
A person using a fine-mesh sieve to dust powdered sugar over the top of plate filled with caramelized brioche French toast topped with macerated berries and strawberries.
  1. Step 8: Top with the berries and a dusting of powdered sugar. Serve with warm maple syrup and a sprig of fresh mint.

Expert Tip: Mastering the Brûlée Crust

To achieve that signature “glass-like” crunch without burning the sugar, ensure your pan is set to medium-low heat and use superfine sugar for a faster, more even melt. The secret is to flip the sugared side back onto the pan for only 30–60 seconds—just long enough for the sugar to liquefy and turn a deep amber—then immediately remove it from the heat, as the caramel will continue to harden into a crisp, shatter-perfect shell as it cools.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Create a Tower: For a professional restaurant presentation, stack two thick slices of the caramelized brioche slightly offset from one another to create height and visual interest on the plate.
  • Layer the Textures: Place a generous dollop of the chilled vanilla bean mascarpone “cloud” directly in the center, then spoon the macerated berries over the top, allowing the vibrant red juices to swirl into the white cream.
  • The Final Drizzle: Serve with a small pitcher of warm, high-quality maple syrup on the side, or drizzle it slowly over the berries just before serving to add a glossy, irresistible finish.
  • Garnish for Contrast: Finish the plate with a light dusting of powdered sugar and a fresh sprig of mint to provide a bright pop of green against the deep reds and golden-brown tones of the toast.
  • Balance the Flavors: To cut through the richness of the sweet brioche, serve this dish alongside a side of crispy maple-pepper bacon or savory breakfast sausage for the ultimate “sweet and salty” brunch experience.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best bread to use for Caramelized Brioche French Toast? 

An enriched, buttery loaf like Brioche, Challah, or a thick-cut artisanal white bread works best because it can absorb the rich custard without falling apart during the cooking process.

Can I prepare Caramelized Brioche French Toast ahead of time?

You can whisk the egg mixture and whip the mascarpone topping the night before, but for the best texture, the bread should be dipped and seared just before serving to maintain that signature crispy exterior.

Why is my Caramelized Brioche French Toast soggy in the middle?

This usually happens if the heat is too high or the slices are too fresh; try using day-old bread and cooking over medium-low heat to ensure the center sets completely while the outside turns golden brown.

Do I need a kitchen torch for Caramelized Brioche French Toast?

No specialized equipment is required! You can achieve a beautiful, crunchy sugar crust simply by flipping the sugared side of the bread back onto a hot, buttered skillet for a few seconds.

How do I store leftovers of this Caramelized Brioche French Toast?

Place any extra slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to two days, then reheat them in a pan or toaster oven to restore the crunch of the sugar coating.

A large white dinner plate filled with two caramelized brioche French toast slices that are topped with a mascarpone cream sauce and macerated berries.

☀️ More Amazing Sweet Brunch Recipes

Ready to make the most stunning (and delicious) brunch dish in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A large white dinner plate filled with two caramelized brioche French toast slices that are topped with a mascarpone cream sauce and macerated berries.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

The Best Caramelized Brioche French Toast

This decadent French toast features thick-cut brioche with a shatter-crisp brûlée exterior and a soft, custard-like center. Topped with a billowy cloud of vanilla bean mascarpone and glossy macerated berries, it’s a visually stunning, restaurant-quality brunch you can easily recreate at home.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Chill and macerate time30 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Breakfast / Brunch
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 4
Calories: 867kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 Hand mixer electric is best
  • 1 large (12") skillet preferably non-stick

Ingredients

For the Mascarpone Sauce

  • ½ cup Mascarpone cold
  • ¼ cup heavy cream
  • 1 tablespoon powdered sugar
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla paste or extract, optional

For the Macerated Fruit

  • ½ cup strawberries sliced
  • ½ cup blueberries
  • ½ cup blackberries
  • ½ cup raspberries
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice usually from half of a lemon
  • 3 tablespoon granulated sugar

For the French Toast and Garnish

  • 1 loaf brioche cut into thick slices, see NOTES
  • 4 large eggs
  • 1 cup whole milk
  • ¼ cup heavy cream
  • 2 tablespoon granulated sugar
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla paste or extract
  • 1 teaspoon cinnamon ground
  • ½ teaspoon nutmeg ground
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter plus more, as needed
  • ¼ cup superfine sugar or regular sugar
  • powdered sugar for dusting
  • maple syrup warmed
  • fresh mint leaves for garnish, optional

Instructions

Make the Mascarpone Sauce

  • Place a bowl (preferably metal) in the freezer for at least 15 minutes.
  • Add the mascarpone, heavy cream (¼ cup), and powdered sugar (1 tbsp) into the chilled bowl. Use an electric hand mixer to beat the mixture until thickened and soft peaks begin to form (no more than 2 minutes). Chill until ready to use.
    ½ cup Mascarpone, ¼ cup heavy cream, 1 tablespoon powdered sugar, 1 teaspoon vanilla paste

Prep (Macerate) the Berries (30 minutes before serving)

  • 30 minutes before serving the French toast, place the sliced strawberries and blueberries in a bowl. Stir in the lemon juice and sugar and toss to coat.
    ½ cup strawberries, ½ cup blueberries, ½ cup blackberries, ½ cup raspberries, 1 teaspoon lemon juice, 3 tablespoon granulated sugar
  • Just before serving, fold in the blackberries and raspberries.

Prepare the French Toast

  • Slice the bread into thick cuts (see NOTES) and let sit on a baking rack for at least 15 minutes.
    1 loaf brioche
  • In a large bowl, whisk the eggs, milk, heavy cream, sugar, vanilla bean paste (or extract), cinnamon, nutmeg, and salt together until completely smooth with no streaks of egg white.
    4 large eggs, 1 cup whole milk, ¼ cup heavy cream, 2 tablespoon granulated sugar, 1 tablespoon vanilla paste, 1 teaspoon cinnamon, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, ¼ teaspoon salt
  • Working in batches, submerge the brioche slices in the custard for about 45 to 60 seconds per side. The bread feels heavy, but not so soggy that it falls apart.
  • Melt the butter in a large, non-stick skillet over medium heat. Use a spatula to carefully transfer the soaked bread slices to the skillet. Cook for 3 to 4 minutes until the bottom side is a deep, golden brown. Flip and liberally sprinkle the superfine sugar over the tops of each slice. Cook for another 3 to 4 minutes. Flip and cook for another 60 seconds. Transfer to a baking pan and place in a low-temperature oven (220°F) while you prepare the remaining French toast slices.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter, ¼ cup superfine sugar
  • Toss the blackberries and raspberries with the macerated strawberries and blueberries. There should be some juice, but the berries should still be intact.
  • Stack to slices per plate. Top with the mascarpone sauce, berries, and a dusting of powdered sugar. Serve at once with warmed maple syrup and garnish with mint leaves (if desired).
    powdered sugar, maple syrup, fresh mint leaves

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Finding the Best Brioche: Look for high-quality brioche loaves at your local bakery or gourmet food stores like Central Market. If you can’t find a whole loaf to slice yourself, pre-packaged sliced brioche bread is a perfectly fine and convenient substitute.
  • Loaf Quantity: Depending on how thick you cut your slices, you may need two loaves to generously serve four people. For the most “visually stunning” look, aim for slices that are 1.5 to 2 inches thick.
  • Stale is Better: For the best texture, use bread that is a day or two old. If your bread is fresh, let the slices sit out on a wire rack for 30 minutes to dry out slightly so they can absorb more custard without becoming mushy.
  • Temperature Control: When searing the bread, keep your pan at medium-low. This ensures the custard center cooks through completely before the sugar on the outside has a chance to burn.

Nutrition

Calories: 867kcal | Carbohydrates: 82g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 431mg | Sodium: 654mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 40g | Vitamin A: 2297IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 228mg | Iron: 2mg

Authentic Smoked Pulled Pork

by 2 Comments

Experience the ultimate low-and-slow BBQ with this authentic Carolina-style pulled pork, seasoned to perfection with the Best Pork Rub for a deep, smoky bark. Every tender, hickory-smoked bite is perfectly balanced by a tangy Carolina BBQ sauce and a generous scoop of our creamy Homemade Diner-Style Coleslaw for the perfect sandwich.

A straight-on view of a smoked pulled pork sandwich that is topped with Carolina BBQ sauce and homemade coleslaw.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🐖 The Ingredients

By combining a generously seasoned, slow-smoked roast with a signature tangy sauce and classic, creamy toppings, this recipe achieves the perfect harmony of smoke, acidity, and crunch. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for smoked pulled pork including a pork butt, pork rub, salt, apple cider, butter, coleslaw, hamburger buns, and bbq sauce.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Bone-In Pork Butt: Also known as a Boston Butt, the bone-in variety is preferred because the bone acts as a natural heat conductor, providing a built-in “doneness” indicator (it should pull out clean when finished). If you only have a boneless roast, ensure it is tied tightly with butcher’s twine to maintain a uniform shape for even cooking.
  • Kosher Salt: This recipe is designed for the coarse grains of Kosher salt. If you must substitute with standard table salt, reduce the amount by half, as table salt is much denser and can easily oversalt the meat.
  • Pork Rub: While we recommend our homemade “no-salt” rub to control the flavor profile, you can use your favorite store-bought BBQ rub. Just be sure to check if the commercial rub already contains salt; if it does, skip the dry brining step or reduce the salt used in the brine.
  • Apple Cider: We use unfiltered apple cider for the wrap to add a deep, autumnal sweetness. If you can’t find cider, apple juice is a perfectly fine substitute, or you can use a 50/50 mix of apple juice and apple cider vinegar for an extra tangy kick.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🌡️ The Tools You Will Need

Equipping yourself with the right high-quality gear is essential for a seamless smoking experience. You can save 10% on your entire order at SmokinTex.com by using our exclusive discount code LOON10.

  • Smoker: We use our Smokin’ Tex electric smoker because its professional-grade insulation and consistent heat make long cooks foolproof. Regardless of the brand you use, ensure your smoker can maintain a steady temperature of 225°F for 10+ hours to properly render the fat and collagen. Use Discount Code LOON10 for 10% off!
  • Wood Chips: We used Hickory for this cook, as its bold, hearty smoke profile is the traditional choice for Carolina-style pork and stands up perfectly to the tangy vinegar sauce. For a milder or sweeter flavor, fruitwoods like Apple or Cherry also work beautifully with pork.
  • Water Pan: A water pan is essential for maintaining a humid environment inside the smoker. This moisture prevents the surface of the pork from drying out during the long smoke and helps the hickory flavor adhere to the meat for a better bark. These can be found in home improvement centers and many supermarkets.
  • Digital Thermometer: This is the most important tool in your kit. Use a reliable digital probe thermometer to monitor the internal temperature of the pork in real-time; we recommend a dual-probe model so you can track both the meat and the smoker’s actual cabinet temperature simultaneously.
  • Meat Claws: Once the pork has rested, these heavy-duty shredding tools (also known as meat claws) allow you to pull the 6.5 lb roast into perfect strands in seconds. They are much more efficient than standard kitchen forks and help you handle the hot meat safely.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Smoked Pulled Pork

  • Patience is the Secret Ingredient: A 6.5 lb pork butt is a large piece of meat that requires time to break down. Never try to rush the process by cranking up the heat; the “low and slow” method is what transforms tough connective tissue into melt-in-your-mouth tender pork.
  • Master the “Bone Test”: The most reliable way to check for doneness—beyond the thermometer—is the bone test. When the pork reaches 201°F, grab the shoulder bone with your bear claws or tongs and give it a gentle tug; it should slide out completely clean with absolutely no resistance.
  • Tighten the Foil Seal: When wrapping your pork in the “Texas Crutch” (foil), ensure the seal is as airtight as possible. A tight wrap traps the steam and apple cider, creating a pressurized environment that powers the meat through the stall and keeps it incredibly moist.
  • Don’t Skimp on the Rest: It is tempting to shred the meat the moment it comes out of the smoker, but resting is non-negotiable. Placing the foil-wrapped pork in an insulated BBQ blanket for at least an hour allows the juices to thicken and reabsorb into the fibers, ensuring your first bite is just as juicy as the last.
  • The “Clean Shred”: When shredding the meat, take a moment to discard any large pieces of unrendered fat or “gristle.” This ensures that every forkful your guests get is pure, tender meat and flavorful bark.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Smoked Pulled Pork

A person sprinkling coarse Koser salt all over an uncooked pork butt that is resting on a baking rack.
  1. Step 1: Liberally salt the pork butt all over and refrigerate (uncovered) for 4 to 12 hours.
A person using his fingers to press a pork rub into the surface of an uncooked pork butt that is on a baking rack inside a baking sheet pan.
  1. Step 2: Spray the pork with a little water and then add the pork rub all over the roast. Use your fingers to press the rub into the meat.
A person inserting a digital meat thermometer into the thickest part of a seasoned uncooked pork butt that is resting on a grate inside an electric smoker.
  1. Step 3: Prepare your smoker for smoking. Add the seasoned pork butt and insert the digital thermometer into the thickest part of the roast.
A person transferring apple cider from a small glass bowl around the base of a smoked pork butt that is sitting on two large pieces of heavy-duty foil on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 4: Smoke at 225°F until you reach the stall (between 150°F and 160°F). Remove the pork butt and place it on a large piece of heavy-duty foil. Add the apple cider and tightly wrap the foil around the pork (you may need to double wrap it). Smoke until internal temp reaches 201°F.
A person holding a BBQ resting blanket with a foil-wrapped smoked pork butt sitting inside the blanket.
  1. Step 5: Place the wrapped pork in a BBQ blanket or a cooler wrapped in a couple of towels. Let it rest for 1 to 2 hours.
A person using plastic bear claws to shred smoked pork butt in a large steel roasting pan.
  1. Step 6: Place the roast in a large roasting pan. Remove the bone and shred the meat, removing large chunks of fat, if necessary.
A person drizzling Carolina BBQ sauce over shredded smoked pork in a large steel roasting pan.
  1. Step 7: Pour in the juices from the foil and about a half cup of the Carolina BBQ Sauce. Toss to coat.
A person placing a top toasted hamburger bun onto a smoked pulled pork sandwich topped with BBQ sauce and homemade coleslaw.
  1. Step 8: Place a mound of the pulled pork on a toasted bun bottom and top that with Carolina BBQ sauce, coleslaw, and the top bun.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Toasted Bun Foundation: Spread a little butter on your buns and toast them on a griddle or pan until golden brown. This creates a delicious crunch and provides a sturdy base that won’t get soggy under the thin vinegar sauce.
  • The “BBQ Shack” Assembly: Pile a generous mound of the sauced pork onto the bottom bun. Top it immediately with a large, cold scoop of the diner-style coleslaw. The contrast between the hot, smoky meat and the cold, crunchy slaw is the hallmark of a great Carolina sandwich.
  • Classic Sides: Serve your sandwiches with traditional BBQ accompaniments like thick-cut dill pickles, homemade potato chips, or pit-style baked beans. The acidity of the pickles complements the vinegar sauce perfectly.
  • Beyond the Sandwich: While this pork makes a legendary sandwich, it is incredibly versatile for other meals! It tastes amazing as a topping for BBQ pizza, piled high onto classic nachos with melted cheese and jalapeños, or stuffed into a giant twice-baked potato for the ultimate comfort food.
  • Family Style Presentation: If serving a crowd, place the shredded pork in a large warm dish with a small carafe of extra sauce on the side. Set out a platter of toasted buns and a bowl of chilled slaw so guests can build their own sandwiches to their preferred meat-to-slaw ratio.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How long does it take to smoke Carolina Style Pulled Pork?

For a 6.5 lb roast, you should plan for approximately 11 to 15 hours in the smoker. Factors such as the outdoor temperature, your specific equipment, and how often the door is opened will influence the final timing.

What is the best wood for authentic Carolina Style Pulled Pork?

Hickory is the traditional choice because its robust, hearty flavor profile stands up perfectly to the high acidity of the vinegar-based mop sauce. If you prefer something slightly sweeter, fruitwoods like apple or cherry are also excellent options that pair well with the meat.

At what temperature is Smoked Pulled Pork considered done?

The meat is ready to be removed from the heat when it reaches an internal temperature of 201°F. At this stage, the connective tissues have fully transformed into gelatin, making the roast tender enough to shred with ease using bear claws.

Why is a vinegar sauce used on Smoked Pulled Pork?

This thin, tangy dressing is designed to cut through the richness and fat of the smoked shoulder. It provides a sharp, bright contrast that balances the deep, savory notes of the hickory smoke and the sweetness of the rub.

Can you freeze leftover Carolina Style Pulled Pork?

Yes, this meat freezes exceptionally well for future meals. Store it in airtight vacuum-sealed bags or freezer-safe containers with a little bit of the extra juices to keep it moist when you reheat it for pizza, nachos, or baked potatoes.

Expert Tip: Adapting for a Pellet Smoker

If you are using a pellet smoker, start the cook at a lower temperature—around 190°F to 200°F—for the first two hours to maximize smoke absorption, as pellet grills burn very cleanly and produce the most flavorful smoke at lower settings. Because pellet smokers use fan-forced convection heat, the exterior of the meat can dry out faster than in an electric unit; to counter this, always use a water pan and ensure you use high-quality, 100% hickory pellets to achieve that authentic, deep Carolina flavor profile.

Regardless of the pellet brand, once you reach the 160°F mark and wrap the pork in foil, you can increase the temperature to 225°F or 250°F to efficiently finish the cook without sacrificing any of that hard-earned smoky character.

A person holding a smoked pulled pork sandwich with one hand revealing the shredded pork, BBQ sauce, and coleslaw on toasted buns.

🔥 More Classic BBQ Recipes

Ready to make the best pulled pork this side of Carolina? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a smoked pulled pork sandwich resting on brown sandwich paper with shredded pork, BBQ sauce, and coleslaw all nestled between two toasted hamburger buns.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Authentic Smoked Pulled Pork

This authentic Carolina-style pulled pork is smoked low and slow with hickory until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Tossed in a signature tangy vinegar sauce and topped with creamy diner-style coleslaw, it delivers the perfect balance of smoke, acid, and crunch in every bite.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time13 hours
Chill and Resting Time8 hours
Total Time21 hours 15 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American / BBQ
Servings: 12
Calories: 505kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

For the Pulled Pork

  • 6 lb pork butt bone-in, 5 to 6 lbs
  • coarse Kosher salt for dry brine
  • water preferably in a squirt bottle
  • 1 cup pork rub see NOTES
  • ¼ cup apple cider

For the Carolina BBQ Sauce

  • 1½ cup apple cider vinegar
  • ¾ cup ketchup
  • 1 tablespoon dark brown sugar
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
  • 1 cup BBQ sauce

For Pulled Pork Sandwiches

  • 4 hamburger buns
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 cup Carolina BBQ Sauce recipe below
  • 2 cups coleslaw preferably diner-style (click link)

Instructions

  • Pat the pork butt dry with paper towels. Liberally season the pork butt all over with Kosher salt. Place on a baking rack in a baking sheet pan and refrigerate (uncovered) for 2 to 12 hours.
    6 lb pork butt, coarse Kosher salt
  • Spritz the pork with water. Coat the pork all over with the pork rub.
    water, 1 cup pork rub
  • Prepare your smoker for smoking. Add a water pan on the bottom rack. Fill your wood box with 4 oz of wood chips, preferably hickory, mesquite, pecan, or apple.
  • Place the pork fat-side down on a grate. Insert your digital thermometer in the thickest part of the roast. Close the door and smoke at 225°F until you reach the stall, usually about 6 to 8 hours, and around 155°F to 160°F. Add another 4 oz of wood chips every hour for the first three hours.
  • Remove the pork from the smoker and place it on a large piece of heavy-duty foil. Shape the foil up around the pork and gently pour the apple cider around the base of the roast. Tightly seal the foil around the pork, and add another layer. Return the pork to the smoker and continue smoking until an internal temperature of 201°F is reached, usually another 5 to 8 hours.
    ¼ cup apple cider
  • During the slow-cooking of the pork, prepare the Carolina BBQ sauce by adding all ingredients to a medium saucepan. Bring to a simmer and continue simmering for 10 minutes, stirring often. Remove from heat, and when cool, transfer to a jar/container with a lid. Refrigerate for up to 1 week. Let it come to room temperature (or gently warm) before serving.
    1½ cup apple cider vinegar, ¾ cup ketchup, 1 tablespoon dark brown sugar, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes, 1 cup BBQ sauce
  • Once 201°F is reached, remove the pork from the smoker. Transfer (still wrapped in foil) to a BBQ blanket or a cooler wrapped in towels. Let it rest for 1 to 2 hours.
  • Gently remove the pork from the foil (saving the liquid) and place in a large roasting pan. Slide the bone out and discard it. Use meat claws, or two forks, to shred the meat.
  • Add the reserved juices to the meat, and stir in about ¼ cup of the Carolina BBQ sauce. Stir. The meat should be coated but not swimming in the sauce. Add another ¼ cup of the sauce, if desired.
  • Meanwhile, butter the buns and toast them in a large skillet, on a griddle, or on a grill. Build the pulled pork sandwiches by piling a large mound of pulled pork on the bottom bun. Top with a liberal drizzle of the Carolina BBQ Sauce. Add a layer of coleslaw. Top with the bun and serve at once, with extra BBQ sauce on the side.
    4 hamburger buns, 4 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 cup Carolina BBQ Sauce, 2 cups coleslaw

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Patience is Key (Timing May Vary): While we estimate about 1.5 to 2 hours per pound, BBQ is done when it’s done, not when the clock says so. Factors like outdoor humidity, wind, and the unique density of your 6.5 lb pork butt can all cause timing to vary significantly. Be patient during “the stall” and trust your digital thermometer—the results are well worth the wait!
  • The “Texas Crutch” Advantage: While some prefer butcher paper, we find that tightly wrapping the pork in heavy-duty aluminum foil with a splash of apple cider is the most reliable way to ensure a moist, tender result. This method traps steam to break down tough connective tissues and helps the meat power through the temperature stall.
  • The Power of the Rest: Never skip the resting phase! Placing your foil-wrapped pork into an insulated BBQ blanket or a cooler for at least one hour allows the juices to redistribute and the muscle fibers to relax. This is the difference between good BBQ and “melt-in-your-mouth” BBQ.
  • Dry Brining for Flavor: For the best results, season your pork 12–15 hours in advance and let it rest in the fridge. This “dry brine” allows the salt to penetrate deep into the meat, improving both the flavor and the final texture of the pork.
  • Smokin’ Tex Discount: If you’re looking to upgrade your BBQ gear, you can get 10% off your entire order at SmokinTex.com by using our exclusive discount code: LOON10.

Nutrition

Calories: 505kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 46g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 146mg | Sodium: 805mg | Potassium: 1069mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 802IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 268mg | Iron: 11mg

The Best Twice-Baked Potatoes (The Steakhouse Secret)

by Leave a Comment

Unlock the ultimate steakhouse secret with these twice-baked potatoes, featuring a crispy bacon-fat crust and a velvety garlic-herb filling that’s guaranteed to steal the show. They are the perfect, indulgent side to a juicy reverse-seared filet mignon, a tangy balsamic pork chop, or even a comforting smothered chicken cutlet.

A row of freshly prepared twice baked potatoes topped with chopped scallions and crispy bacon bits all on a grayish-blue oval platter.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥔 The Ingredients

This recipe pairs a decadent blend of velvety dairy and savory aromatics with the smoky, salty crunch of perfectly rendered toppings to create a side dish that is as luxurious as it is addictive. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for twice baked potatoes on a grey wooden background including russet potatoes, sour cream, garlic and herb cheese, cream, white cheddar, butter, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Russet Potatoes: These are essential for the best results; their high starch content ensures a fluffy, light filling, and their thick skins are sturdy enough to hold up to the “overstuffing” process.
  • Boursin Garlic & Fine Herbs: This is the “secret” to the gourmet flavor profile. If you can’t find it, you can substitute it with 5 ounces of plain cream cheese mixed with a teaspoon of garlic powder and a tablespoon of dried parsley or chives.
  • Bacon: Thick-cut bacon provides the best texture and the most rendered fat for the crust. For a vegetarian version, skip the bacon and use olive oil or melted butter to crisp the skins.
  • White Cheddar: We use extra-sharp white cheddar for a sophisticated look and a bold bite, but you can easily swap this for sharp yellow cheddar, Gruyère, or even Monterey Jack for a milder melt.
  • Sour Cream: Full-fat sour cream is recommended for the classic steakhouse tang, but plain Greek yogurt works as a great high-protein substitute.
  • Heavy Cream: This is the key to a “pipable” mousse-like texture. If you only have whole milk or half-and-half on hand, add it slowly to ensure the filling doesn’t become too runny.
  • Coarse Sea Salt: Don’t skip the salt on the exterior! It creates that iconic, crunchy “salt crust” that makes the skin just as delicious as the center.
  • Scallions: Also known as green onions. For a more delicate, fine-dining aesthetic, you can substitute these with fresh minced chives.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Twice-Baked Potatoes

  • Skip the Foil: Never wrap your potatoes in foil for the initial bake. Foil traps steam, which results in a soft, soggy skin. Baking them directly on the oven rack allows the air to circulate, creating that iconic, crispy “salt crust.”
  • The “Hot Scoop” Rule: Scoop the potato flesh while it is still hot! If the potato cools too much, the starch becomes “gluey.” Working with hot potatoes ensures the Boursin and butter melt instantly into a silky, aerated emulsion.
  • Use a Potato Ricer: For the most professional, cloud-like texture, pass your potato centers through a potato ricer before mixing. If you don’t have one, a hand mixer works well—just be careful not to over-mix, or the potatoes will become gummy.
  • The Piping Bag Pro-Move: To get those beautiful, toasted ridges seen in high-end restaurants, use a large star tip and a piping bag to fill the skins. If you don’t have a piping bag, a Ziploc bag with the corner snipped off works perfectly.
  • Vent the Steam: As soon as the potatoes come out of the first bake, slice them open immediately. This allows the internal steam to escape, preventing the potato from becoming waterlogged and keeping the skin extra crunchy.
  • Make-Ahead Magic: These are perfect for entertaining! You can prep and pipe the potatoes up to 24 hours in advance. Store them covered in the fridge, then simply add a few extra minutes to the final baking time when you’re ready to serve.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make the Best Twice-Baked Potatoes

Person using a pair of metal tongs to drag an uncooked russet potato through rendered bacon grease in a case-iron skillet.
  1. Step 1: Cook the bacon in a skillet, remove it, and then roll the uncooked potatoes in the rendered bacon grease.
A person placing salted russet potatoes on an oven grate in an oven set to 400°F.
  1. Step 2: Roll the greased potatoes in coarse sea salt, and then bake them in a 400°F oven until soft when pierced, about 65 minutes.
A person using a spoon to remove the inside potato flesh from a baked potato that has been cut in half.
  1. Step 3: Slice the top third of the hot potato, and then use a spoon to scoop out the flesh (use a kitchen towel or oven mitts to hold the hot potatoes).
A person using a wooden spoon to stir in a large glass bowl whipped potatoes, herbed butter, sour cream, shredded white cheddar, crispy bacon bits, and chopped scallions.
  1. Step 4: Add the scooped-out potatoes to a large bowl and mix in the Boursin Garlic and Herbs Cheese, sour cream, melted butter, cheese, half of the bacon, and half of the scallions.
A person using a piping bag to pie softened twice potato filling into a shelled-out baked potato boat on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 5: Spoon or pipe the filling into the potato boats.
A line-up of twice baked potatoes topped with white cheddar cheese and smoked paprika on a metal baking sheet.
  1. Step 6: Brioil for a few minutes, until brown spots are visible. Remove from the oven and add a small layer of shredded cheddar and a pinch of paprika.
A line-up of twice baked potatoes topped with melted white cheddar cheese and smoked paprika on a metal baking sheet.
  1. Step 7: Broil for another minute or so, until the cheese is very melty and brown in spots.
A person sprinkling chopped scallions over the tops of twice baked potatoes that are also topped with crispy bacon bits.
  1. Step 8: Garnish with the rest of the bacon and chopped scallions and serve immediately.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What are the best potatoes for twice-baked potatoes?

Russet potatoes (also known as Idaho potatoes) are the gold standard for this recipe. Their high starch content results in a light, fluffy mash, and their thick, sturdy skins crisp up beautifully in the oven, creating a perfect “vessel” for the filling.

Can I make twice-baked potatoes ahead of time?

Yes! These are an entertainer’s dream. You can prepare the potatoes all the way through the piping stage, cover them tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the cheese and bake. You may need to add 5–10 minutes to the baking time to ensure the center is hot.

How do I reheat leftover twice-baked potatoes without them getting soggy?

To maintain that “steakhouse” crunch, avoid the microwave. Instead, reheat leftovers in the oven or an air fryer at 350°F until the cheese is bubbling and the skin has crisped back up.

Do I have to use a piping bag for twice-baked potatoes?

Not at all! While a piping bag with a star tip gives you those beautiful “steakhouse” ridges, you can simply spoon the filling back into the skins. Use a fork to rough up the surface of the potato mash; those little peaks will still brown beautifully under the broiler.

Should you eat the skin on these Twice-Baked Potatoes?

In this specific recipe, the outside is seasoned with bacon fat and sea salt, making it just as delicious and crunchy as a gourmet chip.

A person using a fork to lift the filling out of a twice baked potato that is resting on a white salad plate.

😋 More Classic Steakhouse Sides

Ready to make the best nostalgic side-dish of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a fork to lift the filling out of a twice baked potato that is resting on a white salad plate.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

The Best Twice-Baked Potatoes (The Steakhouse Secret)

Discover the ultimate steakhouse secret with these overstuffed potatoes, featuring an impossibly crispy bacon-fat crust and a velvety, cloud-like Boursin filling. Perfectly seasoned and topped with bubbling white cheddar and smoky bacon, they are the gold standard of indulgent comfort food.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 15 minutes
Total Time1 hour 30 minutes
Course: Side
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 768kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Hand mixer or potato rice, see NOTES

Ingredients

  • 4 strips bacon thick-cut, diced
  • 4 large Russet potatoes scrubbed clean and dried
  • coarse sea salt
  • 1 5.2 oz Boursin Garlic and Fine Herbs Cheese see NOTES
  • ½ cup sour cream
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter melted
  • ¼ cup heavy cream
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1½ cups white cheddar shredded
  • 3 scallions chopped
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400°F.
  • Cook the bacon in a skillet until crispy. Remove with a slotted spoon to a paper towel-lined plate.
    4 strips bacon
  • Prick the potatoes several times with a fork. Next, use a pair of tongs to rub them generously all over in the rendered bacon grease (still in the pan). Pour the coarse sea salt into a shallow bowl and roll the potato around it to slightly coat it. Repeat this process with the remaining potatoes.
    4 large Russet potatoes, coarse sea salt
  • Place the potatoes directly on the oven rack and bake for 65 to 70 minutes.
  • Remove the potatoes from the oven, and with the help of a kitchen towel or heatproof oven mitts, hold each potato and use a sharp knife to slice off the top third of it. Use a spoon to scoop out the insides and place them in a large bowl. You'll want to leave about a ¼-inch shell with the potato "boat."
  • Add the Boursin, sour cream, melted butter, heavy cream, and salt. Use a potato ricer or hand mixer to whip the potatoes until very smooth. Fold in 1 cup of the shredded cheddar, half of the bacon, and half of the scallions. Stir until smooth, and the cheese has melted.
    1 5.2 oz Boursin Garlic and Fine Herbs Cheese, ½ cup sour cream, 4 tablespoon unsalted butter, ¼ cup heavy cream, ½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1½ cups white cheddar, 3 scallions
  • Use a large spoon, or a piping bag (or a large plastic baggie with the corn cut off) to add the filling back into the potato boats in a high, swirling mound. Place them on a baking pan.
  • Turn your broiler to HIGH and place the oven rack 6 inches from the heating element.
  • Place the potatoes on the rack and broil just until starting to brown in spots (keep an eye on them, don't let them burn). Remove the pan from the oven and sprinkle the remaining cheese and a sprinkle of paprika over the lightly browned potatoes. Return to the rack and broil for another minute or so, until the tops are lightly browned.
    1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • Remove the potatoes from the oven and use a spatula to move them to a platter or individual plates. Garnish with the remaining bacon bits and scallions. Serve at once.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Boursin Secret: Boursin is a brand of Gournay cheese known for its creamy, spreadable texture and bold infusion of garlic and fine herbs. It acts as a “shortcut” to gourmet flavor, providing a sophisticated richness that sets these potatoes apart. You can typically find it in the specialty cheese section (near the deli or artisanal cheeses) at most major supermarkets.
  • Uniform Sizing: Choose Russet potatoes that are similar in size and shape. This ensures that they all bake at the same rate and appear uniform for a beautiful “steakhouse” presentation.
  • The Bacon Fat Trick: After frying your bacon bits, don’t discard the fat! Use that liquid gold to rub down the potato skins before the first bake. It adds a layer of smoky flavor and helps the coarse sea salt stick to the skin for that perfect crunch.
  • Don’t Over-Mix: When combining your filling, mix until just smooth. Overworking the potatoes, especially with a high-speed electric mixer, can cause the starches to break down and become “gummy” rather than fluffy.

Nutrition

Calories: 768kcal | Carbohydrates: 71g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 1705mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1520IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 399mg | Iron: 4mg

The Ultimate One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta

by 8 Comments

If you love the cozy flavors of classic Swedish meatballs (think IKEA), but want a more filling, one-pan meal, this One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta is the ultimate comfort food solution. Tender egg noodles and juicy, spiced meatballs simmer together in a rich, velvety gravy that tastes even better than the restaurant version. It’s a 30-minute dinner that delivers maximum flavor with minimal cleanup, making it a guaranteed hit for busy weeknights.

A large stainless steel skillet filled with Swedish meatball pasta that has been garnished with chopped Italian parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This dish combines savory proteins and signature warm spices with a velvety, cream-based sauce to create a comforting, restaurant-quality meal right in your own kitchen. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Swedish meatball pasta on a grey wooden background including ground beef, ground pork, breadcrumbs, an egg, grated onion, butter, beef stock, cream, egg noodles, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Ground Beef & Pork: Using a 50/50 blend is traditional for Swedish meatballs; the beef provides a hearty flavor while the pork adds fat and tenderness. You can use 100% ground beef if preferred, but try to use 80/20 fat content to keep them from drying out.
  • Panko Breadcrumbs: These create a lighter, fluffier meatball than standard breadcrumbs. If you are gluten-free, you can easily swap these for certified GF breadcrumbs or crushed pork rinds.
  • Grated Onion: Grating the onion directly into the meat mixture (rather than dicing it) ensures the meatballs stay incredibly moist and prevents large chunks from breaking the meatballs apart.
  • Allspice & Nutmeg: These are the “secret” ingredients that define the Swedish flavor profile. Even if you aren’t a fan of warm spices in savory food, don’t skip them—they provide a subtle, authentic depth that sets this apart from a standard beef gravy.
  • Beef Stock: For the best color and richest flavor, use a high-quality beef stock or bone broth. If you only have chicken stock on hand, it will still work, though the sauce will be lighter in color and flavor.
  • Egg Noodles: Wide egg noodles are the classic choice because their wavy shape is perfect for “trapping” the creamy sauce. If you don’t have them, hearty shapes like Rotini or Pappardelle are great alternatives.
  • Heavy Cream: This gives the sauce its signature velvet texture. For a slightly lighter version, you can use half-and-half, but the sauce may not be quite as thick and rich.
  • Dijon & Worcestershire: These two ingredients add “umami” and a necessary tang to balance the richness of the cream. If you don’t have Dijon, a half-teaspoon of dry mustard powder will do the trick.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for the Perfect Dish

  • Don’t Overmix the Meat: When combining your meatball ingredients, mix until just combined. Overworking the meat can lead to tough, rubbery meatballs instead of the tender, melt-in-your-mouth texture you want.
  • The “Fond” is Flavor: Don’t worry about the brown bits stuck to the bottom of the pan after searing the meatballs. That is called “fond,” and it’s concentrated flavor! When you pour in the beef stock, use a wooden spoon to scrape those bits up so they dissolve into the gravy.
  • Sear in Batches: If your skillet isn’t large enough to hold all the meatballs with space between them, sear them in two batches. If the pan is crowded, the meatballs will steam rather than brown, and you’ll miss out on that savory crust.
  • Keep an Eye on the Liquid: Because the pasta cooks directly in the sauce, it absorbs a lot of moisture. If the sauce looks too thick before the noodles are tender, simply splash in an extra ¼ cup of beef broth to loosen it up.
  • Use Room Temperature Cream: To prevent the heavy cream from curdling when it hits the hot pan, take it out of the fridge about 15 minutes before you need it. This ensures a perfectly smooth, velvet-like sauce.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Swedish Meatball Pasta

A person using a large wooden spoon to mix ground beef, ground pork, and other ingredients in a glass bowl for homemade Swedish meatballs.
  1. Step 1: Place all of the meatball ingredients in a bowl and mix until just combined.
A person wearing black kitchen gloves forming uncooked Swedish meatballs and placing them on an oval platter.
  1. Step 2: Shape the mixture into 1-inch balls and set aside.
Uncooked Swedish meatballs being seared in a large skillet filled with simmering olive oil on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Heat the oil (2 tbsp) in a large skillet over medium heat and sear the meatballs until lightly browned all over (they won’t be completely cooked through).
A person transferring all-purpose flour from a small white bowl into a large skillet that is filled with a simmering roux on a gas stove.
  1. Step 4: Remove the meatballs and add the butter. Stir in the flour and whisk to make a roux, about 2 minutes.
A person pouring beef stock into a skillet filled with a simmering roux that is being whisked by his other hand.
  1. Step 5: Whisk in the beef broth, Dijon, Worcestershire sauce, salt, and pepper. Stir until starting to thicken just a bit, about 1 to 2 minutes.
A person dumping uncooked egg noodles into a skillet filled with a simmering brown sauce.
  1. Step 6: Stir in the noodles, bring to a boil, lower the heat, cover, and simmer for about 6 minutes, stirring every now and then (to make sure the pasta isn’t sticking to the pan).
A person transferring partially cooked Swedish meatballs into a large skillet filled with a simmering brown and cream sauce with egg noodles in the sauce.
  1. Step 7: Stir in the cream and add the meatballs. Simmer for another 5 minutes.
A person sprinkling chopped Italian parsley over a skillet filled with Swedish Meatball Pasta.
  1. Step 8: Garnish with chopped Italian parsley and serve at once.

Expert Tip: The “Hydration Rest” for Perfect Texture

For the most tender, restaurant-quality meatballs, let your meatball mixture rest in the refrigerator for at least 15 minutes before you start rolling. This crucial step allows the Panko breadcrumbs to fully hydrate from the egg and onion juices, creating a “panade” that locks in moisture and prevents the meat from becoming tough or rubbery during the searing process.

As a bonus, chilled meat is much easier to shape into perfectly smooth rounds without sticking to your hands! Not 100% necessary, but it helps to make perfect meatballs!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen meatballs to make this One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta?

Yes, you certainly can. Simply thaw them completely before starting and sear them in the pan as directed to ensure they develop a nice crust and soak up the flavors of the homemade gravy.

How should I store and reheat leftovers of One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta?

Place any remaining portions in an airtight container and keep them in the refrigerator for up to three days. When you are ready to eat, reheat them on the stove over low heat with a splash of beef broth or milk to bring the creamy sauce back to its original consistency.

Can I make this One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta gluten-free?

Absolutely. To adapt this recipe, use certified gluten-free breadcrumbs in the meat mixture, swap the all-purpose flour for a 1:1 gluten-free baking blend, and use your favorite gluten-free sturdy noodle or brown rice pasta.

What are the best noodles to use for One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta?

Wide egg noodles are the ideal choice because their wavy shape and soft texture are perfect for clinging to a thick, savory gravy. If you don’t have those on hand, any hearty pasta like rotini, fusilli, or even penne will work beautifully to capture the sauce.

Can I prep the meatballs for One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta in advance?

es, you can roll the meat mixture into balls up to 24 hours ahead of time. Store them on a parchment-lined plate covered with plastic wrap in the fridge, which actually helps them hold their shape even better when they hit the hot skillet.

An overhead view of a white pasta bowl filled with a serving of Swedish meatball pasta sitting next to a large skillet filled with the same.

🍝 More Amazing One-Pot Wonder Recipes

Ready to make the best pasta dish this side of Sweden? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large stainless steel skillet filled a freshly prepared Swedish meatball pasta topped with chopped Italian parsley.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

The Ultimate One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta

This One-Pot Swedish Meatball Pasta features juicy, spiced meatballs and tender egg noodles simmered in a rich, velvety cream gravy. It’s a 30-minute, family-favorite dinner that delivers all the cozy flavors of the IKEA classic with the ease of a single pan!
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time20 minutes
Total Time30 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 768kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large skillet (12") preferably with lid

Ingredients

For the Meatballs

  • ½ lb ground beef 85% – 90% lean
  • ½ lb ground pork
  • ½ cup Panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 large egg
  • ½ cup grated onion see NOTES
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon ground allspice
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil

For the Pasta and Sauce

  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 4 cups beef stock or broth
  • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 12 oz egg noodles extra-wide
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped, for garnish

Instructions

Sear the Meatballs

  • In a large bowl, gently mix the beef, pork, breadcrumbs, egg, onion, garlic, allspice, nutmeg, salt, and pepper until just combined. Roll into 1-inch balls and set aside.
    ½ lb ground beef, ½ lb ground pork, ½ cup Panko breadcrumbs, 1 large egg, ½ cup grated onion, 3 cloves garlic, ½ teaspoon ground allspice, ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg, ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the meatballs and sear them, moving them frequently around to help keep them from sticking to the pan. Sear them until lightly browned all over, but not completely cooked through. Remove them from the pan onto a plate or platter. Set aside.
    2 tablespoon olive oil

Make the Sauce and Finish the Dish

  • In the same skillet over medium heat, add the butter and stir until melted.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Stir in the flour and cook for one to two minutes, stirring often.
    ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Whisk in the beef stock and then the Worcestershire, Dijon, salt (1 tsp), and pepper (1 tsp). Use a wooden spatula to pry up any brown bits stuck to the pan. Stir for about 2 minutes, until the sauce is just beginning to thicken (it will continue to thicken as the sauce cooks).
    4 cups beef stock, 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Stir in the egg noodles and bring to a boil. Immediately turn the heat to LOW and cover the pan. Simmer for about 6 minutes, stirring once or twice to keep the noodles from sticking to the pan.
    12 oz egg noodles
  • Remove the lid and stir in the heavy cream, and then return the meatballs to the skillet. Let simmer for about 5 minutes. If the sauce becomes too thick, thin it with a splash of beef stock (or broth).
    1 cup heavy cream
  • Serve at once, garnish with the chopped parsley.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Grated Onion Secret: For the juiciest meatballs, always grate your onion using a box grater instead of dicing it. The onion juice and fine pulp distribute evenly throughout the meat, providing incredible moisture and flavor without the risk of large onion chunks causing your meatballs to fall apart in the pan.
  • Adjusting Sauce Consistency: Because the pasta absorbs liquid as it cooks, the sauce can thicken quickly. If it looks too thick before the noodles are tender, simply stir in an extra ¼ to ½ cup of beef broth to loosen it up.
  • Don’t Crowd the Pan: When searing the meatballs, work in batches if necessary. Crowding the pan will cause the meat to steam rather than brown; you want that deep golden crust to create the “fond” (brown bits) that gives the gravy its rich color and flavor.
  • Storage Tip: This dish is best served fresh, but leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3 days. When reheating, add a splash of milk or broth to the pan to help the cream sauce become silky again.

Nutrition

Calories: 768kcal | Carbohydrates: 115g | Protein: 48g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 281mg | Sodium: 689mg | Potassium: 976mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1354IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 8mg

Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella

by 4 Comments

Transport your taste buds to the coast of Spain with this stunning, Authentic Seafood Paella. We’ve combined the finest saffron-infused rice with succulent monkfish and fresh shellfish to create a Mediterranean masterpiece that is as beautiful as it is delicious!

An overhead view of a large paella pan filled with freshly prepared Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍤 The Ingredients

By combining traditional Spanish pantry essentials with a bounty of premium seafood, we’ve created a dish that captures the true, smoky essence of the Mediterranean coast in every spectacular bite. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella on a grey wooden background including bomba rice, fish stock, chopped bell peppers and onions, monk fish, mussels, clams, shrimp, grated tomatoes, garlic, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • The Rice: For the most authentic texture, we highly recommend Bomba rice (like Santo Tomás), as it absorbs a massive amount of flavor while remaining distinct and firm. If you can’t find it, Calasparra or Arborio rice are the best substitutes, though you may need to adjust your liquid ratios slightly.
  • Monkfish: Known as “the poor man’s lobster,” monkfish is prized in paella for its firm, meaty texture that won’t flake apart during cooking. If it’s unavailable, any firm-fleshed white fish like grouper, snapper, or halibut will work beautifully.
  • Saffron: High-quality Saffron threads are the soul of this dish, providing that iconic golden hue and floral aroma. While there is no true flavor substitute, you can use a pinch of turmeric if you only need to replicate the vibrant yellow color.
  • Pimentón: Be sure to use Smoked Spanish Paprika (Pimentón de la Vera) rather than domestic paprika; it provides the deep, smoky “chorizo-like” essence that defines a traditional paella.
  • Shellfish Stock: A rich, homemade shrimp and crab stock is the flavor engine of this recipe. In a pinch, you can use a high-quality store-bought seafood stock or even clam juice diluted with a bit of water; just be sure to taste for salt!

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Seafood Paella

  • The “No-Stir” Rule: Once you’ve added the stock and distributed the rice evenly, put the spoon away! Stirring releases starch and makes the rice creamy like risotto, but for a perfect paella, you want the grains to be distinct and separate.
  • Rotate the Pan: If you are using a large 16-inch or 20-inch pan, it likely extends beyond your heat source. Every few minutes, give the pan a 90-degree turn to ensure the rice at the edges cooks at the same rate as the center.
  • Season Like the Sea: Since rice is a neutral sponge, your stock needs to be well-seasoned. Taste your stock after adding the saffron; it should taste slightly “too salty” (like seawater) to ensure the finished rice is perfectly flavored.
  • Master the Sofrito: Don’t rush the grated tomatoes. Sauté them until the water has evaporated and they turn into a thick, dark “jam” where the oil begins to separate. This “tomato gold” is the flavor foundation of the entire dish.
  • The Foil Trick: If your rice is tender but your clams and mussels haven’t popped open yet, cover the pan with a large sheet of foil for the last 3 minutes. This traps the steam and “shocks” the shells open without overcooking the rice.
  • Listen for the Crackle: To achieve the legendary socarrat (the caramelized crust on the bottom), listen for a faint crackling sound at the very end of the cook. This means the liquid is gone, and the rice is starting to toast in the olive oil.
  • The Power of the Rest: After you turn off the heat, cover the pan with a clean kitchen towel and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. This final steam allows the rice to finish cooking perfectly and helps the socarrat release from the bottom of the pan.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Prep for Seafood Paella

A person using a mortar and pestle to grind saffron threads with warm shellfish stock on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Grind the saffron threads and add two tablespoons of hot shellfish stock.
A person using two metal spoons to toss shrimp in hot oil in a large paella pan.
  1. Step 2: Heat the oil over medium-high heat and quickly sear the seasoned shrimp. Remove from the pan and set aside.
A person using a wooden spoon to toss chunks of monkfish in hot oil in a large paella pan.
  1. Step 3: Add the chopped and seasoned monkfish to the pan and sear for a couple of minutes. Remove from the pan and set aside.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir chopped onion and red bell pepper in hot oil in a large paella pan.
  1. Step 4: Add the chopped onion and red bell pepper and sauté until tender, about 4 minutes.
A person transferring minced garlic into a large paella pan that contains chopped onions and red bell pepper that are being sautéed in hot oil.
  1. Step 5: Add the garlic and sauté for another minute.
A person transferring grated tomatoes from a glass bowl into a large paella pan that is filled with simmering chopped onions and red bell peppers in hot oil.
  1. Step 6: Add the grated tomatoes (with juice) and cook until most of the liquid has evaporated and it is “jammy.”

Expert Tip:

For a truly professional “Fumet” (seafood stock), sauté your shrimp and crab shells in extra-virgin olive oil over medium-high heat until they turn a vibrant, deep orange before adding your water and aromatics. This crucial step “blooms” the essential oils in the shells, creating a rich, savory foundation.

👨‍🍳 How to Make Spanish Paella

A person transferring short-grain rice from a glass bowl into a large paella pan that is filled with sautéd sofrito.
  1. Step 1: Stir in the rice and cook for 1 to 2 minutes, until coated.
A person holding a small bowl of Spanish paprika over a large paella pan filled with toasted short-grain rice with sofrito.
  1. Step 2: Stir in the Spanish paprika and cook for 1 minute.
A person pouring hot shellfish stock from a stock pot into a large paella pan filled with toasted bomba rice mixed with sofrito.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the shellfish stock.
A person pouring saffron-infused shellfish stock from a coral bowl into a paella pan filled with seafood paella that is being simmered.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the bloomed saffron.
A person placing littleneck clams onto the surface of freshly prepared Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella in a large paella pan.
  1. Step 5: Nestle in the clams and mussels, and then after 10 minutes, add the shrimp and monkfish. Simmer another 10 minutes, remove from heat, and cover with a kitchen towel for 10 more minutes.
A person using a large serving spoon to serve authentic Spanish seafood paella from a large pan and revealing the socarrat on the bottom of the rice.
  1. Step 6: Garnish with lemon wedges and chopped parsley and serve at once!

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Grand Reveal: Bring the entire pan directly to the table! Paella is a communal masterpiece, and there is nothing more impressive than the “wow” factor of that massive, colorful display sitting in the center of the gathering.
  • The Garnish: Arrange fresh lemon wedges around the perimeter and give the dish a final sprinkle of chopped Italian parsley. Instruct your guests to squeeze the lemon over the seafood just before eating; the bright acidity is essential for cutting through the richness of the saffron and smoky pimentón.
  • Scrape for the Gold: When plating, use a sturdy spoon to ensure you are scraping up plenty of the socarrat from the bottom of the pan. That crispy, caramelized layer of rice is the most prized part of the dish and provides a spectacular textural contrast to the tender monkfish.
  • The Perfect Pairings: Keep your side dishes simple to let the seafood shine. A crisp, leafy green salad with a light vinaigrette and a chilled bottle of Spanish Albariño or a dry Rosé are the perfect companions for this Mediterranean feast.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best pan to use for an Authentic Seafood Paella?

A wide, shallow carbon steel or stainless steel pan is ideal because it allows the rice to cook in a thin layer and promotes the formation of the legendary crispy bottom crust. If you don’t have a traditional vessel, a large, heavy-bottomed skillet is the next best choice. A paella grill is perfect for cooking outside.

Can I use regular long-grain rice for Authentic Seafood Paella?

It is best to avoid long-grain varieties as they don’t absorb liquid correctly; instead, look for short-grain Spanish varieties like Bomba or Calasparra that stay firm and distinct when cooked. These specific grains are designed to soak up three times their volume in broth without becoming mushy.

How do I know when my Authentic Seafood Paella has developed the socarrat?

Listen for a gentle crackling or “frying” sound at the end of the cooking process, which indicates the moisture has evaporated and the bottom layer of rice is beginning to toast in the oil. You can also carefully poke a spoon to the bottom of the pan to feel for a slightly resistant, tacky crust.

Can I make Authentic Seafood Paella ahead of time?

This dish is best enjoyed immediately after its short rest, as the rice will continue to soften and the seafood can become rubbery if reheated later. However, you can certainly prepare the shellfish stock and chop your vegetables a day in advance to make the final assembly much faster.

What should I do if the clams don’t open in my Authentic Seafood Paella?

Simply discard any shells that remain tightly closed after the steaming and resting period, as this usually indicates they were not alive before cooking. To help them along, you can briefly cover the pan with foil at the very end to create a concentrated burst of steam.

An overhead view of a large paella pan filled with seafood paella next to small tapas-style plates filled with small servings of the paella.

🌎 More Amazing International Recipes

Ready to make the best dish this side of Valencia? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large paella pan filled with freshly prepared Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella

This showstopping Authentic Spanish Seafood Paella is a Mediterranean masterpiece featuring saffron-infused Bomba rice, succulent shrimp, and meaty monkfish. Perfectly seasoned and topped with fresh shellfish, it’s the ultimate communal feast that delivers that legendary crispy socarrat in every bite!
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Resting Time10 minutes
Total Time1 hour
Course: Entree / Tapas
Cuisine: Spanish
Servings: 8
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

Do Ahead – Shellfish Stock

For the Seafood Paella

  • 1 teaspoon saffron
  • 1 lb shrimp cleaned, tails left on (if desired), patted dry with paper towels
  • 1 lb monkfish cut into bite-sized pieces, patted dry with paper towels.
  • salt and pepper
  • ¾ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • 2 medium onions finely chopped
  • 2 red bell peppers seeded and finely chopped
  • 6 cloves garlic minced
  • 7 Roma tomatoes grated, with juices
  • 4 cups bomba rice
  • 2 teaspoon Spanish smoked paprika
  • 15 littleneck clams
  • 15 mussels
  • 2 lemons cut into wedges, for garnish
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh chopped, for garnish

Instructions

Do Ahead (or use purchased Seafood Stock)

  • Make the shellfish stock. Refrigerate for up to 3 days. Or, freeze for up to 3 months.
    12 cups shellfish stock

Make the Seafood Paella

  • Use a mortar and pestle (or a bowl and your fingers) to crush the saffron. Add two tablespoons of hot shellfish stock and stir (and crush). Set aside.
    1 teaspoon saffron
  • Make sure the shrimp and monkfish are patted dry. Then, season them all over with salt and pepper.
    1 lb shrimp, 1 lb monkfish, salt and pepper
  • Heat the oil over medium-high heat in a paella pan (or shallow skillet).
    ¾ cup extra-virgin olive oil
  • Add the shrimp to the hot oil, and cook for about 1 to 2 minutes, just until they are just turning pink (they will finish cooking later). Remove them with a slotted spoon and set aside. Add the seasoned monkfish and sear for about 1 to 2 minutes. Remove them with a slotted spoon and set aside.
  • In the same oil, sauté the onion and red bell pepper until soft, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds to 1 minute. Add the grated tomatoes (with juice) and cook until most of the liquid is gone and the tomatoes are "jammy." Stir in a pinch of salt and pepper.
    2 medium onions, 2 red bell peppers, 6 cloves garlic, 7 Roma tomatoes
  • Stir in the rice and cook for about 2 minutes, ensuring it is coated in the oil. Stir in the paprika, and cook for an additional minute.
    4 cups bomba rice, 2 teaspoon Spanish smoked paprika
  • Carefully add the warm shellfish stock. Add 1 tablespoon plus 1 teaspoon of salt. Stir to make sure the rice is evenly distributed. At this point: DO NOT STIR ANYMORE. Simmer for 10 to 15 minutes, until the rice is not completely submerged, but the sauce is still bubbly.
  • Nestle the clams and mussels into the rice, hinge side down (so they will open their shells upward). Simmer for 10 minutes.
    15 littleneck clams, 15 mussels
  • Next, nestle in the shrimp and monkfish. Simmer for another 5 to 10 minutes. At this point, you should hear the rice starting to crackle. If it smells burnt, turn off the heat immediately. If the clams and/or mussels aren't opening, cover the pan with foil.
  • Turn off the heat and cover the pan with a kitchen towel (or two) for 10 minutes.
  • Remove the towels and garnish with lemon wedges and chopped parsley. Serve at once!
    2 lemons, 2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Rice Ratio: This recipe is specifically calibrated for Bomba rice, which requires a 1:3 ratio (1 part rice to 3 parts liquid). If you substitute with Calasparra or Arborio, you may need to reduce the stock slightly.
  • Seasoning the Stock: Because rice is very neutral, your stock must be well-seasoned. Taste your stock after adding the saffron; it should taste slightly “too salty” (like seawater) to ensure the finished dish is perfectly flavored.
  • The “No-Stir” Rule: Once the rice is distributed and the stock is simmering, do not stir the pan! Stirring releases starches and will result in a creamy, risotto-like texture rather than the distinct, firm grains required for authentic paella.
  • The Socarrat: To achieve the legendary crispy bottom crust, listen for a faint crackling sound during the final 60 seconds of cooking. If you aren’t sure, use a spoon to gently peek at the bottom—it should be dark golden and tacky, not black or burnt.
  • Shellfish Safety: Always discard any mussels or clams that remain tightly closed after the cooking and resting period.
  • The Rest: Do not skip the 5–10 minute rest under a clean kitchen towel! This final steam finishes the rice perfectly and helps the socarrat release from the bottom of the pan for easier serving.
If you are scaling down from the 20-inch outdoor version to a standard 16-inch pan (perfect for a stovetop), use these adjusted quantities to ensure the rice remains in that ideal thin layer:
  • Rice & Stock: 2 ½ cups Bomba rice and 7 ½ cups shellfish stock.
  • The Sofrito: 1 large yellow onion, 1 red bell pepper, 4 cloves of garlic, and 3 large Roma tomatoes (grated).
  • The Spices: ½ cup EVOO, ½ teaspoon saffron threads, and 1 teaspoon smoked Spanish paprika.
  • The Protein: 1 lb monkfish (cubed), 12–16 jumbo shrimp, 12 mussels, and 12 clams.
 

The Best Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing

by 2 Comments

Stop settling for store-bought bottles and whip up this creamy, tangy Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing in just five minutes. It features the perfect balance of sweet honey and savory mustard, making it an irresistible choice for dipping crispy chicken tenders, homemade soft pretzels, or drizzling over a fresh garden salad.

A person holding a spoonful of Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing over a jar of the same surrounded by a couple of plates holding side salads as well as a glass of white wine a small jar holding cherry tomatoes.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍯 The Ingredients

This recipe combines creamy pantry staples with bright citrus and a hint of smoky heat to create a perfectly balanced sauce that rivals any high-end steakhouse version. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing including mayonnaise, Dijon mustard, yellow mustard, honey, lemon juice, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Mayonnaise: For the creamiest texture and most authentic restaurant flavor, use a high-quality, full-fat mayonnaise. If you want a lighter version, you can swap half of the mayo for plain Greek yogurt or sour cream, though it will be significantly tangier.
  • Honey: Use a mild liquid honey for easy mixing; if you are looking for a vegan alternative, agave nectar or maple syrup can be used, though the flavor profile will shift slightly.
  • The Mustards: The combination of Dijon and yellow mustard is essential for depth; however, if you prefer a coarser texture, you can substitute the Dijon with stone-ground mustard.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice provides the best bright acidity, but apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar can be used as a 1:1 replacement in a pinch.
  • Whole Milk: This is used strictly to adjust the consistency; omit it entirely for a thick dipping sauce, or swap it with heavy cream for extra richness or a splash of water for a dairy-free thinning agent.
  • Spices: Smoked paprika adds a subtle woodsy undertone that sets this apart from basic recipes, while the cayenne pepper is meant to enhance the other flavors rather than provide heat—feel free to adjust the “zing” to your preference.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Restaurant-Quality Honey Mustard Dressing

A person using a spoon to transfer Dijon mustard from a small bowl into a larger glass bowl containing mustard and honey.
  1. Step 1: In a medium-sized bowl, add the mayo, honey, and Dijon mustard.
A person using a spoon to transfer yellow mustard from a small bowl into a larger glass bowl containing mayonnaise, honey, and Dijon mustard.
  1. Step 2: Next, add the yellow mustard.
A person using a citrus juicer to squeeze fresh lemon juice into a glass bowl filled with mayonnaise, honey, Dijon mustard, and yellow mustard.
  1. Step 3: Add the juice of half of a lemon, about 1 teaspoon.
A person holding a small bowl filled with seasonings that he is ready to dump into a bowl filled with mayonnaise, mustard, honey, and lemon juice.
  1. Step 4: Add the garlic powder, paprika, cayenne, salt, and pepper.
A person pouring a small amount of whole milk from a small bowl into a glass bowl holding the ingredients for Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing.
  1. Step 5: For a slightly thinner dressing (for salads), add a splash of milk (or water). Omit for a thicker dipping sauce.
A person pouring freshly prepared Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing from a glass bowl into a small glass jar on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 6: Whisk until combined and then transfer to a jar (or container) with a lid. Refrigerate until ready to use, for up to 2 weeks.

🍽️ How to Serve

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How long can I store Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing in the refrigerator?

When kept in an airtight container or a sealed glass jar, this sauce will stay fresh and flavorful for up to two weeks.

Can I make a dairy-free version of this Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing?

Absolutely; simply use a plant-based mayonnaise and replace the milk with a splash of water or unsweetened almond milk to achieve your desired consistency.

Is this Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing spicy?

While it contains a pinch of cayenne and smoked paprika, the primary flavor profile is sweet and tangy rather than hot. You can easily omit the pepper if you prefer a completely mild dressing.

How do I adjust the thickness of my Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing?

For a thick dip, omit the milk (or water). For a more pourable dressing, add a splash of milk to the sauce. The dressing will thicken somewhat after it chills.

Can I use Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing as a marinade for meat?

Yes, it works beautifully for coating chicken or pork before grilling or baking, as the sugars help create a delicious caramelized crust on the outside.

A person pouring Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing from a jar over a chopped salad in a large wooden salad bowl

🥗 More Classic Salad Dressing Recipes

Ready to make the best dressing (or dip) in town? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person holding a spoonful of Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing over a glass jar holding the same in front of a side salad on a salad plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

The Best Restaurant-Quality Honey Mustard Dressing

This creamy Restaurant-Style Honey Mustard Dressing strikes the perfect balance between sweet honey and tangy mustard with a hint of smoky spice. Ready in just five minutes, it’s the ultimate upgrade for salads, sandwiches, and dipping your favorite appetizers.
Prep Time5 minutes
chill time (recommended)1 hour
Total Time1 hour 5 minutes
Course: Dressing or Dip
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 124kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 medium bowl for mixing
  • 1 whisk or fork/spoon
  • 1 jar with lid, or container with lid

Ingredients

  • ½ cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoon honey
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon yellow mustard
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice fresh, usually from one half of a lemon
  • 1 teaspoon whole milk or water, see NOTES
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ¼ teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper
  • salt and pepper

Instructions

  • In a medium bowl, whisk the mayonnaise, honey, Dijon mustard, yellow mustard, lemon juice, milk (if using), garlic powder, paprika, cayenne, and a pinch each of salt and pepper until fully combined.
    ½ cup mayonnaise, 3 tablespoon honey, 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 1 tablespoon yellow mustard, 1 tablespoon lemon juice, 1 teaspoon whole milk, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, ¼ teaspoon smoked paprika, ¼ teaspoon cayenne pepper, salt and pepper
  • Transfer to a jar (or container) and cover. Serve at once, or better, chill for at least one hour. Give the jar a good shake (or stir) before serving.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Adjusting Thickness: For a thick, rich consistency perfect for dipping chicken tenders or pretzels, omit the milk (or water) entirely. Only add the liquid if you prefer a thinner, pourable dressing for salads.
  • Chill Before Serving: For the best flavor, let the dressing rest in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes. This allows the spices to meld and the mustard’s sharpness to mellow slightly.
  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container or mason jar for up to two weeks. If the dressing separates slightly while sitting, simply give it a quick stir or shake before using.
  • Customizing Heat: The cayenne pepper provides a very subtle depth. If you prefer a “spicy” honey mustard, feel free to double the cayenne or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 124kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 0.5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 152mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 71IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.2mg

The Ultimate Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan

by 2 Comments

This Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan is the ultimate comfort meal, featuring tender chuck roast and a rich, from-scratch gravy that is far better than any packet. It’s a hearty, nostalgic dinner that brings the best of this diner classic right to your kitchen with minimal effort. To truly take this dish over the top, serve these savory layers over our Best Mashed Potatoes with a thick slice of toasted Homemade Country White Bread.

A straight-on view of a slow cooker beef manhattan with brown gravy drizzled over the top of the bread, potatoes, and shredded roasted beef all on a white dinner plate.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe relies on fresh aromatics, savory pantry staples, and a well-marbled cut of beef to build a deep, complex flavor profile that eliminates the need for processed seasoning packets. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for slow cooker beef Manhattan on a grey wooden background including a chuck roast, beef broth, onion, garlic, fresh herbs, Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, mashed potatoes, bread, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chuck Roast: This is the ideal cut for slow cooking because the marbled fat breaks down over time, resulting in incredibly tender beef. If you can’t find chuck, a rump roast or bottom round will work, though they may be slightly leaner.
  • Beef Stock: For the best flavor, use a high-quality beef bone broth. If you are using a standard stock, opt for low-sodium so you can control the salt level yourself.
  • Balsamic Vinegar: This adds a subtle acidity that cuts through the richness of the beef. If you don’t have balsamic, a splash of red wine or red wine vinegar is a great alternative.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh rosemary and thyme provide a bright, earthy aroma that dried herbs can’t quite match. However, if you must use dried, use 1 teaspoon of each and add them at the beginning of the cook time.
  • White Bread: A sturdy, thick-cut bread is traditional for a Manhattan to ensure it holds up under the gravy. While we recommend Homemade Country White Bread, a thick-cut sourdough or Texas toast also works beautifully.
  • Cornstarch Slurry: This is the secret to a glossy, “no-packet” gravy. Always mix the cornstarch with cold water before adding it to the hot liquid to prevent clumping.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Beef Manhattan

  • Don’t Rush the Sear: The deep brown crust created during the searing process is where the “umami” flavor lives. Since we aren’t using flavor packets, this step is essential for creating a dark, rich gravy.
  • Low and Slow is Best: While most slow cookers have a “High” setting, chuck roast benefits from the “Low” setting. The longer, gentler cook time allows the connective tissues to fully break down, resulting in beef that melts in your mouth.
  • Skim the Fat: Chuck roast can be a fatty cut. If you see a lot of oil rising to the top of the liquid after cooking, use a wide spoon or a fat separator to skim off the excess grease before thickening the gravy for a cleaner, richer flavor.
  • Rest the Meat: Let the beef rest for about 10 minutes while you are thickening the gravy. This allows the juices to redistribute so the beef remains moist and succulent when you portion it out.
  • Strain for Silky Gravy: For a truly restaurant-quality finish, pour the cooking liquid through a fine-mesh strainer before adding your cornstarch slurry. This removes the softened onions, garlic bits, and herb remnants, leaving you with a perfectly smooth, silky gravy that looks beautiful on the plate.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan

A large beef chuck roast that has been seasoned with salt and pepper and is being seared in oil in a large non-stick skillet.
  1. Step 1: Season the roast with salt and pepper. Sear on both sides in the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Set aside once browned.
A person using a large wooden spoon to stir strips of onion that are being sautéed in a large non-stick skillet on an induction stovetop.
  1. Step 2: Add the sliced onions to the skillet and sauté until softened, about 4 minutes. Add the garlic and cook for another 30 seconds. Deglaze the pan with a splash of beef broth.
A person pouring beef stock from a glass measuring cup into a slow cooker that contains a partially seared chuck roast that is topped with strips of sautéed onions.
  1. Step 3: Place the roast in your slow cooker and top with the sautéed onions and garlic. Pour in the beef stock, Worcestershire sauce, and balsamic vinegar.
A person placing a bundle of fresh herbs that have been tied together with kitchen twine into a slow cooker filled with a partially seared chuck roast, beef stock, and sautéed onions.
  1. Step 4: Season with salt and pepper and nestle the herbs next to the roast. Cook on LOW to 8 to 10 hours.
A person pouring a cornstarch slurry into a saucepan that is filled with a strained liquid from a slow cooker beef Manhattan.
  1. Step 5: Remove the roast, strain the liquid, and pour it into a saucepan. Whisk in the cornstarch slurry, and stir until thickened.
Brown gravy being poured over the top of a serving of slow cooker beef Manhattan including shredded roast beef over mashed potatoes on top of homemade sliced white bread.
  1. Step 6: Roughly pull the beef apart and serve it over bread topped with mashed potatoes. Pour on plenty of gravy!

Expert Tip: The Secret to Lump-Free Gravy

Always whisk your cornstarch into cold water before adding it to the hot liquid to prevent irreversible clumping. While you can thicken the gravy directly in the slow cooker on High, transferring it to a saucepan is the pro move; the direct heat activates the cornstarch much faster and allows you to easily whisk the gravy to a perfectly smooth, silky consistency.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Classic Assembly: Place a slice of toasted white bread on the plate (cut diagonally for a professional diner look). Top the bread with a generous scoop of Best Mashed Potatoes, then pile a heap of the tender beef over the top.
  • The Gravy Pour: Generously ladle the hot, silky gravy over the beef and potatoes, allowing it to cascade down and soak into the bread.
  • Add a Green Side: Balance the rich “meat and potatoes” flavors with a bright side dish. Southern-style green beans, roasted broccoli, or maple-glazed carrots pair perfectly with this meal.
  • The Finishing Touch: Don’t forget the fresh chopped parsley! It provides a necessary pop of color and a hit of freshness that cuts through the savory gravy.
  • Family Style: If you aren’t plating individually, place the beef on a large platter surrounded by a ring of mashed potatoes, and serve the gravy in a boat on the side so everyone can add as much as they like.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Why is it called a Beef Manhattan?

This dish actually originated in Indianapolis, Indiana, during the 1940s. It was created at a local deli and named after the famous New York City borough to give the hearty, Midwestern meal an air of sophisticated, big-city flair.

What is the best cut of meat for a Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan?

A well-marbled chuck roast is the top choice because it becomes incredibly tender after a long simmer. The fat breaks down during the process, creating a succulent texture that pairs perfectly with homemade gravy.

Can I make this Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan ahead of time?

Absolutely. You can prepare the roast and gravy a day in advance and store them in the refrigerator. In fact, the flavors often deepen overnight, making the meal taste even better when reheated the next day.

How do I store leftovers of my Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan?

Keep the meat and gravy in an airtight container in the fridge for up to four days. For the best results, store the bread and potatoes separately to prevent them from becoming too soft before you are ready to eat.

A person pouring brown gravy from a glass gravy boat over the top of a serving of slow cooker beef Manhattan on a white dinner plate.

😋 More Amazing Beefy Slow Cooker Recipes

Ready to make the best beef comfort food this side of Manhattan? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a slow cooker beef manhattan with brown gravy drizzled over the top of the bread, potatoes, and shredded roasted beef all on a white dinner plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Slow Cooker Beef Manhattan

This hearty diner classic features tender, melt-in-your-mouth chuck roast and a rich, from-scratch gravy served over thick bread and creamy mashed potatoes. It’s the ultimate "meat and potatoes" comfort meal made easy in the slow cooker without any processed packets.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time10 hours
Total Time10 hours 15 minutes
Course: Entree / Slow Cooker
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 427kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 3½ lb chuck roast
  • salt and pepper for seasoning roast
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 large onion halved and sliced
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 cups beef stock or broth
  • 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar
  • 2 sprigs rosemary fresh
  • 3 sprigs thyme fresh
  • 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup cornstarch mixed with 4 tablespoon of cold water to make a slurry.
  • white bread thick slices
  • mashed potatoes
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Liberally season the roast all over with salt and pepper. Heat the oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Once the oil is shimmering, add the roast and sear on each side for about 5 minutes per side, until browned all over. Remove the roast from the pan and place it in your slow cooker.
    3½ lb chuck roast, salt and pepper, 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • Add the onion to the pan and sauté until softened, about 4 minutes. Stir in the garlic and sauté for another 30 seconds. Add a splash of the beef broth and use a spatula to scrape up any stuck-on bits in the pan. Pour over the top of the roast in your slow cooker.
    1 large onion, 4 cloves garlic, 2 cups beef stock
  • Add the rest of the beef stock (or broth), Worcestershire sauce, and balsamic vinegar. Tie the herbs together with a string and nestle them into the liquid, placing them next to the roast. Add the salt (1½ tsp) and pepper (1 tsp).
    2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar, 2 sprigs rosemary, 3 sprigs thyme, 1½ teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Cover and cook on LOW for 8 to 10 hours, or until the meat is very tender. It should be "fork tender," but not so much that it completely shreds into strands.
  • Use a couple of large spatulas to remove the roast from the slow cooker. It will probably fall apart somewhat because it is so tender. This is good!
  • Carefully strain the liquid into a saucepan, pressing down on the solids to release all the delicious juices. Make the cornstarch slurry in a small bowl (¼ cup cornstarch mixed with ¼ cup cold water). Whisk in the slurry a little at a time, stirring and whisking constantly. Stir until the desired thickness is reached (usually 2 to 3 minutes).
    ¼ cup cornstarch
  • Place sliced bread on each guest's plate. Top with mashed potatoes, a generous portion of chunks of beef, and then topped with a generous pouring of gravy. Garnish with chopped parsley, if desired.
    white bread, mashed potatoes, 2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The “No-Packet” Secret: Since this recipe avoids processed seasoning packets, searing the beef is critical. That deep brown crust on the roast is what provides the rich color and “umami” depth for your homemade gravy.
  • Straining for Quality: For a truly silky gravy, pour the cooking liquid through a fine-mesh strainer into your saucepan or back into the slow cooker. This removes the bits of onion, garlic, and herbs, leaving you with a smooth, glossy finish.
  • Thickening Preference: While you can thicken the gravy in the slow cooker on High, using a saucepan on the stove is much faster and allows you to better control the thickness. If the gravy gets too thick, simply whisk in a splash of extra beef stock.
  • Make-Ahead & Storage: The flavors in the beef and gravy actually improve overnight! Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. The beef and gravy also freeze beautifully for up to 3 months (store without the bread or potatoes).

Nutrition

Calories: 427kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 137mg | Sodium: 773mg | Potassium: 851mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 55mg | Iron: 5mg

Easy Leftover Ham Fried Rice

by 2 Comments

Transform your holiday leftovers into a vibrant, one-pan dinner with this Easy Leftover Ham Fried Rice. By pairing savory diced ham with fresh carrots, onions, and aromatic ginger, you can create a satisfying “flavor reset” that feels entirely different from your traditional Easter feast. It’s a quick, family-friendly meal that ensures none of that delicious ham goes to waste!

An overhead view of an oval platter containing a large serving of leftover ham fried rice with a colorful napkin and a large serving spoon nearby.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍚 The Ingredients

This dish utilizes a mix of savory holiday leftovers, fresh garden aromatics, and classic pantry staples to create a perfectly balanced and flavorful one-pan dinner. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for leftover ham fried rice on a wooden grey background including cubed ham, day-old rice, carrots, onion, ginger, garlic, peas, scallions, and Chinese seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Leftover Ham: Any variety of holiday ham works beautifully, whether it’s honey-glazed, smoked, or spiral-sliced. If you don’t have leftovers, thick-cut deli ham or Canadian bacon are excellent substitutes.
  • Day-Old Jasmine Rice: Using cold, dry steamed rice is the secret to achieving that distinct fried rice texture without it becoming gummy. If you only have fresh rice, spread it on a baking sheet and pop it in the freezer for 15–20 minutes to dry it out before cooking.
  • Peanut Oil: This is the preferred choice for its high smoke point and nutty aroma, but you can easily swap it for canola, vegetable, or grapeseed oil.
  • Oyster Sauce: This ingredient provides a rich, savory “umami” depth that mimics restaurant-style fried rice. If you don’t have it, you can substitute it with Hoisin sauce or an extra splash of soy sauce mixed with a pinch of brown sugar.
  • Fresh Ginger and Garlic: While fresh aromatics offer the most punch, you can substitute ¼ teaspoon of ground ginger and ½ teaspoon of garlic powder in a pinch.
  • Sweet Peas: Frozen peas are ideal because they add a pop of bright green color and sweetness; there is no need to thaw them, as they will heat through instantly when tossed with the hot rice.
  • Soy Sauce: To make this dish gluten-free, simply swap the soy sauce for Tamari or coconut aminos.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Ham Fried Rice

  • The Golden Rule of Cold Rice: Always use cold, day-old rice. Freshly cooked rice contains too much moisture, which will cause the dish to become gummy and mushy. If you didn’t plan, cook a fresh batch, spread it out on a large baking sheet, and place it in the freezer for 15–20 minutes to dry out the grains before frying.
  • Mise en Place is Essential: Stir-frying is a high-heat, fast-moving process. Have all your ingredients—the diced ham, chopped veggies, minced aromatics, and whisked eggs—prepped and sitting in bowls next to the stove before you turn on the burner.
  • The “Small Dice” for Carrots: Since this recipe uses fresh carrots, ensure you dice them very small (about the size of a pea). This allows them to soften and become tender-crisp in the pan at the same rate the onions cook, eliminating the need to par-boil them.
  • Sear the Ham First: Don’t skip the step of browning the ham. Searing the ham cubes in the peanut oil creates crispy, caramelized edges and infuses the oil with smoky flavor that carries through the entire dish.
  • Use High Heat: To get that signature “restaurant-style” toasted flavor, keep your heat on medium-high to high. You want the rice to “crackle” and fry in the pan rather than steaming.
  • The Egg “Well” Technique: Pushing the rice to the outer edges of the pan to create a “well” in the center allows the eggs to cook directly on the hot surface of the pan. This ensures you get distinct, fluffy ribbons of egg rather than a coating that makes the rice look yellow and wet.
  • Watch the Salt: Easter hams are often heavily salted or honey-glazed. Between the ham, the soy sauce, and the oyster sauce, you likely won’t need to add any extra salt. Always taste a bite of the finished dish before reaching for the salt shaker!

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Leftover Ham Fried Rice

Pieces of cubed left-over ham being lightly fried in peanut oil in a large wok on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Heat the oil in a wok (or large skillet) over high heat. Add the cubed ham and stir-fry until it gets crispy and lightly browned on the edges. Remove and set aside.
A person using two wooden spoons to stir simmering chopped onion and carrots in oil in a large wok on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Add a little more oil and add the carrots and onion. Stir-fry until soft, about 3 to 4 minutes.
A person holding a small bowl of minced ginger in one hand and a small bowl of minced garlic over a wok of sautéed chopped onion and carrots.
  1. Step 3: Add the minced garlic and ginger and stir-fry for another 30 seconds.
A person transferring a bowl of day-old white rice into a large wok filled with carrots, onions, garlic, and ginger that are being stir-fried.
  1. Step 4: Add one more tablespoon of oil, and then stir in the day-old rice.
A person transferring crispy chunks of ham from a white dinner plate into a large wok filled with fried rice, onions, carrots, and aromtics.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the crispy ham.
A person pouring a brown stir-fry sauce over leftover ham fried rice in a large wok on a gas stove.
  1. Step 6: In a small bowl, combine the soy sauce, sesame oil, and oyster sauce. Pour over the fried rice and stir to combine.
A person transferring frozen sweet peas from a small glass bowl into a large wok filled with simmering leftover ham fried rice.
  1. Step 7: Stir in the peas and half of the scallions.
A person pouring three lightly beaten eggs from a small glass bowl into a wok that has ham fried rice pushed to the side, leaving space for the eggs to cook.
  1. Step 8: Push the fried rice to one side of the wok. Add the beaten eggs to the open space in the wok and cook until starting to scramble. Stir into the rice. Serve at once with extra scallions for garnish.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Serve Immediately: Fried rice is best enjoyed piping hot, straight from the wok or skillet, while the rice grains still have their “toasted” texture and the ham is slightly crispy.
  • Fresh Garnishes: Top each bowl with a generous handful of fresh sliced scallions and a sprinkle of toasted sesame seeds for added crunch and visual appeal.
  • Add Some Heat: For those who like a spicy kick, serve with a side of Sriracha, chili garlic sauce, or a drizzle of crispy chili oil to cut through the richness of the ham.
  • Light Side Pairings: Balance the savory, salty flavors of the fried rice by serving it with homemade scallion pancakes, authentic hot and sour soup, or braised bok choy.
  • Family Style: Transfer the rice to a large communal serving bowl and let everyone scoop their own portions, making it a casual and easy post-holiday dinner.
  • A Bright Finish: A tiny squeeze of fresh lime juice just before eating can brighten the deep umami flavors of the soy and oyster sauces.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use brown rice for Leftover Ham Fried Rice?

Yes, as long as it is cold and dry. It adds a nuttier flavor and more fiber to the dish, though you may need a tiny splash of extra soy sauce, as brown rice is more absorbent.

How long can I store Leftover Ham Fried Rice in the refrigerator?

It will stay fresh for up to 3 to 4 days when kept in an airtight container. Be sure to reheat it thoroughly in a hot pan or the microwave before serving.

Is it possible to freeze Leftover Ham Fried Rice for later?

Absolutely. Place the cooled mixture into freezer-safe bags or containers for up to 3 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight and stir-fry it again with a splash of water or oil to restore the original texture.

Do I need a wok to make Leftover Ham Fried Rice?

Not at all. A large non-stick skillet or a heavy-bottomed cast iron pan works perfectly well, provided it is big enough to toss the ingredients together without overcrowding the surface.

How can I make a vegetarian version of Leftover Ham Fried Rice?

Simply omit the meat and replace it with extra vegetables like mushrooms, bell peppers, or firm tofu cubes. You should also use a vegetarian stir-fry sauce or “mushroom sauce” instead of the traditional oyster-based option.

What is the best way to reheat Leftover Ham Fried Rice?

The best method is to toss it back into a hot skillet with a teaspoon of oil or a splash of water to keep the grains from drying out. This helps maintain the slightly crispy texture of the meat and vegetables.

A person holding a fork over a white bowl filled with a serving of leftover ham fried rice with a colorful napkin underneath the bowl.

😋 Other Ways to Use Up Leftover Ham

Ready to make the best fried rice this side of Chinatown? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a fork being held over a white bowl filled with a serving of leftover ham fried rice with a colorful napkin underneath the bowl.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Easy Leftover Ham Fried Rice

Transform your holiday leftovers into a vibrant, restaurant-quality meal with this savory and satisfying fried rice. Featuring crispy diced ham, fresh-chopped carrots, and aromatic ginger and garlic, this one-pan dinner offers a delicious "flavor reset" that is both quick to prepare and incredibly comforting.
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Total Time35 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: Chinese / American
Servings: 6
Calories: 402kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Wok or large sturdy skillet

Ingredients

  • 4 cups steamed white rice day-old, cooked (2 cups uncooked)
  • 3 tablespoon peanut oil or vegetable, divided
  • 2 cups ham cubed
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 1 cup carrots chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon ginger fresh, minced
  • 3 tablespoon soy sauce
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seed oil
  • 1 tablespoon oyster sauce
  • ½ cup sweet peas frozen (okay if not thawed)
  • 3 bunches scallions chopped, divided
  • 3 large eggs lightly beaten

Instructions

Do Ahead – Make the Rice

  • Prepare the rice and spread it out on a baking pan to dry out. Do this the day before, if possible (see NOTES).
    4 cups steamed white rice

Make the Fried Rice

  • Heat 1 tablespoon of the oil in a wok (or skillet) over high heat until shimmering. Add the ham and fry until they become slightly crispy and charred in some places, about 4 minutes. Stirring often. Set aside.
    3 tablespoon peanut oil, 2 cups ham
  • Add another tbps of oil and add the onions and carrots. Stir-fry for another 3 to 4 minutes, until starting to soften. Stir in the garlic and ginger and stir-fry for another 30 seconds.
    1 cup onion, 1 cup carrots, 3 cloves garlic, 1 tablespoon ginger
  • Add the final tablespoon of oil and stir in the rice. Stir to fully coat.
  • Stir in the crispy ham cubes.
  • In a small bowl, mix the soy sauce, sesame oil, and oyster sauce. Stir in the sauce and stir-fry for about 1 minute.
    3 tablespoon soy sauce, 1 tablespoon sesame seed oil, 1 tablespoon oyster sauce
  • Stir in the peas and half of the scallions. Cook, stirring often, for 1 minute.
    ½ cup sweet peas, 3 bunches scallions
  • Push the fried rice to one side of the wok (or skillet) and add the beaten eggs to the open spot. Let the eggs cook for about 1 minute, and then stir them to help them scramble. Stir the egg ribbons into the fried rice.
    3 large eggs
  • Serve at once with the remaining chopped scallions for garnish.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • The Rice Secret: For the best texture, always use cold, day-old Jasmine rice. Freshly cooked rice is too moist and will turn gummy in the pan; if you must use fresh rice, spread it on a baking sheet and chill it in the freezer for 15 minutes to dry out the grains before frying.
  • Watch the Salt: Between the salty holiday ham, soy sauce, and oyster sauce, you likely won’t need to add any extra salt. Always taste the finished dish before seasoning further.
  • Prep Ahead: Stir-frying happens very quickly once the pan is hot. Have your ham, vegetables, and sauces prepped and ready to go next to the stove before you begin cooking.
  • High Heat: Don’t be afraid to turn up the heat! Using a high flame helps “toast” the rice and caramelize the ham, giving the dish its signature smoky, restaurant-style flavor.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 37g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 122mg | Sodium: 1193mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 3819IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 55mg | Iron: 2mg

Cheesy Hashbrown Casserole from Scratch

by 4 Comments

This cheesy Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch is the ultimate versatile side dish, swapping out canned soups for a rich, velvety homemade cream sauce. It’s an essential addition to any holiday brunch or weekend breakfast, but it also shines as a comforting side for a summer BBQ or a formal holiday feast. Once you taste the difference that fresh ingredients make, this elevated classic will become a staple on your table all year long.

A hashbrown casserole from scratch in a white baking dish with a portion of the casserole missing.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧀 The Ingredients

This elevated version relies on fresh pantry staples and wholesome dairy to create a rich, savory foundation finished with a signature buttery crunch. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for hashbrown casserole from scratch on a grey wooden background including russet potatoes, cheddar cheese, chicken stock, butter, milk, flour, onion, corn flakes, sour cream, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Russet Potatoes: For the best texture, peel and grate fresh russets, then rinse them in cold water and pat them thoroughly dry to remove excess starch. If you are in a pinch, you can substitute a 30-oz bag of frozen shredded hashbrowns (thawed and patted dry).
  • Chicken Broth & Whole Milk: This combination creates a richer, more complex flavor than milk alone. To make this dish vegetarian, simply swap the chicken broth for vegetable stock.
  • Sour Cream: This provides the classic tang and creamy mouthfeel. You can substitute plain Greek yogurt for a slightly lighter option with a similar flavor profile.
  • Shredded Cheddar: Sharp cheddar gives the best flavor “pop” against the potatoes. For the creamiest melt, we recommend grating your cheese fresh from the block to avoid the powdery anti-caking agents found in pre-shredded bags. We use our food processor (with the shredding attachment).
  • Chopped Onion: Fresh yellow or white onion adds a lovely bite. If you have picky eaters who dislike the texture of onions, you can omit the fresh onion and increase the onion powder by half a teaspoon.
  • Crushed Corn Flakes: This is the traditional topping for that iconic crunch. If you don’t have cornflakes on hand, crushed Ritz crackers or Panko breadcrumbs mixed with the melted butter are excellent alternatives.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

😎 Tips and Tricks for the Perfect Hashbrown Casserole

  • Whisk the Sauce Gradually: When making your homemade cream sauce, pour the chicken broth and milk in slowly while whisking constantly. This prevents lumps from forming and ensures your “from scratch” base is as silky-smooth as the canned version (but much tastier!).
  • Grate Your Own Cheese: For the ultimate melt, buy a block of sharp cheddar and grate it yourself. Pre-shredded cheeses are coated in potato starch to keep them from clumping in the bag, which can prevent them from melting smoothly into your sauce.
  • Don’t Over-Crush the Corn Flakes: You want a variety of textures in your topping—some fine crumbs and some larger flakes. This creates a more interesting, “shatteringly crisp” crust compared to a fine powder.
  • The Make-Ahead Method: If you’re serving this for Easter brunch, assemble the casserole (minus the corn flake topping) the night before. Cover it tightly with foil and refrigerate. When you’re ready to bake, add the topping and give it an extra 5–10 minutes in the oven since it’s starting from a cold temperature.
  • Let it Rest: Resist the urge to scoop into the dish immediately! Let the casserole sit for 10 minutes after it comes out of the oven. This allows the sauce to thicken and set, ensuring you get a perfect, cohesive scoop every time.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Hashbrown Casserole from Scratch

A large white pot on a gas stove filled with whole russet potatoes simmering in boiling water.
  1. Step 1: Par-boil the unpeeled potatoes for 15 minutes. Drain and chill until cold.
A person lifting strings of par-boiled potatoes that have been shredded in a food processor.
  1. Step 2: Peel chilled potatoes and then shred them on a box grater or in your food processor with the shredding attachment.
A person using a wooden spoon to stir a thickened cream of chicken and sour cream sauce in a saucepan on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: In a saucepan over medium heat, melt the butter and sauté the onions. Add the flour and cook for 1 minute. Whisk in the stock and milk, stirring until thickened. Stir in the sour cream and season with onion and garlic powders, salt, and pepper.
A person using a large wooden spoon to stir shredded potatoes, shredded cheddar cheese, chopped onions, and a homemade cream of chicken sour cream sauce in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 4: In a large bowl, combine the grated potatoes, sauce, and shredded cheese. Gently mix until combined.
A person sprinkling crushed corn flakes over the top of a white baking dish that is filled with a hashbrown casserole from scratch.
  1. Step 5: Grease a 9×13″ baking dish and spread the filling. Top with crushed cornflakes that have been tossed with 2 tbsps of melted butter.
A person with oven mitts holding a white baking dish that contains a freshly baked homemade hashbrown casserole.
  1. Step 6: Bake at 350°F (175°C) for 40 to 45 minutes, or until golden and bubbly. Let rest for 10 minutes before serving.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Ultimate Easter Brunch: Pair this casserole with a honey-glazed ham, deviled eggs, and a fresh spring salad for a traditional holiday spread that hits every flavor note.
  • The BBQ Companion: Because it is so rich and cheesy, this dish is the perfect “cool” counterpoint to smoky BBQ favorites like pulled pork, smoked beef brisket, or grilled chicken wings.
  • Family-Style Presentation: Serve this directly from your prettiest ceramic baking dish or a seasoned cast-iron skillet to keep it warm on the table and lean into that cozy, homemade aesthetic.
  • Add a Fresh Garnish: Just before serving, sprinkle a generous amount of fresh chopped chives, green onions, or parsley over the top. The bright green color pops against the golden crust, and the fresh herbs cut through the richness of the cheese.
  • Individual Portions: For a more formal holiday dinner, you can bake the mixture in greased ramekins. This gives every guest their own personal casserole with maximum “crunchy edge” surface area!
  • The “Breakfast for Dinner” Star: Serve a large scoop alongside crispy bacon and best-ever scrambled eggs for a comforting weeknight meal that the whole family will love.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make this Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch ahead of time?

Yes! You can assemble the entire dish up to 24 hours in advance. Simply cover it tightly and store it in the refrigerator, then add the crunchy topping just before you pop it into the oven.

Can I use frozen potatoes for a Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch?

Absolutely. While fresh russets offer the best texture, a store-bought bag of shredded potatoes works well, too. Just be sure to thaw them completely and pat them dry to prevent the final dish from becoming watery.

How should I store leftovers of my Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch?

Keep any remaining portions in an airtight container in the fridge for up to four days. To maintain the crispiness of the topping, reheat it in the oven or an air fryer instead of the microwave.

Why is a Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch better than the version with canned soup?

Making your own cream base allows you to control the sodium levels and avoid artificial preservatives. The result is a much cleaner, richer flavor with a velvety texture that processed ingredients simply can’t match.

Can you freeze a Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch?

Yes, this dish freezes beautifully. Assemble it in a freezer-safe container without the corn flake topping, wrap it twice in plastic wrap and foil, and store it for up to three months. Thaw it in the refrigerator overnight before baking as directed.

An overhead view of a person using two red-checkered linens to hold the handles of a white baking dish containing an untouched hashbrown casserole from scratch.

🍳 More Classic Breakfast or Brunch Recipes

Ready to make the best hashbrown casserole of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag #HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of hashbrown casserole from scratch in a white baking dish with a portion of the casserole missing.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Cheesy Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch

Ditch the canned soup for this creamy, Cheesy Hashbrown Casserole From Scratch. Featuring a velvety homemade sauce and a signature buttery crunch, it’s the ultimate comfort food side for Easter brunch, holiday dinners, or your next family BBQ.
Prep Time30 minutes
Cook Time1 hour
Chill time1 hour
Total Time2 hours 30 minutes
Course: Breakfast, Lunch, or Dinner
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 428kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Box grater or food processor with shredding attachment
  • 9"x13" baking dish

Ingredients

  • 2½ lbs russet potatoes
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • ½ cup onions chopped (optional)
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup whole milk
  • 1 cup chicken stock or broth
  • 1 cup sour cream
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 cups cheddar cheese freshly grated
  • cooking spray

For the Topping

  • 1½ cups cornflakes
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

Instructions

  • Place the whole (unpeeled) potatoes in a large pot of salted water (about 1 tablespoon salt). Bring to a boil and simmer the potatoes for 15 – 17 minutes. They should be piercable by a sharp knife, but still very firm. Drain them immediately and place them in an ice bath in a large bowl. Let them chill for an hour, or even better, place them in the fridge until completely chilled (several hours to overnight).
    2½ lbs russet potatoes
  • Preheat oven to 350°F (175°F).
  • Peel the potatoes and grate them using the large holes of a box grater, or in your food processor with the medium shredding attachment. Squeeze any excess water from the potatoes with a kitchen towel. Set aside.
  • In a medium saucepan, melt the butter (4 tbsp) over medium heat. Add the onions (if using) and sauté until softened, about 4 minutes. Whisk in the flour and cook for 1 minute, stirring often.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter, ½ cup onions, ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Slowly whisk in the milk and stock. Keep whisking and stirring to remove any lumps until it is a thick, smooth gravy. Remove from the heat and stir in the sour cream, onion powder, garlic powder, salt, and pepper. Let cool slightly.
    1 cup whole milk, 1 cup chicken stock, 1 cup sour cream, 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 2 teaspoon Kosher salt, 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • In a large bowl, combine the grated potatoes, sauce, and shredded cheese. Toss gently until combined.
    2 cups cheddar cheese
  • Spray a 9×13" baking dish with cooking spray. Spread the filling evenly into the dish.
    cooking spray
  • In a small bowl, add the crushed cornflakes with the melted butter (2 tbsp). Toss to combine. Top the casserole with buttered cornflakes.
    1½ cups cornflakes, 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Bake the casserole (uncovered) for 40 to 45 minutes, until golden and bubbly. Let the casserole rest for about 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Potato Prep: If using fresh russets, rinse the grated potatoes in cold water and wring them out in a clean kitchen towel until very dry. If using frozen hashbrowns, ensure they are fully thawed and patted dry to prevent a watery casserole.
  • Grate Your Own Cheese: For the smoothest melt, grate your cheddar fresh from the block. Pre-shredded cheese is coated in potato starch, which can make the homemade sauce feel slightly grainy.
  • Make-Ahead Tip: You can assemble the casserole up to 24 hours in advance. Store it covered in the refrigerator, but wait to add the corn flake topping until just before you pop it in the oven to ensure maximum crunch.
  • Topping Variations: If you don’t have corn flakes, crushed Ritz crackers, or Panko breadcrumbs mixed with the melted butter are excellent substitutes.
  • Vegetarian Option: To make this dish vegetarian-friendly, simply swap the chicken broth for an equal amount of vegetable stock.

Nutrition

Calories: 428kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 72mg | Sodium: 877mg | Potassium: 767mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 872IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 294mg | Iron: 3mg

Pan-Roasted Asparagus with Silky Béarnaise Sauce

by Leave a Comment

This Pan-Roasted Asparagus with Silky Blender Béarnaise is the ultimate elegant addition to your spring table. Along with creamy Potatoes Dauphinoise, it ranks as one of the perfect sides to Holiday Ham for a sophisticated and balanced feast. The combination of charred, snappy spears and velvety, herb-infused sauce is sure to be the star of your Easter celebration.

A rectangle white platter filled with Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce with a glass gravy boat filled with the Béarnaise sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥚 The Ingredients

By pairing crisp, seasonal spears with a rich, herb-infused emulsion and a bright wine reduction, this dish achieves a perfect balance of buttery decadence and fresh spring flavor. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce on a grey wooden background including asparagus, egg yolks, tarragon, vinegar, lemon juice, shallots, butter, wine, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Thick Asparagus: Choose thick spears for this recipe; they hold up much better to the high-heat pan-roasting process and provide a more satisfying “snap” than pencil-thin varieties.
  • Champagne Vinegar: This offers a delicate, sophisticated acidity. You can easily substitute it with white wine vinegar or tarragon vinegar; in a pinch, lemon juice can work as the acid base.
  • Dry White Wine: A crisp Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio adds depth to the reduction. If you prefer to cook without alcohol, you can substitute the wine with a splash of chicken or vegetable broth.
  • Shallots: These provide a mild, sweet onion flavor that is traditional for Béarnaise. If unavailable, use the white parts of green onions or very finely minced red onion.
  • Fresh Tarragon: This is the signature herb for the sauce. If you must use dried tarragon, use 1 teaspoon for every tablespoon of fresh, and be sure to add it to the vinegar reduction so it can rehydrate.
  • Unsalted Butter: Using unsalted butter allows you to control the seasoning perfectly. If you only have salted butter, simply omit the additional salt called for in the recipe and season to taste at the end.
  • Egg Yolks: Use large, room-temperature egg yolks. They bond more easily with the hot butter, resulting in a much more stable and velvety emulsion.
  • Olive Oil & Butter (for searing): Using a combination of both allows for a higher smoke point from the oil while still getting that rich, nutty flavor from the butter as the asparagus chars.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Asparagus with Béarnaise

  • Dry the Asparagus Thoroughly: After blanching and shocking the asparagus in ice water, make sure to pat the spears completely dry with a clean kitchen towel. Any lingering moisture will cause the asparagus to steam in the pan rather than achieving those beautiful, golden-brown char marks.
  • The “Snap” Test: To easily remove the woody, tough ends, hold an asparagus spear at both ends and bend it until it snaps naturally. This ensures you are only serving the most tender, flavorful part of the vegetable.
  • Don’t Skip the Ice Bath: Shocking the blanched asparagus in ice water is the secret to that vibrant “Easter green” color. It stops the cooking process immediately, preventing the spears from turning a dull olive color during the final sear.
  • Keep the Sauce Warm: While you are pan-roasting the asparagus, keep your Béarnaise in a warm spot, such as the blender jar or a pre-warmed thermos. If the sauce cools down too much, it will become too thick to pour elegantly over the spears.
  • Avoid Overcrowding the Pan: For the best “pan-roasted” results, sear the asparagus in a single layer. If you are cooking for a large crowd, work in batches so the spears have enough room to develop a delicious crust without steaming.
  • Plate at the Last Minute: For the most professional presentation, wait until you are ready to serve before drizzling the sauce. This keeps the asparagus snappy and ensures the Béarnaise is at its silkiest, most decadent consistency when it hits the table.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Pan-Seared Asparagus with Béarnaise

A person dumping chopped, fresh tarragon from a small white bowl into a small saucepan containing simmering vinegar, white wine, and chopped shallots.
  1. Step 1: Simmer the vinegar, wine, shallots, tarragon, and pepper over medium heat until reduced by half.
A person transferring a pile of asparagus stalks from a white bowl into a pot filled with boiling water on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Cut the tough ends of the asparagus and then boil in salted water for 2 minutes (after the water comes back to a boil).
A person adding sprigs of asparagus that have been blanched in boiling water into an ice bath in a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 3: Transfer the asparagus immediately to an ice bath.
A person using a large pair of tongs to sauté asparagus in a large non-stick skillet with olive oil, butter, salt, and pepper.
  1. Step 4: Sauté the dried asparagus in a skillet with oil and butter until softened and lightly browned. Season with salt and pepper.
A person pouring melted butter through the top opening in the lid of a blender.
  1. Step 5: Add the egg yolks, reduced shallot liquid, and salt to the blender. Stream in the melted butter and pulse until thickened, only a few seconds.
A person pouring blender Béarnaise sauce from a glass gravy boat onto a pile of pan-seared asparagus on a white rectangular platter.
  1. Step 6: Stir in lemon juice and tarragon to the Béarnaise. Plate the asparagus and pour ribbons of the sauce across the center of the spears.

Expert Tip: The “Blanch-and-Char” Secret

To achieve a truly restaurant-quality result, blanch your asparagus in heavily salted water for just 2 minutes before shocking them in ice water and finishing them in a hot skillet. This two-step process ensures the spears are perfectly tender and vibrant green all the way through, while the final high-heat sear adds a smoky, buttery crust that beautifully contrasts with the rich, silky Béarnaise sauce.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I prepare Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce ahead of time?

You can blanch the spears and make the flavor reduction a day early, but the final pan-roasting and the blender emulsion are best done right before your meal to ensure the most vibrant color and silkiest texture.

What is the best way to plate Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce for a holiday dinner?

Arrange the charred, tender-crisp spears on a warmed platter and pour a wide ribbon of the rich, buttery topping across the middle, finishing with a sprinkle of fresh herbs and lemon zest.

How do I keep the vegetables crunchy in Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce?

The secret is a quick two-minute blanch followed by an immediate ice bath; this locks in the snap and bright green color before you finish them with a high-heat sear in the skillet.

Is thick or thin produce better for Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce?

Larger, sturdier spears are ideal because they provide a more satisfying texture and can support the weight of the decadent, herb-flecked cream without becoming limp.

What are the best menu pairings for Asparagus with Béarnaise Sauce?

This sophisticated side is a traditional partner for roasted meats like lamb or ham, and it complements other classic holiday favorites like scalloped potatoes or a savory quiche.

A white dinner plate filled with a single serving of asparagus with Béarnaise sauce next to a pile of mashed potatoes and a couple slices of ham.

🥕 Other Classic Side Dish Recipes

Ready to make the best side dish for your holiday table? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a white rectangle platter filled with a dish of Asparagus with Béarnaise sauce and a large gold serving fork nearby.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Pan-Roasted Asparagus with Silky Béarnaise Sauce

This sophisticated side dish features tender-crisp, pan-roasted asparagus topped with a rich and velvety blender Béarnaise sauce. Infused with fresh tarragon and shallots, it’s a foolproof, restaurant-quality recipe that perfectly complements a holiday ham or roast lamb for an elegant Easter feast.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time15 minutes
Total Time30 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American / French
Servings: 4
Calories: 362kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • large (12") skillet
  • Blender for making the Béarnaise

Ingredients

  • 1½ lbs asparagus ends trimmed
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • salt and pepper
  • 1 cup Béarnaise sauce click link for the easy blender recipe
  • lemon zest for garnish
  • 1 tablespoon tarragon fresh, chopped, for garnish

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of heavily salted water to a boil. Add the trimmed asparagus and cook for just 2 minutes until tender-crisp.
    1½ lbs asparagus
  • Immediately remove the spears and plunge them into a bowl of ice water to "shock" them. This locks in the vibrant green color. Once cool, remove and pat them completely dry with a kitchen towel.
  • Heat the olive oil and butter in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Once the butter is bubbling, add the dried asparagus in a single layer.
    1 tablespoon olive oil, 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Sear the asparagus for 2–3 minutes, tossing occasionally, until they develop golden-brown char marks. Season with a pinch of salt and pepper.
    salt and pepper
  • Prepare the Sauce: While the asparagus is searing, follow the instructions for my Foolproof Blender Béarnaise Sauce. It takes only 5 minutes to emulsify in the blender!
    1 cup Béarnaise sauce
  • Arrange the charred asparagus on a warmed platter. Pour a generous ribbon of the silky Béarnaise over the center of the spears. Garnish with lemon zest and fresh tarragon, and serve immediately.
    lemon zest, 1 tablespoon tarragon

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Make-Ahead Tip: You can blanch and shock the asparagus up to 24 hours in advance. Keep them stored in the fridge wrapped in a paper towel, then simply do the quick 3-minute pan-sear right before serving.
  • The “Dry” Secret: For the best char marks, the asparagus must be bone-dry before hitting the hot oil. If they are wet, they will steam instead of sear.
  • Thick vs. Thin: This recipe specifically calls for thick spears. If you use pencil-thin asparagus, skip the blanching step and go straight to the pan-roast for 3–4 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 362kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 397mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1447IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 4mg

Foolproof Blender Béarnaise Sauce

by Leave a Comment

If you’ve ever been intimidated by classic French sauces, this Blender Béarnaise Sauce is a total game-changer. In just 10 minutes, you can create a thick, velvety sauce that is absolutely foolproof and guaranteed never to break or curdle. It’s the ultimate elegant topping for steak, eggs, or our favorite Pan-Roasted Asparagus with Silky Blender Béarnaise.

A glass gravy boat will with Blender Béarnaise Sauce next to an orange-checkered napkin and a platter filled with pan-seared asparagus.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧈 The Ingredients

This sauce strikes a sophisticated balance by combining a bright, herb-infused reduction with rich dairy and a touch of citrus for a perfectly layered flavor profile. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Blender Béarnaise Sauce on a grey wooden background including two sticks of butter, egg yolks, vinegar, lemon juice, shallots, wine, tarragon, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Vinegar: Champagne or white wine vinegar provides a crisp, elegant acidity. If you want an even deeper herb flavor, use tarragon vinegar; in a pinch, apple cider vinegar works too.
  • Dry White Wine: Choose a crisp, dry wine like Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio. Avoid sweet wines or heavily oaked Chardonnays, which can throw off the flavor balance.
  • Shallots: These offer a delicate, sweet onion flavor. If you don’t have shallots, you can substitute them with the white parts of green onions or a very finely minced red onion.
  • Fresh Tarragon: This is the signature flavor of Béarnaise. While fresh is best, you can substitute 1 teaspoon of dried tarragon for every tablespoon of fresh, but be sure to add it to the reduction so it has time to rehydrate.
  • Unsalted Butter: Using unsalted butter allows you to control the seasoning perfectly. If you only have salted butter on hand, simply omit the additional salt called for in the recipe and season to taste at the end.
  • Egg Yolks: Use large, room-temperature egg yolks. The temperature helps them emulsify more easily with the hot butter for a stable, silky finish.
  • Black Pepper: For the best flavor, use freshly cracked black pepper. If you want a perfectly smooth, speckle-free look, you can use ground white pepper instead.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Béarnaise Sauce

  • Temperature is Key: Your butter must be bubbling and very hot (around 200°F) before you start pouring. The heat from the butter is what actually “cooks” the egg yolks and creates a thick, stable emulsion.
  • The Slow Drizzle: When adding the butter to the blender, pour it in a very thin, steady stream. If you dump the butter in too quickly, the sauce will “break” and become oily instead of creamy.
  • Warm Your Blender Jar: Before you begin, rinse your blender jar with hot water and dry it thoroughly. A warm jar prevents the sauce from cooling down too quickly, which helps maintain that signature silky texture.
  • How to Fix a Broken Sauce: If your sauce separates and looks oily, don’t panic! Place one teaspoon of boiling water in a clean bowl and very slowly whisk the broken sauce into the water, one spoonful at a time, until it re-emulsifies.
  • Keep it Warm in a Thermos: Béarnaise is notoriously difficult to reheat without it curdling. If you aren’t serving it immediately, pour the finished sauce into a pre-warmed thermos; it will stay at the perfect serving temperature for up to an hour.
  • Strain for Smoothness: For a truly professional finish, always strain your vinegar and shallot reduction through a fine-mesh sieve. This allows you to extract all the concentrated flavor while keeping the sauce perfectly smooth.
  • Use Room Temperature Yolks: Take your eggs out of the fridge about 30 minutes before starting. Room-temperature yolks bond with the hot butter much more easily than cold ones, leading to a more stable sauce.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Blender Béarnaise Sauce

A person dumping chopped, fresh tarragon from a small white bowl into a small saucepan containing simmering vinegar, white wine, and chopped shallots.
  1. Step 1: Heat the vinegar, wine, shallots, tarragon, and pepper in a small saucepan. Simmer until reduced by half, about 4 to 5 minutes.
A person straining a tarragon, shallot, and vinegar reduction through a sieve into a small glass bowl.
  1. Step 2: Strain the reduction through a sieve into a small bowl.
A person pouring a shallot and wine reduction into a blender that contains three egg yolks.
  1. Step 3: Add the room-temperature egg yolks to your blender, and then the strained reduction and a pinch of salt.
A person pouring melted butter through the top opening in the lid of a blender.
  1. Step 4: Melt the butter in a saucepan over medium heat. With the motor running, slowly pour the hot butter in a slow, steady stream. The sauce will immediately thicken.
A person pouring fresh lemon juice from a small bowl into a larger white bowl holding Blender Béarnaise Sauce garnished with chopped tarragon.
  1. Step 5: Pour the sauce into a bowl and stir in the lemon juice and chopped tarragon.
A person pouring blender Béarnaise sauce from a glass gravy boat onto a pile of pan-seared asparagus on a white rectangular platter.
  1. Step 6: Serve at once!

Expert Tip: The “Bright Finish” Secret

To achieve a true restaurant-quality balance, don’t rush the reduction process; let the vinegar and wine simmer until they are thick and syrupy to ensure a deep, concentrated flavor base. Most importantly, always do a final taste test just before serving. If the sauce feels too heavy or “fatty” on the tongue, whisk in a tiny extra squeeze of lemon juice or a drop of vinegar to cut through the richness and make the tarragon notes truly sing.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I make Blender Béarnaise Sauce ahead of time?

Yes, you can prepare it up to an hour before serving. To keep it at the ideal consistency, store it in a pre-warmed thermos or leave it in the insulated jar in a warm spot in your kitchen.

What should I do if my Blender Béarnaise Sauce breaks or looks oily?

Simply place a teaspoon of boiling water in a clean bowl. Slowly whisk the separated mixture into the water one tablespoon at a time until the emulsion is restored and becomes smooth and creamy again.

How is Blender Béarnaise Sauce different from Hollandaise?

While both are buttery emulsions made with egg yolks, this version is distinguished by a savory reduction of vinegar, wine, shallots, and fresh tarragon, giving it a distinct herbal profile rather than a purely citrus-forward one.

Can I reheat leftover Blender Béarnaise Sauce?

It is very difficult to warm back up because direct heat will likely cause the eggs to scramble or the fats to separate. If you must try, use a very gentle double boiler on the lowest possible setting while whisking constantly, though it is truly best enjoyed immediately after making.

Can I use dried tarragon in this Blender Béarnaise Sauce recipe?

You can certainly use the dried version if fresh isn’t available. Just be sure to add it directly to the vinegar and wine reduction so the heat and moisture can draw out the oils and soften the texture of the herbs before straining.

A person pouring blender Béarnaise sauce from a glass gravy boat of a pile of pan-seared asparagus on a white platter.

😋 More Amazing Sauce Recipes

Ready to make the best sauce this side of Paris? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a glass gravy boat filled with Blender Béarnaise Sauce next to a platter of pan-seared asparagus.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Foolproof Blender Béarnaise Sauce

This luxurious, herb-infused sauce is a foolproof take on the French classic, utilizing a blender to achieve a perfectly stable, velvety emulsion in just 10 minutes. With its bright notes of tarragon and shallots, it is the ultimate decadent topping for roasted asparagus, grilled steak, or festive holiday brunch dishes.
Prep Time5 minutes
Cook Time8 minutes
Total Time13 minutes
Course: French sauce
Cuisine: French
Servings: 8
Calories: 237kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • small saucepan
  • Blender

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup Champagne vinegar or white wine vinegar or tarragon vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon white wine dry
  • 1 shallot finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoon tarragon fresh, roughly chopped, plus more for garnish
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup unsalted butter 2 sticks
  • 3 egg yolks room temperature
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice usually from 1 half of a lemon

Instructions

  • In a small saucepan, combine the vinegar, wine, shallots, tarragon, and black pepper. Bring to a simmer and cook until reduced by about half, usually about 3 to 5 minutes.
    ¼ cup Champagne vinegar, 2 tablespoon white wine, 1 shallot, 2 tablespoon tarragon, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Strain the reduction through a fine-mesh sieve into a small heatproof bowl. Press on the shallots and herbs to release all the concentrated flavor. Set aside.
  • Melt the butter in a medium saucepan.
    1 cup unsalted butter
  • In your blender, add the egg yolks (room temp), shallot reduction, and salt. Pulse 2 or 3 times to combine.
    3 egg yolks, ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • When the butter is bubbling and very hot, turn your blender to a low setting, remove the center cap from the lid, and carefully pour the hot butter in a slow, steady stream. The sauce will thicken quickly to a pale-yellow cream.
  • Pour the sauce into a bowl and stir in the lemon juice and another tablespoon of tarragon. Serve at once.
    1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Temperature Matters: Ensure your butter is bubbling and very hot (approximately 200°F) before pouring it into the blender; this high heat is what “cooks” the egg yolks and creates a thick, stable emulsion.
  • Fixing a Broken Sauce: If the sauce separates or looks oily, whisk 1 teaspoon of boiling water into a clean bowl, then slowly whisk in the broken sauce one spoonful at a time until it becomes smooth and creamy again.
  • Storage & Keeping Warm: This sauce is best served immediately. To keep it warm for up to an hour, store it in a pre-warmed thermos or leave it in the blender jar in a warm spot in your kitchen.
  • Reheating: Avoid the microwave at all costs, as it will scramble the eggs. If you must reheat, use a very gentle double boiler on the lowest possible heat, whisking constantly.
  • Serving Suggestion: While this is the perfect partner for my Pan-Roasted Asparagus, it is also incredible served over grilled steak, poached salmon, or as a decadent topping for Eggs Benedict.

Nutrition

Calories: 237kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 134mg | Sodium: 81mg | Potassium: 85mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 881IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg

Slow-Roasted Lamb Shoulder with Crispy Potatoes

by 2 Comments

For a truly spectacular roast, nothing beats the succulent, pull-apart texture of a slow-cooked lamb shoulder. This recipe infuses a boneless roast with fresh garlic and rosemary, resulting in a melt-in-your-mouth main dish served alongside the ultimate crispy potatoes roasted in rendered lamb fat. It’s a timeless, “set-it-and-forget-it” meal that transforms simple ingredients into a sophisticated, flavor-packed feast.

A large white oval platter filled with a slow-roasted lamb shoulder that has been roughly slices and is surrounded by crispy potato wedges and a small bowl filled with a red wine au jus.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧄 The Ingredients

This recipe utilizes a simple combination of fresh aromatics and savory liquids to slowly infuse the meat with flavor, creating a naturally rich and glossy reduction. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for slow-roasted lamb shoulder with crispy potatoes including a boneless lamb shoulder, gold potatoes, carrots, onion, garlic, red wine, oil, beef stock, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Boneless Lamb Shoulder: This cut is prized for its high fat content and connective tissue, which break down during the slow-roasting process to create incredibly tender meat; if you only have access to a leg of lamb, keep in mind it is much leaner and may require a shorter cooking time to avoid drying out.
  • Fresh Rosemary: Fresh herbs provide the most vibrant, aromatic flavor, but you can easily substitute the rosemary with fresh thyme or use one teaspoon of dried rosemary if fresh is unavailable.
  • Beef Stock: A high-quality beef or lamb stock serves as the savory foundation for your pan juices; however, chicken stock can be used in a pinch for a lighter, more delicate flavor profile.
  • Red Wine: Choose a dry red wine you enjoy drinking, such as a Shiraz, Malbec, or Cabernet Sauvignon, to add a sophisticated depth to the jus; if you prefer to cook without alcohol, replace the wine with extra stock and a teaspoon of balsamic vinegar for a similar hit of acidity.
  • Coarse Kosher Salt: We recommend coarse salt for its ability to create a savory crust on the meat, but if you are using fine table salt, be sure to reduce the amount by half to prevent the dish from becoming too salty.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Roast Lamb Shoulder

  • Temper the Meat: Take the lamb out of the fridge at least an hour before cooking to bring it to room temperature; this ensures the heat penetrates the center evenly and prevents the meat from tightening up in the oven.
  • The “Fluff” Factor: After par-boiling your potatoes, give the pot a vigorous shake to roughen up the edges; those starchy, fuzzy bits are exactly what transform into a glass-like, golden crunch when they hit the hot lamb fat.
  • The “Spoon-Tender” Test: Unlike a leg of lamb, which is often served pink, a shoulder is at its best when it is “spoon-tender.” If the meat still feels springy or tough when pressed, it simply needs another 30 minutes under the foil to allow the connective tissue to fully break down.
  • Non-Negotiable Resting: Never skip the resting period! Giving the lamb 30–45 minutes to rest allows the muscle fibers to relax and reabsorb all those delicious juices, ensuring the meat is succulent rather than dry when you carve it.
  • Skim for a Glossy Jus: When preparing the red wine reduction, let the pan drippings settle in a glass jug for a minute so the fat rises to the top; skimming this off before making your sauce ensures the final jus is rich and concentrated rather than greasy.
  • Maintain a Uniform Shape: When tying your boneless roast, aim for a consistent “log” shape from end to end; this prevents the thinner tapered ends from overcooking while the thicker center is still reaching its peak tenderness.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Prep a Boneless Lamb Shoulder

A person using a spoon to spread a fresh herb and garlic paste over the top of an uncooked lamb shoulder on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Season the lamb all over with salt and pepper. In a small bowl, mix the rosemary, garlic, and oil. Open the lamb shoulder up and rub the herb and garlic mixture all over the top of it.
An overhead view of a boneless lamb shoulder that has been rolled and tied together with twine on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: Tightly roll the lamb and tie it up with twine. Seas
A person pouring beef stock from a measuring cup into a roasting pan filled with a lamb shoulder resting on cut onion and carrots.
  1. Step 3: Place the roughly cut onion and carrots in a large roasting pan.
A person pressing down heavy duty foil over a large roasting pan on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 4: Cover the pan tightly with heavy-duty foil. Preheat your oven to 325°F. Roast for 3 hours.

👨‍🍳 How to Roast a Lamb Shoulder and Crispy Potatoes

A person transferring gold potato wedges into a pot of boiling water on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Add the peeled and cut potatoes to boiling water. Bring back to a boil and simmer for 8 minutes.
A person using two large wooden spoons to toss par-boiled gold potato wedges in lamb stock and seasonings.
  1. Step 2: Remove the roast from the oven and take off the foil. Add the potatoes to another pan and toss with ¼-cup of the braising liquid, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Turn the oven up to 400°F. Place the potatoes and lamb in the oven for 25 minutes.
A person tenting a slow-roasted lamb shoulder on a platter with a large piece of heavy duty foil.
  1. Step 3: Remove the lamb from the pan and tent loosely with foil. Toss the potatoes and add another splash of oil, if needed. Roast them for another 30 to 40 minutes, until crispy.
A person pour red wine from a small carafe into a large roasting pan filled with roasted carrots and onions in a beef and lamb stock on a gas stove.
  1. Step 4: Place the roasting pan on the stove and add the wine. Cook over medium-high heat until reduced by half. Strain and season with salt and pepper.
A person using kitchen scissors to cut away twine that is wrapped around a slow-roasted lamb shoulder.
  1. Step 5: Remove the twine from the roast.
A person using a large chef's knife to slice a slow-roasted lamb shoulder on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 6: Slice the lamb and serve at onces with the crispy potatoes and au jus.

Expert Tip: Mastering the Fat Separation

Lamb shoulder is a beautifully marbled cut, but it releases a significant amount of rendered fat during its long roast. To ensure your red wine jus is silky and concentrated rather than greasy, we highly recommend using a fat separator—a specialized pitcher that pours from the bottom, allowing you to easily drain the flavorful juices while leaving the oil behind.

If you don’t have one, simply pour the pan drippings into a tall glass jug and let them settle for 2–3 minutes; the clear fat will rise to the top, allowing you to carefully skim it off with a large spoon or use a turkey baster to draw the dark, savory liquid from underneath.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best internal temperature for a slow-roasted lamb shoulder?

To achieve that signature “pull-apart” texture, aim for an internal temperature of around 195°F to 205°F (90°C to 96°C). At this stage, the connective tissues have fully broken down, allowing the meat to be easily shredded with a fork rather than sliced like a traditional steak.

Can I use a leg of lamb instead of a slow-roasted lamb shoulder?

While you can use other cuts, the leg is much leaner and tends to dry out if cooked for the same duration. If you choose the leaner option, you should reduce the oven time significantly and aim for a medium-rare finish to maintain moisture.

How do I ensure the meat stays juicy in a slow-roasted lamb shoulder?

Keeping the roasting tin tightly covered with a double layer of heavy-duty foil is essential. This traps the steam and aromatics inside the pan, essentially braising the meat in its own savory drippings until it reaches peak tenderness.

Can I prepare a slow-roasted lamb shoulder a day in advance?

Yes, you can cook the meat fully, let it cool, and store it in the refrigerator. When ready to serve, gently reheat it in a low oven with a splash of stock to prevent it from drying out, though we recommend making the potatoes fresh for the best possible crunch.

Why is my slow-roasted lamb shoulder still tough after the recommended time?

If the meat feels springy or difficult to shred, it likely just needs more time in the oven. This particular cut requires several hours at a low temperature to transform the tough collagen into succulent, melt-in-your-mouth goodness, so don’t be afraid to give it an extra 30 minutes if needed.

An overhead view of a large platter filled with sliced slow-roasted lamb shoulder with crispy potatoes next to a dinner plate filled with a serving of the same and two glasses of red wine nearby.

✨ Other Centerpiece Roasts

Ready to make an extra-special roast for that special occasion? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a large white oval platter that is filled with a sliced slow-roasted lamb shoulder with crispy potatoes and a small bowl of red wine au jus.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Slow-Roasted Lamb Shoulder with Crispy Potatoes

This masterclass in slow-roasting transforms a boneless lamb shoulder into a succulent, fork-tender centerpiece infused with garlic and fresh rosemary. By roasting the potatoes in the rendered lamb fat and finishing the dish with a glossy red wine reduction, you create a sophisticated, restaurant-quality meal that is perfect for any special occasion or a comforting Sunday dinner.
Prep Time20 minutes
Cook Time3 hours 30 minutes
Resting Time1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time5 hours 20 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 456kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Kitchen twine
  • Roasting pan You will need heavy-duty foil to cover it
  • Fat separator see NOTES

Ingredients

  • 1 4½ lb lamb shoulder boneless
  • salt and pepper
  • 6 sprigs rosemary fresh, chopped (leaves only)
  • 8 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1 large onion roughly chopped (leave in wedges)
  • 2 medium carrots peeled and cut into 2-inch pieces
  • 1 cup beef stock or broth

For the Potatoes and au Jus

  • 3 lbs gold potatoes peeled and cut into large wedges
  • 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil plus more, as needed
  • salt and pepper
  • 1 cup red wine

Instructions

  • Remove the lamb 1 hour before roasting. If there is a netting on it, remove it.
    1 4½ lb lamb shoulder
  • Preheat oven to 325°F.
  • Open the lamb shoulder up and liberally season it all over with salt and pepper.
    salt and pepper
  • In a small bowl, mix the rosemary and garlic with the oil. Rub the mixture all over one side of the lamb (the side with the least amount of fat).
    6 sprigs rosemary, 8 cloves garlic, 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil
  • Roll the lamb into a tight log. Use kitchen twine to tie it firmly at 1-inch intervals.
  • Place the chopped onion and carrots in your roasting pan. Place the lamb shoulder on top of the veggies, fat-side up. Pour the beef stock into the pan and then cover the pan tightly with several pieces of heavy-duty foil. Roast for 3 hours.
    1 large onion, 2 medium carrots, 1 cup beef stock
  • While the lamb is roasting, peel and cut your potatoes into large chunks/wedges. Bring a pot of salted water to a boil and carefully add the potatoes. Bring back to a boil and then simmer for 8 to 10 minutes. Drain and add them back to the pot. Give the pan a strong shake. This "fluffs" the potatoes a bit, which helps them get nice and crispy.
    3 lbs gold potatoes
  • Remove the lamb from the oven and turn the oven up to 400°F.
  • Place the par-boiled potatoes in another pan. Remove the foil from the roasting pan containing the lamb shoulder. Take about ¼-cup of the braising liquid and pour it over the potatoes. Drizzle 2 tablespoons of oil over the potatoes and toss to coat. Liberally sprinkle salt and pepper all over them. Once the oven reaches 400°F, add both pans.
    2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil, salt and pepper
  • Remove the lamb after 25 minutes. Carefully transfer the roast to a cutting board and loosely tent with foil. Allow the potatoes to continue roasting for another 30 to 45 minutes, until crispy and lightly browned, tossing occasionally, and adding a little more oil, if needed. They
  • Meanwhile, place the roasting pan over the stove and add the wine. Bring to a strong simmer until reduced by half, usually about 15 minutes. Stir in a healthy pinch of salt and pepper. Strain the liquid and use a fat separator, or skim the rendered grease from the surface of the au jus. See NOTES. Set aside.
    1 cup red wine
  • Remove the twine, and carve the lamb into thick, juicy chunks. Serve immediately with the crispy potatoes and au jus.

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Removing Rendered Grease: To ensure a glossy, flavorful jus, it is essential to remove the excess rendered grease from the pan drippings. Pour the liquid into a fat separator or a tall glass jug and let it settle for a few minutes; the clear fat will rise to the top, allowing you to easily skim it off with a spoon or use a turkey baster to draw the dark, savory liquid from the bottom.
  • The Importance of Resting: Never skip the 30–45 minute resting period. This allows the muscle fibers to relax and reabsorb the juices, ensuring the meat is succulent when carved, while also providing the potatoes with the uninterrupted oven time they need to reach peak crispiness.
  • Doneness Check: Unlike a leg of lamb, a shoulder is best served “spoon-tender” rather than pink. If the meat still feels springy or resists being pulled apart with a fork, simply cover it back up and give it another 30 minutes in the oven.
  • Alcohol-Free Substitution: If you prefer to make the jus without red wine, substitute the wine with an equal amount of beef stock and add a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar to provide the necessary acidity and depth of flavor.
  • Potato Variety: For the best results, use a starchy roasting potato like Yukon Gold, as they create the fluffiest interior and the crunchiest exterior.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 456kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.1mg | Sodium: 245mg | Potassium: 899mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 2555IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 41mg | Iron: 2mg

The Best Homemade Creamed Corn

by 5 Comments

Whether you’re hosting an elegant Easter lunch or firing up the grill for a backyard BBQ, this velvety, homemade creamed corn is the ultimate crowd-pleasing side. It’s incredibly rich and fresh, offering a simple yet sophisticated upgrade that outshines the canned version every time.

An overhead view a large cast-iron skillet with freshly prepared homemade creamed corn garnished with crispy bacon bits and snipped chives.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌽 The Ingredients

This dish relies on a handful of high-quality dairy staples and fresh seasonal produce to achieve its signature silky texture and irresistible savory-sweet balance. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for homemade creamed corn on a grey wooden background including ears of corn, flour, sugar, cream, milk, bacon, chives, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Corn: Fresh ears of corn are highly recommended so you can scrape the “milk” from the cob for extra flavor, but you can substitute with 20 ounces of frozen (thawed) or canned (thoroughly drained) corn in a pinch.
  • The Fat: Use unsalted butter for a clean, classic taste, or swap it for bacon grease to infuse the entire dish with a rich, smoky depth.
  • Flour: This acts as the thickening agent for the sauce. If you need a gluten-free option, you can use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend or substitute with 1 tablespoon of cornstarch (whisked into the cold milk before adding to the pan).
  • Heavy Cream & Whole Milk: This combination creates the ultimate velvety texture; however, you can use half-and-half for a slightly lighter version or full-fat canned coconut milk for a dairy-free alternative.
  • Sugar: Depending on the natural sweetness of your corn, you can adjust the sugar to your preference or swap it for honey or maple syrup.
  • Garnishes: While crispy bacon bits and snipped chives add the perfect crunch and freshness, you can also experiment with a sprinkle of smoked paprika, red pepper flakes, or freshly grated Parmesan cheese.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Creamed Corn

  • The “Bowl-in-a-Bowl” Method: To keep kernels from bouncing off your counter, place a small bowl upside down inside a much larger mixing bowl. Rest the tip of the corn cob on the flat base of the inverted bowl; as you slice downward, the larger bowl will neatly catch all the kernels and juices.
  • Don’t Skip the Scrape: After cutting the kernels off, use the back of your knife to scrape the cob. This “corn milk” contains natural starches that help thicken the sauce and provide a much more intense corn flavor.
  • Watch the Heat: When adding the heavy cream and milk, keep the heat on medium-low. Boiling dairy too vigorously can cause it to separate or scorch on the bottom of the pan.
  • Control Your Consistency: If the sauce is too thick, stir in an extra splash of milk. If it’s too thin, let it simmer for another 2–3 minutes; it will also continue to thicken as it cools slightly before serving.
  • Taste Before You Sugar: Fresh summer corn can be incredibly sweet on its own. Always taste a kernel first—if it’s already very sweet, you may want to cut the added sugar in half or omit it entirely.
  • Make-Ahead Strategy: You can make this up to two days in advance. When reheating on the stovetop, add a tablespoon of milk or cream to loosen the sauce and restore that velvety, “just-made” texture.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Homemade Creamed Corn

A person using a chef's knife to cut away kernels from a cob of corn that is resting on an inverted small bowl inside a large glass bowl.
  1. Step 1: Invert a small bowl into a large bowl. Place the corn on top of the small bowl and use a knife to cut away the kernels. Use the knife for an additional scrape to get that amazing corn milk.
A person using a wooden spoon to cook corn kernels in a large black cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Heat the butter (or bacon grease) over medium heat in a large skillet. Add the corn kernels and corn milk and sauté for 3 to 4 minutes, stirring often.
A person adding all-purpose flour from a small bowl over sautéed corn kernels simmering in a large cast-iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Stir in the flour and cook for 1 minute.
A person pouring cream into a large skillet that is filled with sautéed corn kernels that have been coated in flour.
  1. Step 4: Stir in the cream and milk. Stir to combine.
A person transferring sugar from a small bowl into a large cast-iron skillet that is filled with simmering homemade creamed corn.
  1. Step 5: Stir in the sugar, salt, and pepper. Continue stirring and simmering until slightly thickened, about 5 minutes.
A close-up view of a cast-iron skillet filled with freshly prepared homemade creamed corn topped with crispy bacon bits and snipped chives.
  1. Step 6: Garnish with crispy bacon bits and snipped chives (if desired) and serve at once.

🍽️ How to Serve

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen or canned corn instead of fresh for Homemade Creamed Corn?

Yes! While fresh corn is preferred for its flavor and the “corn milk” from the cob, you can substitute it with about 20 ounces of frozen or canned corn. If you can’t find fresh, frozen corn is the better alternative because canned corn can often have a distinct “canned” aftertaste that interferes with the fresh flavor of the dish.

How do I make Homemade Creamed Corn gluten-free?

To make this gluten-free, simply swap the all-purpose flour for a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend. Alternatively, you can omit the flour and use a cornstarch slurry (1 tablespoon of cornstarch mixed with 1 tablespoon of cold milk) stirred into the simmering cream at the very end.

Can I make Homemade Creamed Corn ahead of time?

Absolutely. You can prepare this dish up to 2 days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator and reheat it slowly on the stovetop over low heat, adding a splash of milk or cream to bring back its original creamy consistency.

Is Homemade Creamed Corn supposed to be sweet?

Traditional creamed corn has a subtle sweetness that complements the savory cream sauce. However, the amount of sugar needed depends on the natural sweetness of your corn. We recommend tasting the corn first and adjusting the sugar to your personal preference.

A close-up view of homemade creamed corn in a black cast-iron skillet with a wooden spoon being used to lift a serving of the corn from the pan.

😋 More Amazing Recipes Starring Fresh Corn

Ready to make the best corn dish in town, in just 20 minutes? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of homemade creamed corn in a black cast-iron skillet with a wooden spoon being used to lift a serving of the corn from the pan.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

The Best Homemade Creamed Corn

Ditch the can for this rich, velvety Homemade Creamed Corn ready in just 15 minutes. Using fresh corn and a simple "cob-scraping" secret, this elevated side is perfect for everything from Easter lunch to backyard BBQs. Top with crispy bacon and fresh chives for a truly irresistible finish!
Prep Time10 minutes
Cook Time10 minutes
Total Time20 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 229kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large (12") skillet ie, cast-iron

Ingredients

  • 2 strips bacon cooked and chopped, for garnish
  • 6-8 ears corn shucked, see NOTES for frozen corn
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter or bacon grease
  • 2 tablespoon all-purpose flour
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • ½ cup whole milk
  • 1 tablespoon sugar
  • 1¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives snipped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Cook the bacon until crisp. Chop and set aside (if using).
    2 strips bacon
  • Place a small bowl upside down inside a much larger mixing bowl. Rest the tip of the corn cob on the flat base of the inverted bowl. Carefully use a knife to cut the kernels from the cob. Once the kernels are off, use the back of your knife to scrape the cob all the way down. This releases the "corn milk." Repeat with all of the ears.
    6-8 ears corn
  • In a large skillet or saucepan, melt the butter (or grease) over medium heat. Add the corn kernels (and corn milk). Sauté for about 3 – 4 minutes, until the corn is tender and fragrant.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Sprinkle the flour over the corn and stir constantly for about 1 minute. Slowly pour in the heavy cream and milk, stirring often. Stir in the sugar, salt, and pepper. Continue stirring for a few minutes until slightly thickened. If it becomes too thick, add a splash or two of milk until the desired consistency is reached.
    2 tablespoon all-purpose flour, 1 cup heavy cream, ½ cup whole milk, 1 tablespoon sugar, 1¼ teaspoon Kosher salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Taste and add more sugar or salt, if needed. Serve at once, garnished with crispy bacon bits and snipped chives (if using).
    1 tablespoon chives

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Corn Selection: Fresh corn is highly recommended, so you can extract the “corn milk” from the cob. If fresh isn’t available, use frozen corn rather than canned, as canned varieties often have a metallic aftertaste that can overpower the delicate cream sauce. Allow the corn to fully thaw and then sauté it in butter for 5 minutes. You’ll need about 6 cups.
  • The Secret Step: Don’t skip scraping the cobs with the back of your knife! This releases natural starches and intense corn flavor that helps thicken the sauce and creates a much richer result.
  • Adjusting Sweetness: Always taste your corn before adding the sugar. If you are using peak-season summer corn, it may already be sweet enough to omit the extra sugar entirely.
  • Storage & Freezing: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3–4 days. You can freeze this dish for up to 2 months, but be aware that the cream sauce may become slightly grainy once thawed; simply reheat it slowly on the stovetop with a splash of milk while whisking to restore the velvety texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 552mg | Potassium: 93mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 761IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 55mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake (Foolproof & No Cracks!)

by Leave a Comment

If you loved our classic New York-Style Cheesecake with Glazed Strawberry Topping, you are going to adore this vibrant Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake. It combines a creamy, zesty lemon filling with stunning ribbons of a fresh blueberry sauce for a show-stopping dessert that’s as beautiful as it is delicious. Best of all, our foolproof baking method ensures a perfectly smooth, crack-free finish every single time.

A person using a cake spatula to lift a slice of lemon blueberry cheesecake from a the cake resting on a circular white cake dish.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍋🫐 The Ingredients

By combining fresh, tangy citrus and vibrant seasonal berries with rich, creamy staples, we’ve created a perfectly balanced dessert that tastes as bright and fresh as it looks. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for lemon blueberry cheesecake on a grey wooden background including softened cream cheese, blueberries, eggs, sugar, lemon zest, vanilla, graham crackers, butter, and lemon juice.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Blueberries: Fresh berries provide the most vibrant color, but frozen blueberries work perfectly for the sauce—just simmer them a few minutes longer to account for the extra moisture.
  • Graham Crackers: For a flavor twist, you can substitute the graham crackers with Digestive biscuits or even Biscoff cookies for a subtle spiced note.
  • Cream Cheese: It is essential to use full-fat, brick-style cream cheese; whipped or low-fat varieties will not provide the structure needed for a dense, New York-style texture.
  • Sour Cream: Full-fat sour cream adds the perfect amount of tang and moisture, though plain full-fat Greek yogurt is an excellent 1:1 substitute.
  • Lemon: Always use freshly squeezed juice and zest, as bottled juice lacks the bright, floral oils found in fresh citrus that make this cheesecake pop.
  • Eggs: Use large, room-temperature eggs to ensure they incorporate smoothly into the batter without the need for over-mixing, which helps prevent cracks.
  • Butter: We recommend unsalted butter for the crust so you can fully control the salt content of your dessert.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🥇 Tips and Tricks for the Perfect Cheesecake

  • Room Temperature is Key: For a perfectly smooth, lump-free batter, make sure your cream cheese, eggs, and sour cream are at true room temperature before you start. Cold ingredients won’t incorporate properly, leading to a grainy texture.
  • Mix on Low Speed: Once you add the eggs, keep your mixer on the lowest setting. Adding too much air to the batter causes the cheesecake to puff up in the oven and then collapse as it cools, which is the main cause of surface cracks.
  • Don’t Skip the Water Bath: It might seem like an extra step, but baking the cheesecake in a pan of hot water ensures gentle, even heat. This is the secret to that creamy, “New York-style” texture and a perfectly flat top.
  • Master the Swirl: When adding the blueberry sauce, use a toothpick or a small knife to make gentle “figure-eight” motions. Stop before you think you’re done! It’s easy to over-swirl, and you want those beautiful, distinct purple ribbons to stand out against the white filling.
  • The “Slow Cool” Method: After the bake time is up, turn off the oven and crack the door open just a few inches. Let the cheesecake sit inside for a full hour. This gradual temperature change prevents the cheesecake from “shocking” and cracking as it cools. Next, let the cheesecake rest (still in the locked pan) on the counter for a couple of hours.
  • For Perfect Slices: To get those clean, professional-looking edges you see in photos, dip a sharp knife in hot water and wipe it dry between every single cut. This prevents the blueberry swirl from smudging into the white cheesecake layers.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Prep a Lemon Blueberry Cheesecake

A person using a wooden spatula to stir simmering blueberries in a silver saucepan on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Add the blueberries, sugar, and lemon juice to a medium saucepan over medium heat. Stir until berries are starting to burst open.
A person pouring a cornstarch slurry from a small glass bowl into a bowl of simmering blueberries that have burst open and created a blueberry sauce.
  1. Step 2: Stir in the cornstarch slurry and cook (stirring often) until slightly thickened. Remove from the heat.
A person pouring a blueberry sauce from a sliver saucepan into a sieve that is resting over a medium-sized glass bowl on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 3: Strain the sauce and let it cool completely.
A person pouring melted butter from a small glass bowl into a larger glass bowl filled with graham cracker crumbs and sugar.
  1. Step 4: In a bowl, combine the crushed Graham crackers, sugar, and melted butter.
A person using a clear measuring up to compact a graham cracker crust into the bottom of a springform pan.
  1. Step 5: Use a measuring cup or a flat-bottomed glass to compact the crust. Then bake for 10 minutes. Let cool completely.
A person transferring an egg into a glass bowl that has a cheesecake filling in along with an electric hand mixer.
  1. Step 6: Use a mixer to combine the softened cream cheese with the sugar. Blend in the sour cream, vanilla, lemon juice, and zest. Next, mix in the eggs, one at a time.

Expert Tip: The Leak-Proof Foil Seal

To guarantee a perfectly dry, crunchy crust, use extra-wide heavy-duty aluminum foil. Standard foil is often too narrow, creating seams where water can easily seep in. Place your springform pan in the center of a large square of foil and fold it up the sides in one continuous piece. If you only have standard-width foil, criss-cross two long sheets and pull them up high—well past the water line—to create a “triple-layer” defense against the water bath.

👨‍🍳 How to Bake the Cheesecake

A person using a wooden coffee stirrer to make swooping designs from dollops of a blueberry sauce on top of an uncooked lemon blueberry cheesecake in a springform pan.
  1. Step 1: Pour half of the filling into a springform pan that is wrapped in foil (See Expert Tip above). Pour half of the batter into the pan. Add drops of the blueberry sauce and use a toothpick or stirrer to create decorative swirls.
A person using a large ladle to add hot water into a roasting pan that is holding a foil-wrapped springform pan with an uncooked lemon blueberry cheesecake in it.
  1. Step 2: Place the pan in a large roasting pan and fill the pan with hot water (about halfway up the springform pan).
A person using a knife to cut the edges of a cooked lemon blueberry cheesecake from the side of the springform pan that is what baked in.
  1. Step 3: Bake at 325°F for 70 to 75 minutes. Jar the door of the oven and let the cake rest for another hour. Remove from the oven and run a sharp knife along the edge of the cake. Let it sit out at room temp for 1 to 2 hours, then chill for 6 hours, or overnight
A person lifting a springform pan from a chilled lemon blueberry cheesecake that is resting on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 4: Release the springform pan. Remove from the base (or leave it in place). Cut slices and let sit at room temp for an hour or so (optional, but makes for a creamy slice).

Expert Tip: The “Bridge” to the Fridge

Never move a warm cheesecake directly from the oven to the refrigerator. Sudden temperature shock causes the filling to contract too quickly, which is the leading cause of late-stage surface cracks. Instead, allow your cheesecake to sit on the counter for at least 2 hours until the bottom of the pan is completely cool to the touch. This gradual transition acts as a “bridge,” ensuring the structure stays stable and the top remains perfectly smooth and flawless.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Perfect Slice: To get those clean, professional edges, use a long, thin knife dipped in hot water and wiped dry between every single cut. This prevents the creamy filling and purple swirl from smudging, keeping each slice looking sharp and beautiful.
  • Fresh Garnishes: Just before serving, top the cheesecake with a handful of fresh blueberries and a light dusting of fresh lemon zest. A small sprig of fresh mint adds a beautiful pop of green that makes the purple and yellow colors really stand out.
  • Add a Dollop of Cream: A cloud of lightly sweetened whipped cream or a spoonful of mascarpone cream on the side perfectly balances the tanginess of the lemon and the sweetness of the blueberry reduction.
  • Drizzle Extra Sauce: If you have any leftover blueberry sauce, drizzle a small amount over each plate before serving for an extra burst of vibrant color and concentrated fruit flavor.
  • Drink Pairings: This zesty dessert pairs wonderfully with a hot cup of Earl Grey tea, a glass of sparkling lemonade, or even a chilled glass of Prosecco for a more celebratory occasion.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I use frozen berries for my Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake?

Yes, they work perfectly for the sauce. Just simmer them a few minutes longer to cook off the extra moisture before adding the reduction to the batter.

How do I prevent cracks in a Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake?

The secret is a combination of room-temperature ingredients, a gentle water bath, and a slow cooling process in the oven with the door cracked. Avoid over-mixing once the eggs are added to keep the texture dense and smooth.

How long will a Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake stay fresh in the fridge?

It will keep beautifully for up to five days when stored in an airtight container. In fact, the flavors often deepen and improve after the first 24 hours of chilling.

Can I make a Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake ahead of time?

Absolutely! This dessert is ideal for preparing a day or two in advance, as it requires at least six to eight hours of refrigeration to set properly before slicing.

Can you freeze a Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake?

Yes, it freezes quite well. Wrap the fully chilled cake tightly in plastic wrap and then foil; it will stay delicious for up to three months. Thaw it overnight in the refrigerator before adding any fresh garnishes.

A lemon blueberry cheesecake with colorful blueberry-colored swirl designs on the top of the cake sitting next to a bowl of blueberries and two whole lemons.

🍰 More Amazing Cheesecake Recipes

Ready to make the best cheesecake of the season? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a lemon blueberry cheesecake with colorful blueberry-colored swirl designs on the top of the cake.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

The Ultimate Lemon Blueberry Cheesecake

A velvety, zesty Lemon Blueberry Swirl Cheesecake featuring a buttery graham cracker crust and vibrant ribbons of fresh blueberry sauce. This foolproof recipe uses a "no-crack" method for a perfectly smooth, professional finish every time.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time1 hour 30 minutes
Resting and Chilling Time8 hours
Total Time9 hours 45 minutes
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 378kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

Ingredients

For the Blueberry Swirl and Topping

  • 2 cups blueberries fresh, or frozen (see NOTES)
  • ¼ cup sugar
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon cornstarch mixed with 1 teaspoon water (for the slurry)

For the Graham Cracker Crust (see NOTES)

  • 1 cup Graham crackers pulverized (1 cup after being pulverized)
  • ¼ cup sugar
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • 5 tablespoon unsalted butter melted

For the Cheesecake Filling

  • 4 8 oz cream cheese room temperature (32 ounces)
  • 1 cup sugar
  • 1 cup sour cream room temperature
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • 2 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 2 tablespoon lemon zest
  • 4 large eggs room temperature

For Garnish

  • fresh blueberries
  • fresh mint leaves optional

Instructions

Make the Blueberry Sauce

  • In a medium saucepan, combine the blueberries, sugar (¼ cup), and lemon juice (1 tbsp). Simmer over medium heat for about 8 – 10 minutes until the berries burst and release their juices. Stir in the cornstarch slurry (1 teaspoon cornstarch + 1 teaspoon water) and stir until slightly thickened, about 1 minute.
    2 cups blueberries, ¼ cup sugar, 1 tablespoon lemon juice, 1 teaspoon cornstarch
  • Strain the sauce through a sieve into a bowl. Save the chunky blueberries for garnish and let the strained sauce cool completely. Set aside.

Make the Graham Cracker Crust

  • Preheat oven to 325°F (160°C).
  • In a medium bowl, mix the Graham crackers, sugar, zest, and melted butter. Press firmly into the bottom of your springform pan (use the bottom of a measuring cup or a flat-bottomed glass to help you with this.) If you want to go up the sides of the pan, see the NOTES (you'll need to increase the amount of crushed crackers).
    1 cup Graham crackers, ¼ cup sugar, 1 tablespoon lemon zest, 5 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Bake for 10 minutes. Let cool completely.

Make the Filling and Prepare the Cheesecake

  • Bring a pot of water to a strong simmer, or a boil.
  • In a large bowl, use a hand-mixer (or use a stand mixer) to beat the room temperature cream cheese with the sugar until well combined. Mix in the sour cream, vanilla, lemon juice, and zest. Add the eggs, one at a time, mixing just until the yellow disappears.
    4 8 oz cream cheese, 1 cup sugar, 1 cup sour cream, 1 tablespoon vanilla extract, 2 tablespoon lemon juice, 2 tablespoon lemon zest, 4 large eggs
  • Pour half of the batter over the crust in the pan. Add small spoonfuls of the cooled blueberry sauce (about one-third of the sauce) over the surface of the batter. Use a toothpick or stirrer to create swirls in the batter (try not to overlap the sauce).
  • Add the rest of the batter and smooth with a butter knife or an offset spatula. Add another round of blueberry sauce in small drips. And again make swirls.
  • Place the cheesecake in a roasting pan or baking dish. Ladle in enough of the hot water to go about halfway up the side of the pan. Bake for 70 to 75 minutes, until the sides of the cake are set, but the center is still slightly "jiggly."
  • Turn the oven off and crack the door open slightly. Let the cheesecake sit in the oven for 1 hour. Remove the pan from the oven and carefully take the cheesecake out of the roasting pan with the water. Remove the foil. Run a sharp knife along the edge of the cake to help release it (don't release the springform pan yet!).
  • Let the cheesecake sit on the counter for 1 to 2 hours, or until the pan is no longer warm. Place in the fridge to chill for 6 hours, or even better: overnight.
  • Release the side of the springform pan and transfer the cake to a cake stand, or leave it on the pan base. Serve chilled with extra blueberries, blueberry sauce, and mint leaves, if desired.
    fresh blueberries, fresh mint leaves

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Using Frozen Berries: Frozen blueberries work perfectly for the swirl sauce. There is no need to thaw them first; simply simmer them in the saucepan for a few extra minutes to cook off any additional moisture before adding the cornstarch slurry.
  • For a Taller Crust: This recipe is designed for a bottom-only crust. If you prefer the graham cracker crust to go up the sides of the springform pan, increase the crushed crackers to 1 ½ cups and the melted butter to 6 tablespoons.
  • Room Temperature Ingredients: To achieve a velvety, lump-free texture, ensure your cream cheese, eggs, and sour cream are at true room temperature before mixing. Cold ingredients will not incorporate smoothly and can lead to over-mixing, which causes cracks.
  • The Water Bath: For the best results, do not skip the water bath! The gentle, even steam is what creates that signature creamy texture and prevents the top from browning or cracking.
  • Storage: This cheesecake stays fresh in the refrigerator for up to 5 days. For the best flavor and cleanest slices, we recommend making it at least 24 hours before you plan to serve it.

Nutrition

Calories: 378kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 129mg | Sodium: 122mg | Potassium: 134mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 561IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 1mg

One-Pan French Onion Smothered Chicken

by 8 Comments

This One-Pan French Onion Smothered Chicken is a total “knock-out” meal, featuring juicy chicken breasts topped with deeply caramelized onions and a bubbly, double-cheese blanket. For the ultimate comfort food experience, serve this restaurant-quality dish alongside buttery homemade mashed potatoes and a side of crisp green beans almondine.

A French onion-smothered chicken on a bed of mashed potatoes with steamed green beans in the background, all on a white dinner plate.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🧅 The Ingredients

This recipe transforms humble pantry staples and fresh aromatics into a gourmet masterpiece by layering savory, slow-cooked flavors with a sophisticated duo of melted cheeses. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for French onion mothered chicken on a grey wooden background including chicken breasts, onions, beef stock, garlic, flour, oil, cheese, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Chicken Breasts: We recommend slicing the breasts into thin cutlets and pounding them to an even thickness to ensure they stay juicy; however, boneless skinless chicken thighs are a fantastic, extra-tender alternative.
  • Yellow Onions: These provide the best balance of sweetness and savory depth for caramelizing, but you can substitute with sweet Vidalia onions if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Beef Stock: This is the secret to that rich, dark mahogany gravy that defines French Onion flavor; if you must use chicken broth, add a teaspoon of Worcestershire sauce to help deepen the color and umami.
  • The Cheese Duo: While the combination of nutty Gruyère and creamy Provolone creates the perfect “bistro” melt, you can easily swap them for Swiss, Emmental, or even Mozzarella for a milder finish.
  • Balsamic Vinegar: This is used to deglaze the pan and adds a subtle acidity that cuts through the richness of the cheese and onions—red wine vinegar or a splash of dry sherry also works beautifully.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Smothered Chicken

  • Patience is the Secret Ingredient: Truly caramelized onions take about 40 minutes to reach that deep, jammy mahogany color; don’t try to rush them on high heat, or they will burn and turn bitter instead of sweet.
  • The Make-Ahead Hack: You can caramelize the onions up to 5 days in advance and store them in the fridge; when you’re ready for dinner, simply sear the chicken, and assembly takes less than 15 minutes!
  • Don’t Over-Sear the Chicken: Since the chicken cutlets are thin and will spend a few minutes under the broiler to melt the cheese, only sear them until they are golden brown on the outside—they will finish cooking to juicy perfection in the pan.
  • Deglaze the “Fond”: After searing the chicken, those little brown bits stuck to the bottom of the pan (the “fond”) are flavor gold; make sure to scrape them up while the onions cook to incorporate that savory depth into your gravy.
  • The Broiler Watch: Every broiler is different! Stay by the oven once you add the cheese—it only takes about 2–3 minutes to go from perfectly bubbly and golden to overdone.
  • Use an Oven-Safe Skillet: To keep this a true “one-pan” meal, use a cast-iron or heavy stainless steel skillet that can go directly from the stovetop to the broiler without damaging the handle.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make French Onion Smothered Chicken

A person dredging a thin chicken breast through seasoned flour on a large platter on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Season the chicken breasts with salt and pepper, and then dredge them in the seasoned flour.
A person searing lightly breaded chicken breasts in butter and olive oil n a large cast iron skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Sear the chicken breasts in a large oven-proof skillet with butter and olive oil until golden on both sides.
A person dumping dried thyme from a small bowl in one hand and minced garlic from a small bowl in his other hand, both going into a skillet filled with deeply caramelized onions.
  1. Step 3: Caramelize the onions in melted butter until reduced and mahogany in color, about 30 to 40 minutes. Then, stir in the thyme and minced garlic.
A person pouring beef stock from a clear measuring cup into a large cast-iron skillet filled with caramelized onions.
  1. Step 4: Sprinkle on the flour, stir, and cook for 1 minute, and then whisk in the beef stock.
A person placing a round slice of Provolone cheese over a small mound of grated Gruyere cheese that is piled on a seared chicken breast that is nestled in a French onion sauce all in a large cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 5: Nestle the chicken into the sauce and then top each breast with a mound of grated Gruyère and then top with a slice of Provolone.
A person spoon French onion sauce over the top of a French onion smothered chicken that is resting in a pan with three other smothered chicken breasts all in a cast-iron skillet.
  1. Step 6: Broil for 1 to 2 minutes, until the cheese is melted and browned in spots. Top with more sauce. Serve at once, garnish with chopped parsley.

Expert Tip: Master the “Fond” for Deep Flavor

After searing your chicken, you’ll notice golden-brown bits stuck to the bottom of the skillet—this is called “fond,” and it is concentrated flavor gold. Instead of cleaning the pan, let the moisture released by the onions naturally deglaze these bits as they cook; this creates a rich, built-in seasoning that infuses the entire gravy with a professional, savory depth you simply can’t get from broth alone.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Ultimate Comfort Pairing: Serve each chicken breast over a generous bed of buttery homemade mashed potatoes. The buttery potatoes are the perfect vessel for soaking up every drop of that rich, dark onion gravy.
  • Add a Fresh Veggie: Pair this dish with easy green beans almondine. The crisp-tender texture and toasted almonds provide a bright, nutty contrast to the decadent melted cheese and savory onions. Southern-style green beans are wonderful, too!
  • Don’t forget the Bread: Warm, skillet dinner rolls or thick slices of homemade rye bread are perfect for mopping up the extra sauce left in the skillet.
  • A Light Contrast: If you want to balance the richness of the Gruyère and Provolone, add a simple French garden salad with a sharp lemon vinaigrette on the side.
  • Skillet-to-Table Presentation: For the best “wow” factor, serve this meal family-style straight from the skillet. It keeps the chicken hot and ensures the cheese stays perfectly bubbly and melty until the very last bite!

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I prepare French Onion Smothered Chicken in advance?

Yes! You can caramelize the onions up to five days ahead of time and store them in the refrigerator. When you’re ready to eat, simply sear the meat, add the prepared topping, and melt the cheese for a 15-minute meal.

What is the best cut of meat for French Onion Smothered Chicken?

While we recommend using thin-sliced breasts for a lean and elegant presentation, boneless skinless thighs are a wonderful alternative if you prefer a richer, more succulent flavor that stays incredibly moist.

Can I make French Onion Smothered Chicken without Gruyère?

Absolutely. If you don’t have that specific variety on hand, feel free to use Swiss, Emmental, Jarlsberg, or even a sharp white cheddar for a delicious and melty result.

How should I store leftovers of this French Onion Smothered Chicken?

Place any remaining portions in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to three days. To reheat, place them in a skillet over low heat with a splash of broth to keep the sauce glossy and the meat tender.

An overhead view of a large cast-iron skillet filled with four servings of French onion smothered chicken garnished with chopped Italian parsley.

😋 More One-Pan Chicken Dinner Recipes

Ready to make the ultimate chicken comfort dinner? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a French onion-smothered chicken on a bed of mashed potatoes with steamed green beans in the background, all on a white dinner plate.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

One-Pan French Onion Smothered Chicken

This One-Pan French Onion Smothered Chicken features juicy, golden-seared breasts topped with deeply caramelized onions and a bubbly, double-cheese blanket. It’s a restaurant-quality, bistro-style dinner that’s surprisingly easy to make in a single skillet.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time50 minutes
Total Time1 hour 5 minutes
Course: Entree
Cuisine: American, French / American
Servings: 4
Calories: 614kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large ovenproof skillet see NOTES

Ingredients

  • 2 large chicken breasts boneless, skinless, sliced in half to create 4 thin cutlets
  • salt and pepper
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil divided
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter divided
  • 3 large yellow onions thinly sliced and cut into half moons
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon thyme dried
  • 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 cup beef stock or broth
  • 1 cup Gruyere cheese grated
  • 4 slices Provolone cheese
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley fresh, chopped

Instructions

  • Slice the cutlets in half, lengthwise. Season the cutlets all over with salt and pepper. Add the flour to a large platter and mix in ½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper, and ½ teaspoon garlic powder. Dredge the cutlets through the seasoned flour until fully coated.
    2 large chicken breasts, salt and pepper, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, ½ cup all-purpose flour
  • Heat 1 tablespoon of oil and 1 tablespoon of butter over medium heat in a large oven-safe skillet. Sear the floured chicken cutlets until golden on the underside, about 4 to 5 minutes. Gently move the cutlets around in the skillet to prevent sticking and even browning. Flip the cutlets and brown the other sides, about another 4 to 5 minutes. Remove the cutlets from the skillet onto a clean platter or plate.
    2 tablespoon olive oil, 4 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • Melt the remaining 3 tablespoon butter in the same skillet over medium heat. Add the onions (it will fill the pan), and a pinch of salt. Cook, stirring often, until they become very soft, reduced, jammy, and a mahogany color, about 30 to 40 minutes.
    3 large yellow onions
  • Add a pinch of salt, garlic, and thyme to the onions. Stir and cook for 1 minute. Stir in the balsamic, Dijon, and beef stock. Bring to a simmer, stirring occasionally for a minute or two, until slightly thickened.
    2 cloves garlic, 1 teaspoon thyme, 1 tablespoon balsamic vinegar, 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard, 1 cup beef stock
  • Nestle the chicken cutlets into the sauce and let them simmer for a couple of minutes. Top each cutlet with a small handful (about a ¼ cup) of the grated Gruyere. Top with a slice of Provolone
    1 cup Gruyere cheese, 4 slices Provolone cheese
  • Place a grate in your oven about 6 inches from the heating element. Turn the broiler onto HIGH. Place the skillet in the oven and broil for about 1 to 2 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and beginning to brown in a few spots. Keep an eye on it, don't let it burn!
  • Serve at once, garnish with chopped parsley.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Scaling Up for a Crowd: If you are cooking more than four cutlets, be sure to sear the chicken in batches to avoid crowding the pan; this ensures every piece gets that essential golden-brown crust. Once all the chicken is seared and your onion gravy is ready, you can transfer the chicken to a 9×13 baking dish, spoon the onions and sauce over the top, add your cheese, and bake at 375°F for 10–15 minutes until the cheese is perfectly melted and bubbly.
  • Don’t Rush the Onions: The deep, savory flavor of this dish comes entirely from the caramelization process. If the onions start to look dry or brown too quickly, add a tablespoon of water to the skillet to scrape up the flavorful bits and keep them softening evenly.
  • Internal Temperature: For the juiciest results, use a meat thermometer to ensure the chicken reaches an internal temperature of 165°F. Since the cutlets are thin, they cook quickly, so keep a close eye on them during the final broiling step.
  • Make-Ahead Tip: You can prepare the caramelized onion gravy up to 5 days in advance. Simply reheat it in the skillet with a splash of beef broth before nestling the seared chicken back into the pan to finish.

Nutrition

Calories: 614kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 43g | Fat: 31g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 152mg | Sodium: 674mg | Potassium: 801mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1061IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 530mg | Iron: 2mg

Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes

by 2 Comments

Bring the taste of a French bistro to your kitchen with these Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes, where buttery, pan-fried spuds meet deeply caramelized onions. This versatile side is the perfect accompaniment to a succulent French Roast Chicken or even a classic plate of steak frites (substitute Lyonnaise potatoes for the shoestring fries!)

A close-up view of an oval grey serving platter filled with a pile of Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes garnished with chopped Italian parsley.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥔 The Ingredients

This recipe transforms a handful of simple, high-quality kitchen staples into a sophisticated side dish that perfectly balances rich, buttery flavors with a bright, herbaceous finish. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes on a grey wooden background including Yukon gold potatoes, onions, butter, olive oil, salt, pepper, and parsley.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Yukon Gold Potatoes: These are the gold standard for this dish because their waxy texture holds its shape during frying while maintaining a buttery interior. If you can’t find them, red potatoes or “all-purpose” yellow potatoes are great substitutes; avoid Russets, as they are too starchy and will crumble in the pan.
  • Yellow Onions: These provide the classic, deep sweetness when caramelized. You can substitute white onions for a sharper bite or large shallots for a more delicate, gourmet flavor.
  • Unsalted Butter: Using unsalted butter allows you to control the seasoning perfectly. If you only have salted butter on hand, reduce the amount of added salt later in the recipe.
  • Extra-Virgin Olive Oil: Mixing oil with butter raises the smoke point, which prevents the butter from burning while the potatoes crisp up. For an even higher smoke point, you can substitute with avocado or grapeseed oil.
  • Italian Parsley: Flat-leaf Italian parsley adds a necessary bright, fresh finish to cut through the richness of the butter. If you don’t have parsley, fresh chives, or a sprinkle of fresh thyme are excellent herbal alternatives.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Lyonnaise Potatoes

  • Chill Before Slicing: For the cleanest, most uniform rounds, let your parboiled potatoes cool completely (or even refrigerate them for an hour) before slicing. This helps the starches set, preventing the slices from crumbling in the pan.
  • Don’t Crowd the Pan: If the potatoes are piled on top of each other, they will steam instead of fry. Work in batches if necessary to ensure every slice has direct contact with the hot oil and butter.
  • The “No-Stir” Rule: Once you place the potatoes in the hot fat, leave them alone for at least 3–4 minutes. Constant stirring prevents that beautiful “shatter-crisp” crust from forming.
  • Low and Slow for Onions: True caramelization takes time. Don’t rush the onions on high heat; cooking them slowly over medium-low heat is what coaxes out the natural sugars that balance the salty, savory flavor of potatoes.
  • Clarified Butter Upgrade: For an even more elevated experience, consider using clarified butter (ghee). It has a much higher smoke point than regular butter, allowing you to get the potatoes even crispier without the milk solids burning.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes

Five whole, unpeeled gold potatoes in a pot of boiling water on a gas stove.
  1. Step 1: Place the potatoes in cool water and bring to a boil. Simmer for 10 to 12 minutes. Drain and let cool.
A person using a chef's knife to cut a par-boiled gold potato into slices on a large wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: Peel the skin away from the potatoes, then cut them into ¼-inch slices.
A pile of sautéed onions in the center of a large stainless steel skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 3: Sauté the onions until very soft and lightly caramelized (about 15 minutes). Remove them from the pan and set aside.
A close-up view of slices gold potatoes that are being crisped and browned in butter in a large skillet on a gas stove.
  1. Step 4: Melt three tablespoons of the unsalted butter over medium heat and add the potatoes in a single row (you may need to work in batches). Cook, untouched, until lightly browned, and then flip. Salt and pepper to taste.
A close-up view of crispy, browned gold potato slices in a skillet that are being tossed with lightly caramelized onions.
  1. Step 5: Add the cooked onions and gently toss to combine.
A person sprinkling chopped Italian parsley over the top of freshly prepared Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes in a large stainless steel skillet.
  1. Step 6: Garnish with chopped Italian parsley and serve immediately. .

Expert Tip: The Power of the Chill

For the absolute crispiest results, parboil your potatoes a full day in advance and let them chill in the refrigerator uncovered overnight. This process, known as starch retrogradation, allows the surface of the potato to dry out and the internal starches to firm up, ensuring that when they hit the hot fat, they develop a shatter-crisp, golden crust that stays crunchy even after being tossed with the buttery caramelized onions.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • The Ultimate French Feast: For a truly traditional meal, serve these alongside a succulent French Roast Chicken or as the classic “frites” alternative for Steak Frites. The potatoes are perfect for soaking up pan juices and red wine reductions.
  • A Holiday Showstopper: Replace your traditional mashed potatoes with this elegant dish at your next Thanksgiving or Christmas dinner. They provide a beautiful golden pop of color and a sophisticated texture that pairs perfectly with roast turkey, prime rib, or leg of lamb.
  • Elevated Bistro Brunch: Turn your leftovers (if you have any!) into a gourmet breakfast by topping a warm pile of potatoes and onions with a poached or fried egg. The runny yolk creates a rich sauce that complements the crispy potato edges beautifully.
  • Serve Warm: These potatoes are best served immediately while the crust is at its peak crunch. If you are serving a crowd, transfer them to a pre-warmed ceramic platter or serve them directly out of a seasoned cast-iron skillet for a rustic, “farm-to-table” aesthetic.
  • The Final Garnish: Just before serving, add a final sprinkle of flaky sea salt and a fresh handful of chopped Italian parsley. For a bright, acidic “pop” that cuts through the buttery richness, offer a small cruet of Sherry vinegar or high-quality balsamic on the side.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What are the best potatoes to use for Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes?

Yukon Golds are the ideal choice because their waxy texture holds up well during the boiling and frying process, resulting in a creamy interior and a perfectly crispy exterior. Avoid starchy varieties like Russets, as they tend to crumble and lose their shape in the pan.

Can I make Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes ahead of time?

Yes, you can parboil and slice them up to 24 hours in advance. Store the slices in an airtight container in the refrigerator and simply fry them with the onions just before serving to ensure the best possible texture and crunch.

Why do my Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes stick to the pan?

This usually happens if the skillet isn’t hot enough or if the starch wasn’t properly set. Boiling them whole and letting them cool completely before slicing creates a firmer surface that resists sticking and helps develop that signature golden crust.

How do I get the perfect golden crust on Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes?

The secret is to use a combination of butter and oil in a heavy skillet and to avoid stirring too frequently. Let the slices sit undisturbed in the hot fat for several minutes until a deep, crunchy layer forms before flipping them

An overhead view of a grey, oval serving platter filled with a pile of Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes with a gold serving fork nearby and two stemless glasses of white wine next to the dish.

🇫🇷 More Classic French Bistro Recipes

Ready to make the best potatoes this side of Lyon, France? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of them, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

An overhead view of a grey, oval serving platter filled with a pile of freshly prepared Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes with a large gold serving fork sitting on the edge of the platter.
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Authentic Lyonnaise Potatoes

Experience a timeless French bistro classic with these buttery, pan-fried potato rounds and deeply caramelized onions. This authentic recipe delivers the perfect balance of crisp edges and a tender, melt-in-your-mouth interior that pairs beautifully with any roast.
Prep Time15 minutes
Cook Time30 minutes
Total Time45 minutes
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: French
Servings: 4
Calories: 411kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large sturdy skillet (12" or larger) cast-iron or carbon steel

Ingredients

  • 2½ lbs Yukon gold potatoes
  • 4 tablespoon unsalted butter divided
  • 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil divided
  • 2 large yellow onions thinly sliced into half-moons
  • salt and pepper
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place the whole, unpeeled potatoes in a large pot of cool water. Bring the water to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer. Cook for about 10 to 12 minutes.
    2½ lbs Yukon gold potatoes
  • Drain the potatoes and let them cool. Use your fingers to peel the skins off (they should come off easily). Cut them into ¼-inch slices. Set aside.
  • In a large skillet, melt 1 tbps of the butter with 1 tablespoon of extra-virgin olive oil over medium heat. Add the sliced onions and a pinch of salt. Cook, stirring occasionally, for about 15 to 20 minutes until they are very soft, reduced, and starting to brown. Remove them from the pan and set aside.
    4 tablespoon unsalted butter, 2 tablespoon extra-virgin olive oil, 2 large yellow onions
  • Add the remaining 3 tablespoon of butter and 1 tablespoon oil over medium-high heat. Once the butter is foaming, add the potatoes in a single layer (you'll probably need to do this in a couple of batches). Fry for about 5 minutes per side, gently scooting them around in the pan for even browning. Once the undersides are toasty and browned in spots, flip them over and fry for another 5 minutes. You may need to add another 1 to 2 tablespoon of butter.
  • Season with a healthy pinch of salt and pepper and add half of the sautéed onions. Add the rest of the potatoes (if you prepared them in batches), lightly season them with salt and pepper, and then add the rest of the onions. Toss gently and let them heat through for about 1 to 2 minutes.
    salt and pepper
  • Remove from heat, garnish with the chopped parsley, and serve at once.
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Potato Choice: Yukon Gold potatoes are highly recommended for their buttery flavor and ability to hold their shape. Avoid starchy Russet potatoes, which tend to crumble and turn “mealy” during the pan-frying process.
  • The “Boil Whole” Secret: For the cleanest slices and the crispiest edges, always boil the potatoes whole and unpeeled. Slicing them after they have cooled prevents excess starch release, which is the primary reason potatoes stick to the pan.
  • Don’t Crowd the Pan: To achieve a shatter-crisp golden crust, fry the potato slices in a single layer. If your skillet is small, work in batches to ensure the potatoes fry rather than steam.
  • Skillet Selection: A well-seasoned cast-iron or carbon steel skillet is the best tool for this recipe. These pans provide the superior heat retention and natural non-stick surface needed for a perfect, even sear.
  • Make-Ahead Tip: You can parboil and slice the potatoes up to 24 hours in advance. Store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator; chilled potatoes actually fry up even crispier than room-temperature ones!
  • The Onion Technique: Always cook the onions first and set them aside. Adding them back at the very end prevents them from burning while you are waiting for the potatoes to reach their peak crispiness.

Nutrition

Calories: 411kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 468mg | Potassium: 1318mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 526IU | Vitamin C: 64mg | Calcium: 57mg | Iron: 3mg

How to Make the Perfect Reuben Sandwich Entirely From Scratch

by 8 Comments

Creating the perfect “from scratch” Reuben sandwich is a true labor of love that transforms simple ingredients into a deli-style masterpiece. By handcrafting every component—from the slow-cured corned beef and fermented sauerkraut to the fresh-baked rye and zesty Russian dressing—you’ll achieve a level of flavor and texture that no store-bought version can match.

A close-up view of a "From Scratch" Reuben Sandwich resting on a brown paper in a small metal sheet pan with a pickle spear and kettle chips nearby.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe relies on high-quality, wholesome staples that are slowly nurtured into the bold and complex elements of a world-class sandwich.

An overhead view of the ingredients for "From Scratch" Reuben Sandwich including a pile of corned beef, rye bread, Swiss cheese, sauerkraut, Russian dressing, and softened butter.

🗓️ The Master Project Timeline

Since crafting a Reuben from scratch is a multi-week culinary project, this master timeline will help you coordinate the fermentation, curing, and baking so every component is ready for the perfect assembly.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for a World-Class Reuben

  • Squeeze the Sauerkraut: To prevent a soggy sandwich, place your homemade sauerkraut in a clean kitchen towel or paper towels and squeeze out as much moisture as possible before adding it to the bread.
  • The “Cheese Barrier” Technique: Place a slice of Swiss cheese on both the top and bottom pieces of bread. This creates a moisture barrier that protects the rye from the juicy corned beef and kraut, keeping the crust perfectly crisp.
  • Slice Cold, Eat Hot: For the thinnest, most uniform slices of corned beef, chill the meat completely before slicing it against the grain. You can then gently steam the slices or warm them in a pan before assembling.
  • Butter Edge-to-Edge: Use softened butter to coat the exterior of the rye bread all the way to the very edges. This ensures an even, golden-brown crunch across the entire surface.
  • The Steam-Melt Secret: Cover your pan with a lid or a large metal bowl during the griddle process. This traps the heat and steam, ensuring your Swiss cheese is perfectly gooey and melted by the time the bread is golden-brown.
  • Low and Slow is Key: Don’t rush the griddle process. Use medium-low heat so the thick-cut homemade bread has time to toast beautifully while the interior components get hot and the cheese fully melts.
  • The Perfect Ratio: While it’s tempting to overstuff a from-scratch sandwich, aim for a balanced ratio of meat to kraut so you can taste every component you worked so hard to make.

👩🏼‍🍳 How To Make a Reuben Sandwich – From Scratch

A person placing thin slices of cooked corned beef into the basket of a steamer that is nestled into a pot with simmering water.
  1. Step 1: Remove the chilled corned beef from the braising liquid and slice thinly. Steam in a basket for 2 minutes over simmering water, covered.
A person using a spoon to spread homemade Russian dressing over the top of a slice of rye bread on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 2: Add a thick layer of the Russian on one side of half of the slices of bread.
A person placing homemade sauerkraut over the top of a thick slice of Swiss cheese that is resting on a slice of rye bread and a smear of Russian dressing.
  1. Step 3: Add a layer of Swiss cheese and then top with sauerkraut.
A person pile warm, thin slices of corned beef over the top of sauerkraut resting on top of Swiss cheese over a smear of Russian dressing on a slice of homemade rye bread.
  1. Step 4: Pile on a layer of the steamed corned beef.
A person smearing softened butter over the top slice of a "from scratch" reuben sandwich that is about to be griddled.
  1. Step 5: Add another layer of cheese and then spread more Russian dressing on a slice of bread. Add the bread, dressing side down, and butter the top.
A "from scratch" reuben sandwich that has melty cheese and piles of corned beef and sauerkraut being grilled in a non-stick skillet.
  1. Step 6: Cook the sandwiches over low heat until browned on one side. Gently flip and brown on the other side until the cheese is melty. Slice and serve at once.

Expert Tip: Steam-Warm Your Meat

For the most tender, juicy results, briefly steam your sliced corned beef in a skillet with a splash of water or beef broth just before assembling the sandwich. This “blooms” the spices and ensures the meat is piping hot and succulent, preventing the common mistake of a cold center or over-toasted bread.

🍽️ How to Serve

To make the most of your culinary masterpiece, follow these serving suggestions for the ultimate deli-style experience:

  • The Classic Diagonal Cut: Slice your Reuben on a sharp diagonal. Not only does this provide that iconic deli look, but it also makes the sandwich easier to handle and beautifully showcases the layers of homemade beef and kraut.
  • The Essential Pickle: No Reuben is complete without a crisp, cold dill pickle on the side. The bright acidity and crunch of the pickle provide a necessary palate cleanser that cuts through the rich, savory flavors of the corned beef and Russian dressing.
  • The Ultimate Sides: For a truly “from scratch” meal, pair your sandwich with a side of golden, hand-cut French fries or a bowl of crunchy homemade potato chips. The salty crunch of the potatoes is the perfect companion to the tender, griddled rye.
  • Serve Piping Hot: This sandwich is at its absolute best the moment it comes off the griddle. Serve it immediately while the bread is still buttery and crisp and the Swiss cheese is at its most gooey and melted.
  • Extra Dressing on the Side: Offer a small ramekin of your homemade Russian dressing for dipping. It’s a great way to enjoy every last bit of that zesty, creamy flavor.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

Can I prepare the components for a “from scratch” Reuben sandwich in advance?

Absolutely. In fact, most elements like the sauerkraut and corned beef require days or weeks of lead time, while the dressing and bread can be made a day or two before assembly to save time on the day you plan to eat.

Is making a “from scratch” Reuben sandwich really worth the time and effort?

The depth of flavor you get from naturally fermented cabbage and home-cured meat is incomparable to store-bought versions, making the final result a truly gourmet experience that you simply can’t find at a standard deli.

What is the best way to reheat a “from scratch” Reuben sandwich?

To maintain the crispness of the rye bread, it’s best to use a skillet over medium-low heat or a toaster oven. Avoid using a microwave, as it will make the crust soggy and the meat rubbery.

What is the best cheese to use for a “from scratch” Reuben sandwich?

A high-quality Swiss or Emmental is the traditional choice because it melts beautifully and has a mild, nutty profile that complements the salty beef and tangy kraut perfectly without overpowering them.

A person holding half of a "From Scratch" reuben sandwich revealing the stacks of corned beef, and the sauerkraut, melty cheese, surrounded by the toasty slices of rye bread.

🥪 More Iconic Sandwich Recipes

Ready to make a World-Class sandwich in your own kitchen? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A close-up view of a "From Scratch" Reuben Sandwich resting on a brown paper in a small metal sheet pan.
Print Recipe
4.75 from 4 votes

The Ultimate “From Scratch” Reuben Sandwich

Experience the ultimate deli classic with this "from scratch" Reuben sandwich. By handcrafting every element—from the slow-cured corned beef and tangy sauerkraut to the fresh-baked rye and zesty dressing—you’ll create a masterpiece of flavor and texture that is truly in a league of its own.
Prep Time1 hour
Cook Time4 hours
Resting time (total)21 days
Total Time21 days 5 hours
Course: Lunch / Sandwich
Cuisine: Irish-American
Servings: 4
Calories: 751kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • Sauerkraut tools not 100% necesssary, but helpful
  • 2-gallon Ziploc baggie also not 100% necessary, but very helpful
  • Roasting pan for letting the brisket rest in the fridge while curing
  • large Dutch oven or equivalent-size oven-safe pot with a lid (for the corned beef)
  • 9"x5" loaf pan for the bread
  • Large non-stick skillet or griddle, for griddling the sandwiches

Ingredients

Instructions

3 Weeks Before Serving – Make the Sauerkraut

  • Get the sauerkraut in the sealed jars and keep them in a dark, warm spot. (Click on the link in the Ingredients list.)
    2 cups sauerkraut

8 Days Before Serving – Start Making the Corned Beef

  • Make the curing brine and then add it to the brisket in a container (ie, 2-gallon Ziploc baggie). The final 24 hours will be the beef chilling in the liquid in the fridge. (Click on the link in the Ingredients list.)
    1½ lbs corned beef

1 Day Before Serving – Make the Rye Bread and the Russian Dressing

  • Make the bread and store it in a paper bag (with the top of the bag folded over and sealed). Store the Russian Dressing in a jar in the fridge. (Click on the links in the Ingredients list.) Slice the bread into ½-inch to ¾-inch thick slices the day you are making the sandwiches.
    8 slices rye bread, 1 cup Russian dressing

Assemble the Sandwiches and Griddle Them

  • Squeeze excess liquid from the sauerkraut. Set aside.
  • Remove the chilled corned beef from the liquid and use a sharp knife to cut it into thin slices. Bring a pot of water (about 1 inch deep) to a strong simmer. Add a steamer basket and place the slices of corned beef into the basket. Cover and steam for 2 minutes. Remove from the heat.
  • Place the bread slices on a board and add a generous slather of the Russian dressing on half of the slices (4 slices). Add a slice of the cheese, and then a handful of the kraut, top with a couple layers of the corned beef (you may need to fold them), and then another layer of the cheese.
    8 slices Swiss cheese
  • Add a slather of Russian dressing on the remaining slices of bread and top each sandwich with it, dressing side down. Smear butter all over the top of the sandwich.
    ¼ cup unsalted butter
  • Heat your non-stick skillet over medium heat (not too hot!). Working in batches (preferably 2 at a time), carefully place the sandwich, butter side down, onto the skillet. Cook until the underside is golden and toasty, usually about 2 to 3 minutes. While the sandwich is grilling, press it gently with a spatula to compress it somewhat. If desired, cover the skillet with a lid to help expedite the melting of the cheese.
  • Carefully flip the sandwich and continue cooking until the other side is golden and toasty and the cheese is melty. Remove from the heat, slice in half (if desired), and serve at once. If necessary, keep warm in a low-temp oven (225°F) while you prepare the other sandwiches. Serve piping hot!

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Steaming Without a Basket: If you don’t have a steamer basket to warm your chilled corned beef, simply place the sliced meat in a skillet with a tablespoon of water or beef broth. Cover the pan with a tight-fitting lid and heat over medium-low for 1–2 minutes; the trapped steam will quickly make the meat hot and tender without drying it out.
  • Preventing Soggy Bread: Always squeeze your homemade sauerkraut thoroughly in a clean kitchen towel or several paper towels before adding it to the sandwich. Removing this excess moisture is the secret to a crisp, golden-brown crust.
  • The Cheese Barrier: For the best structural integrity, place a slice of Swiss cheese on both the top and bottom pieces of bread. This acts as a protective seal that keeps the juices from the meat and kraut from soaking into the rye.
  • Slicing Tip: For that perfect deli-style texture, ensure your corned beef is completely chilled before slicing. Use a sharp carving knife to cut the meat as thinly as possible against the grain.
  • Make-Ahead Dressing: While you can use the Russian dressing immediately, it is even better if made 24 hours in advance, as this allows the flavors of the horseradish and spices to fully meld.

Nutrition

Calories: 751kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 40g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 154mg | Sodium: 869mg | Potassium: 760mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 654IU | Vitamin C: 57mg | Calcium: 386mg | Iron: 6mg

Classic Guinness Beef Stew (Oven or Stovetop)

by 5 Comments

This Classic Guinness Beef Stew is the ultimate St. Patrick’s Day comfort food, featuring a rich, bacon-infused gravy and melt-in-your-mouth beef. Whether you slow-braise it in the oven or simmer it on the stovetop, it’s best enjoyed with a warm slice of easy homemade Irish Soda Bread to soak up every delicious drop. It’s a traditional, pub-style meal that is incredibly simple to master!

A white soup bowl filled with Classic Guinness Beef Stew topped with crispy bits of bacon and a tall glass of Guinness nearby.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥩 The Ingredients

This recipe builds layers of incredible flavor by combining savory, smoky proteins with a deep, malty stout reduction and a fragrant bouquet of fresh herbs and hearty garden vegetables. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for Classic Guinness Beef Stew on a grey wooden background including chunks of chuck roast, potatoes, bacon, celery, carrots, garlic, beef broth, Guinness beer, brown sugar, and seasonings.

📝 Ingredient Notes and Substitutions

  • Beef Chuck Roast: This is the ideal cut for braising because the marbled fat breaks down during the “low and slow” cook, resulting in melt-in-your-mouth tenderness; avoid using lean “stew meat” packs, which can often turn out dry.
  • Guinness Stout: The classic Guinness Draught is the most popular choice for this recipe, providing a smooth maltiness and iconic deep color that isn’t overly bitter. (For a non-alcoholic version, simply substitute with extra beef broth and a splash of balsamic vinegar for acidity).
  • Thick-Cut Bacon: Using thick slices ensures you have enough rendered fat to sear the beef, which is the secret to the stew’s smoky depth.
  • Fresh Herbs: While fresh thyme and rosemary provide the most traditional “pub-style” aroma, you can substitute them with one teaspoon each of dried herbs if that is what you have on hand.
  • Vegetables: This recipe uses the classic “trinity” of onions, carrots, and celery, but feel free to add other root vegetables like parsnips or turnips for extra heartiness.
  • Brown Sugar: Don’t skip the small amount of sugar! It is essential for balancing the natural bitterness of the stout and the acidity of the tomato paste.

Refer to the recipe card (with video) below for a full list of ingredients and measurements.

🔥 Tips and Tricks for Perfect Guinness Beef Stew

  • Dry the Beef for the Best Sear: For a deep, flavorful crust, use paper towels to pat the beef chunks completely dry before they hit the pan. Wet meat will steam instead of browning, and that golden-brown “fond” on the bottom of the pot is the key to a rich gravy.
  • Don’t Waste the Bacon Fat: The rendered fat from the bacon is liquid gold. Searing your beef in it adds a smoky complexity that you simply can’t get from plain vegetable oil.
  • The “Oops” Thickening Fix: If you forget to flour the beef at the start or simply want a thicker sauce, mix two tablespoons of softened butter with two tablespoons of flour to create a paste (beurre manié). Stir small bits of this paste into the simmering stew during the last 30 minutes for a silky, professional finish.
  • Low and Slow is Essential: Whether you are using the oven or the stovetop, avoid the temptation to turn up the heat. A gentle, “lazy” simmer is what breaks down the tough fibers in the chuck roast.
  • Keep the Lid Tight: To ensure your potatoes become perfectly tender, keep the lid on to trap the steam. Only remove the lid during the final 10 minutes if you want to reduce and thicken the gravy further.
  • Make it Ahead of Time: This stew is a “make-ahead” dream. The flavors actually deepen and improve after a night in the refrigerator, making it the perfect recipe to prep on Sunday or Monday for a stress-free St. Patrick’s Day dinner.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Classic Guinness Beef Stew

A large platter filled with chunk of chuck roast that have been seasoned with salt and pepper and toss with flour.
  1. Step 1: Season the cubed chuck roast with salt and pepper and then toss with the flour.
A person using a wooden spatula to stir bacon pieces that are being cooked in large Dutch oven on a gas stove.
  1. Step 2: Cook the bacon in a large (oven-safe with lid) pot until crispy. Remove and leave the rendered bacon grease. Set the bacon aside (you’ll use half of it later and garnish with the rest).
A person using a wooden spoon to stir chunks of chuck roast that are being seared in a large Dutch oven.
  1. Step 3: Sear the beef until browned all over. Remove from the pot and set aside.
A person dumping minced garlic from a small bowl into a large Dutch oven that is filled with simmering, sautéed carrots, onions, and celery, with a blob of tomato paste sitting on top.
  1. Step 4: Add the butter and then sauté the carrots, onions, and celery until soft, about 5 minutes. Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another 1 to 2 minutes.
A person pouring stout beer from a Guinness bottle into a large Dutch oven that is filled with simmering carrots, onions, and celery.
  1. Step 5: Pour in the beer, and use a wooden spatula to scrape up any bits on the bottom of the pot. Bring to a boil and simmer for 2 minutes.
A person pouring four cups of beef broth from a large glass measuring cup into a Dutch oven that is filled with simmering vegetables in beer and topped with seared chunks of beef chuck roast.
  1. Step 6: Add back in the beef (with accumulated juices), Worcestershire sauce, brown sugar, beef broth, salt (1½ tsp), and pepper (1 tsp). Top with the herbs. Cover and place in a 325°F oven for 90 minutes.
A person transferring cubed gold potatoes from a white bowl into a large pot of simmering classic Guinness beef stew.
  1. Step 7: Remove the pot from the oven and stir in the potatoes (see NOTES) and half of the crispy bacon. Cover and place back in the oven for 45 to 60 minutes, until the potatoes are tender.
A close up view of a bowl filled with classic Guinness beef stew and topped with crispy pieces of bacon and chopped Italian parsley.
  1. Step 8: Remove the herbs and ladle into bowls, and sprinkle with reserved bacon pieces and chopped parsley.

Expert Tip: Mastering the Stovetop Simmer

When cooking this stew on the stovetop, the key is to maintain a very low, gentle simmer rather than a rolling boil to ensure the beef stays succulent and tender. Keep the lid tightly closed to create a “steam chamber” that ensures the potatoes cook through perfectly, but be sure to give the pot a gentle stir every 15–20 minutes to prevent the heavy, rich gravy from sticking or scorching on the bottom of the pot.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

What is the best cut of meat for Guinness Beef Stew?

Chuck roast is the top choice because its marbled fat breaks down during the long cooking process. Avoid leaner cuts like sirloin or “stew meat” packs, which can become dry and tough when braised.

Can I make Guinness Beef Stew ahead of time?

Absolutely, as the flavors actually improve and deepen after sitting in the refrigerator overnight. Simply reheat it gently on the stovetop over low heat when you are ready to serve.

How do I thicken my Guinness Beef Stew if the gravy is too thin?

You can stir in a “beurre manié,” which is a simple paste made of equal parts softened butter and flour. Alternatively, a cornstarch slurry added during the final minutes of simmering will create a beautiful, glossy consistency.

Can I prepare Guinness Beef Stew without using alcohol?

Yes, you can replace the stout with an equal amount of extra beef broth and a tablespoon of balsamic vinegar or Worcestershire sauce. This provides a similar depth of color and a nice acidic balance to the rich meat.

What are the best side dishes to serve with Guinness Beef Stew?

A warm loaf of homemade Irish Soda Bread is the traditional favorite for soaking up the savory gravy. You can also serve it over a bed of creamy mashed potatoes or alongside roasted root vegetables for a hearty, complete meal.

A bowl of classic Guinness beef stew in a white soup bowl and garnished with crispy bits of bacon and chopped Italian parsley.

🇮🇪 More Classic Irish Recipes

Ready to make the best beef stew this side of Dublin? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A bowl of classic Guinness beef stew in a white soup bowl and garnished with crispy bits of bacon and chopped Italian parsley.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Classic Guinness Beef Stew (Oven or Stovetop)

This "low and slow" Classic Guinness Beef Stew features melt-in-your-mouth beef seared in smoky bacon fat and a rich, malty stout gravy. Perfectly adaptable for the oven or stovetop, it’s the definitive pub-style comfort meal to serve this St. Patrick's Day or any time you're craving amazing comfort food!
Prep Time30 minutes
Cook Time3 hours
Total Time3 hours 30 minutes
Course: Lunch / Dinner
Cuisine: Irish, Irish-American
Servings: 10
Calories: 483kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • 1 large Dutch oven (with lid) or any oven-safe pot with a lid, see NOTES for preparing on the stovetop.

Ingredients

  • 3½ lb chuck roast cut into bite-sized pieces
  • salt and pepper
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 6 slices bacon thick-cut, diced
  • 2 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • 1 large onion chopped
  • 4 medium carrots peeled and sliced (not too thin)
  • 3 stalks celery sliced
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 11.2 oz bottle Guinness beer stout, or Extra Stout
  • 2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
  • 2 tablespoon brown sugar dark
  • 4 cups beef broth
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 3 sprigs fresh rosemary
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 2 lbs gold potatoes peeled and cubed
  • 2 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped, for garnish (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 325°F.
  • Place the cubed beef on a large platter and sprinkle liberally with salt and pepper all over. Sprinkle on the flour and toss to fully coat. Set aside.
    3½ lb chuck roast, salt and pepper, ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • Heat your large Dutch oven (or pot) over medium heat. Add the diced bacon and cook until crispy, stirring occasionally. Use a slotted spoon to remove the bacon from the pan onto a paper towel-lined plate. Leave the rendered bacon grease in the pot.
    6 slices bacon
  • Add the beef and cook, stirring often, until browned all over. Remove the beef from the pot and set it aside.
  • Melt the butter in the pot and add the onion, carrots, and celery. Sauté until softened, about 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and tomato paste. Cook for 1 minute.
    2 tablespoon unsalted butter, 1 large onion, 4 medium carrots, 3 stalks celery, 4 cloves garlic, 2 tablespoon tomato paste
  • Add the meat with accumulated juices back into the pot. Pour in the beer and bring to a boil. Simmer for 2 minutes. Use a wooden spatula (or spoon) to scrape up any stuck-on bits on the bottom of the pot.
    1 11.2 oz bottle Guinness beer
  • Stir in the Worcestershire sauce, brown sugar, beef broth, salt (1½ tsp), and pepper (1 tsp). Place the thyme, rosemary, and bay leaves on top and gently press them with your spatula into the liquid. Cover the pot and place it in the oven for 90 minutes.
    2 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce, 2 tablespoon brown sugar, 4 cups beef broth, 3 sprigs fresh thyme, 3 sprigs fresh rosemary, 2 bay leaves
  • Carefully remove the pot from the oven and remove the lid. Use a pair of tongs to gently lift the herbs out of the pot. Stir in the potatoes and half of the crispy bacon bits (save the remaining bacon for garnishing). Place the herbs back on the surface of the stew. Cover and return to the oven for 45 to 60 minutes, or until the potatoes are tender, but not mushy.
    2 lbs gold potatoes
  • Remove from the oven. Remove the herbs. If the stew seems a little thin, mix a cornstarch slurry of 2 tablespoon water with 2 tablespoon cornstarch. Slowly stir it into the stew and continue stirring until slightly thickened.
  • Serve at once, garnished with the remaining bacon bits and chopped Italian parsley (if desired).
    2 tablespoon Italian parsley

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Stovetop Method: If you aren’t using the oven, maintain the lowest possible simmer on your burner with the lid tightly closed. Be sure to give the stew a gentle stir every 15–20 minutes to ensure the thick, rich gravy doesn’t scorch on the bottom of the pot.
  • Slow Cooker Method: To adapt this for a crockpot, follow steps 1–4 on the stovetop first; searing the beef in bacon fat and deglazing with the Guinness is essential for the best flavor. Transfer everything to the slow cooker and cook on Low for 7–8 hours or High for 4–5 hours, adding the potatoes halfway through the cooking time.
  • Thickening Tip: For a “pub-style” gravy, you can skip the cornstarch slurry and instead mix 2 tablespoons of softened butter with 2 tablespoons of flour to create a paste. Stir small bits of this into the stew during the last 30 minutes of cooking until your desired consistency is reached.
  • Make Ahead: This stew is even better the next day! If preparing in advance, let it cool completely before refrigerating. Reheat gently on the stovetop over low heat, adding a splash of beef broth if the gravy has thickened too much overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 124mg | Sodium: 677mg | Potassium: 1196mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 4363IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 5mg

Easy Homemade Sauerkraut

by Leave a Comment

There is nothing quite like the tangy crunch of homemade sauerkraut, and it is incredibly easy to make with just cabbage, salt, and caraway seeds. While the process is straightforward, I used some fun tools from Masontops that made the fermentation even easier and more foolproof. This step-by-step guide will show you how to create a delicious, probiotic-packed batch right in your own kitchen.

A close-up view of a pile of homemade sauerkraut on a white dinner plate with two seared bratwurst links and a small bowl of brown mustard sitting on the plate nearby.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥬 The Ingredients

This recipe relies on just three basic, natural components that work together to create a complex, tangy flavor and a satisfying probiotic crunch. Find ingredient notes (including substitutions and variations) below.

An arrangement of ingredients for homemade sauerkraut on a wooden board including head of green cabbage, caraway seeds, and salt.

📌 Tips and Tricks for Fermentation Success

  • Use the Core as a Handle: When using a mandolin, keep the core attached to the cabbage quarters; it acts as a perfect natural handle to protect your fingers while you get those paper-thin shreds.
  • The “Floaters” Rule: Always keep your cabbage submerged under the brine to prevent mold; using a dedicated weight like a Pickle Pebble is a great way to ensure everything stays safely under the liquid.
  • Don’t Toss the Outer Leaf: That reserved exterior leaf is a secret weapon—tucking a hand-cut circle of it over your shredded cabbage creates an extra barrier that keeps small bits from floating to the surface.
  • Pound for Better Brine: Don’t be afraid to get aggressive with your Pickle Packer; the more you pound and massage the cabbage, the more natural juices it will release, creating a better brine for fermentation.
  • Temperature Matters: Store your jars in a cool, dark place like a pantry; consistent temperatures help the flavors develop slowly and prevent the cabbage from becoming too soft.
  • Trust Your Nose: It is normal for the jars to have a strong, tangy aroma while the Pickle Pipe vents gas, but your sauerkraut should always smell clean and acidic, never “off” or unpleasant.

Expert Tip

While the specialized tools from Masontops.com make the fermentation process incredibly hands-off and reliable, you can still achieve great results with common household items if you’re just starting.

If you don’t have a Pickle Packer, use the end of a wooden spoon or your clean fists to firmly bruise the cabbage, and replace the Pickle Pebble with a small, clean glass jelly jar that fits inside the mouth of your mason jar to keep everything submerged. To manage gases without a Pickle Pipe, simply use a standard lid and “burp” the jar once a day by slightly unscrewing it to let the pressure escape before sealing it back up.

👩🏼‍🍳 How to Make Homemade Sauerkraut

A person using a mandolin to finely shred green cabbage on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 1: Save an outer cabbage leaf for later use. Then, cut the cabbage into quarters, and then carefully shred it very thinly on your mandolin or with a large, sharp knife.
A person transferring caraway seeds from a small bowl into a large wooden bowl filled with shredded green cabbage.
  1. Step 2: Place the cabbage in a large bowl and top with the salt and caraway seeds (2 tablespoon each for a large cabbage and 1 tablespoon each for a small cabbage, 2 lbs).
A person using a large wooden rod to crush green cabbage that has been sprinkled with salt in a large wooden bowl.
  1. Step 3: Toss the cabbage to distribute the salt and caraway seeds. Massage it with your hands for about 1 minute, and then pound with a blunt object, until the cabbage is wilted and very juicy, about 3 minutes.
A person standing behind a glass jar that is filled with crushed green cabbage with a round piece of a cabbage leaf resting on the cabbage at the top of the jar.
  1. Step 4: Pack the cabbage into a Mason jar. Take the reserved cabbage leaf and cut a circle that will fit over the cabbage.
A person standing behind a jar filled with crushed, shredded green cabbage topped with a circular piece of a cabbage leaf and a glass weight.
  1. Step 5: Place a weight over the top layer of cabbage. The shredded cabbage should be completely submerged in the liquid.
A person gripping two glass jars filled with green cabbage and topped with a "pickle pipe" on a wooden cutting board.
  1. Step 6: Seal the jars and place them in a dark spot to ferment, about 2 to 3 weeks.

🍽️ How to Serve

  • Classic Sausage Topper: Pile a generous amount onto grilled bratwurst, kielbasa, or hot dogs to add a tangy crunch that cuts through the richness of the meat.
  • The Ultimate Reuben: Layer it onto rye bread with corned beef, Swiss cheese, and Russian dressing for a professional-quality sandwich at home.
  • Savory Pork Side: Serve it alongside roast pork or pan-seared chops; the caraway seeds in this recipe pair perfectly with traditional pork dishes.
  • Grain Bowl Boost: Add a large spoonful to Buddha bowls, quinoa salads, or rice bowls for a punch of flavor and a healthy dose of probiotics.
  • Zesty Potato Salad: Mix a bit of the kraut (and even a splash of the brine) into your favorite potato salad recipe to give it a bright, acidic lift.
  • Straight from the Jar: Enjoy a small forkful as a daily probiotic snack or as a palate cleanser between courses.

🙋🏽‍♂️ Frequently Asked Questions

How long does it take for homemade sauerkraut to ferment?

It typically takes about three weeks in a cool, dark pantry to reach the ideal level of tanginess and texture.

Where should I store my homemade sauerkraut once it is ready?

After the three-week period, move the jars into the refrigerator to slow down the bacterial activity and preserve the flavor.

Is it normal for homemade sauerkraut to have a strong aroma?

A pungent, acidic scent is a natural byproduct of the process as gases are released, so don’t be alarmed as long as everything stays submerged.

Can I use different types of cabbage for homemade sauerkraut?

While green varieties are the most traditional, red or Savoy options work just as well and can provide a beautiful color to your finished batch.

Why is my homemade sauerkraut not producing enough brine?

If the liquid doesn’t naturally rise above the solids after pounding, you may need to add a small amount of salt water (one teaspoon of salt per cup of water) to ensure everything stays covered.

A person using a fork to hold up a bunch of homemade sauerkraut from a glass jar with another jar of sauerkraut in the background.

😋 Recipes Perfect for Homemade Sauerkraut

Ready to make the best homemade sauerkraut of all time? Go for it!

And when you do, be sure to take a photo of it, post it on Instagram, and tag @HowToFeedaLoon and hashtag #HowToFeedaLoon!

A person using a fork to hold up a bunch of homemade sauerkraut from a glass jar with another jar of sauerkraut in the background.
Print Recipe
No ratings yet

Easy Homemade Sauerkraut

This simple, three-ingredient recipe transforms fresh green cabbage and caraway seeds into a crunchy, tangy, probiotic-rich condiment. After a three-week fermentation, you'll have a delicious homemade sauerkraut that perfectly complements everything from grilled sausages to classic Reuben sandwiches.
Prep Time15 minutes
Fermentation Time21 days
Total Time21 days 15 minutes
Course: Condiment, Side
Cuisine: German / American / European
Servings: 8
Calories: 30kcal
Author: Kris Longwell

Equipment

  • mandolin or a sharp knife
  • blunt object Pickle packer, or a wooden spoon (or your fists)
  • 2 wide-mouth Mason jars standard-size Mason jars with lids
  • weights Pickle pebble, or a small (clean) rock or weight
  • Pickle pipe to let the fermentation gases release, see NOTES

Ingredients

  • 1 large green cabbage 2½ to 3 lbs, see NOTES
  • 1 to 1½ tablespoon salt table salt
  • 2 teaspoon caraway seeds

Instructions

  • Remove one or two clean outer whole leaves. Set aside. Cut the cabbage in half and then cut each half in half, leaving the core in place.
    1 large green cabbage
  • Use a mandolin to carefully shred the cabbage quarters thinly. Or, use a sharp knife. Discard the core portions.
  • Place the shredded cabbage in a large bowl and add the salt and caraway seeds. Use your hands to toss the cabbage until the salt and seeds are evenly distributed. Massage the cabbage with your hands for 1 to 2 minutes.
    1 to 1½ tablespoon salt, 2 teaspoon caraway seeds
  • Use a blunt object (or your fists) to pound and mix the cabbage until it is very wilted and juicy. This will take about 3 minutes. Use your Pickle Packer, if you have one See NOTES).
  • Once the cabbage is thoroughly pounded and juicy, it's time to pack the jar. Place a couple of handfuls of the cabbage into a standard-size Mason jar and pack it down firmly. If you have a Pickle Packer, use this. As you pack the cabbage down, the brine will rise in the jar. Keep adding and packing down the cabbage until the jar is filled to the shoulder. Don't overfill! If you have extra cabbage, save it for a yummy salad. One large cabbage will fill two jars (or close to it), and a small (2 lb) cabbage will fill one jar.
  • Now, take the clean cabbage leaves you set aside and lay them flat on your cutting board. Set the jar(s) on the leaf (or leaves) and use a knife to cut a circle out of the leaf, close to the diameter of the jar. Place the leaf (or leaves) directly over the surface of the cabbage.
  • Place a small (but heavy) object on top of the leaf. If you have a Pickle Pebble, this is where you use them (see NOTES). It is important to keep the cabbage submerged entirely in the brine. Wipe the rim of the jar, then secure the lid to the jar, or add the Pickle Pipe, and then secure with the ring. (see NOTES).
  • Set the jar(s) in a dark place to ferment, about 2½ to 3 weeks. If your home is chilly, this may take up to a month or longer for the fermentation process to complete.
  • After a day or two, the cabbage will continue to release juice. If the cabbage looks dry, make a brine of ½ teaspoon salt dissolved in ½ cup of water. Add enough to keep the cabbage completely submerged.
  • Over the next few weeks, the cabbage will expand somewhat, pockets of gas may appear, the color changes from bright to dull green, bubbles will appear on the surface, and a strong sulfurous odor might be emitted from the jar. This is all good and normal!

Video

Notes

NOTE: Watch the video in the recipe card for visual guidance.
  • Cabbage Size and Salt: For a 2 lb cabbage, you’ll need 1 tablespoon salt. For larger heads of cabbage, you’ll need to increase the salt from 1½ to 2 tablespoon salt (for a very large cabbage). 
  • Specialized Tools: You can easily order the specialized tools used in this recipe—the Pickle Packer, Pickle Pebbles, and Pickle Pipe—directly from Masontops.com to make the fermentation process even more foolproof and hands-off.
  • Tool Substitutions: If you don’t have a Pickle Packer, the end of a wooden spoon or your clean, firm fists work perfectly to bruise the cabbage and release its natural juices.
  • Weight Alternatives: In place of a glass Pickle Pebble, you can use a small, clean jelly jar that fits inside the mouth of your mason jar to keep the cabbage submerged under the brine.
  • Manual Venting: If you aren’t using a self-venting Pickle Pipe, be sure to “burp” your jar daily by briefly loosening the lid to release fermentation gases before resealing.
  • The Cabbage Leaf Trick: Using the reserved outer leaf circle as a secondary barrier is highly recommended to keep small bits of shredded cabbage from floating to the surface.
  • Storage: Once the three-week fermentation period is complete, replace the fermentation lid with a standard lid and move the jars to the refrigerator to preserve the flavor and texture.

Nutrition

Calories: 30kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 368mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 113IU | Vitamin C: 42mg | Calcium: 50mg | Iron: 1mg